danload 6000 script language reference …...danload 6000 script language reference manual _____...

DanLoad 6000 SCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE MANUAL __________________________________________

DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL

HOUSTON, TEXAS

Part Number: 3-9000-678

Revision F

SEPTEMBER 1999

This page intentionally left blank.

Year 2000 Warranty

The Company represents and warrants that computer programs in any medium, software, firmwareand combinations thereof (“Deliverables”) manufactured by the Company and incorporated intoor supplied by the Company for use with goods manufactured by the Company will, under normaluse and care:

i) recognize and accept dates falling on or after 1 January 2000;

ii) recognize and accept the year 2000 and every succeeding fourth year as leap years;

iii) recognize and accept 29 February in the year 2000 and every succeeding fourthyear;

iv) record, store, process, sequence, present and output calendar dates and data relatedto dates falling on or after 1 January 2000, in the same manner and with the samefunctionality as they do on or before 31 December 1999 and without errors oromissions; and

v) lose no functionality with respect to the introduction into them of dates or datarelated to dates falling on or after 1 January 2000;

provided that, in the case of any non-conforming Deliverables that are returned to the Companypromptly following discovery of the non-conformity, the Company will, at its option and cost,repair or replace such Deliverable or refund to the Purchaser the purchase price therefor. Thisshall be the Purchaser’s sole and exclusive remedy for breach of the foregoing warranty.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company shall not, under any circumstances whatsoever, beliable for any defects or errors caused by: materials or workmanship made, furnished or specifiedby the Purchaser; non-compliance with the Company’s installation or operation requirements;failure to install any revisions and/or upgrades to the Deliverables deemed mandatory by theCompany; any modifications to Deliverables not previously authorized by the Company in writing;the use by the Purchaser of any non-authorized spare or replacement parts in connection with thegoods used in conjunction with the Deliverables; or the use of the Deliverables with any hardwareor software not supplied by the Company. The Purchaser shall at all times remain solelyresponsible for the adequacy and accuracy of all information supplied by it. Any third partycontent in Deliverables shall carry only the warranty extended by the original manufacturer.

THE FOREGOING CONSTITUTES THE COMPANY’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVEWARRANTY IN RELATION TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE DELIVERABLES AS ITRELATES TO THE CHANGE FROM YEAR 1999 TO YEAR 2000 OR THE OCCURRENCEOF LEAP YEARS THEREAFTER, AND THE PURCHASER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FORBREACH THEREOF. IN NO EVENT WILL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT,CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOSS OF USE,BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF PROFITS, IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER THECOMPANY HAD NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

The foregoing warranty shall remain valid until the later of December 31, 2000 or one year afterthe date that the Deliverable was shipped.

DANIEL INDUSTRIES, INC.

DANLOAD 6000 SCRIPT LANGUAGE

REFERENCE MANUAL

NOTICE

DANIEL INDUSTRIES, INC. AND DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL ("DANIEL")SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS IN THIS MANUALOR OMISSIONS FROM THIS MANUAL. DANIEL MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSOR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THIS MANUALAND, IN NO EVENT, SHALL DANIEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OFPRODUCTION, LOSS OF PROFITS, ETC.

PRODUCT NAMES USED HEREIN ARE FOR MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIERIDENTIFICATION ONLY AND MAY BE TRADEMARKS/REGISTERED TRADEMARKSOF THESE COMPANIES.

COPYRIGHT © 1999BY DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL

HOUSTON, TEXAS, U.S.A.

All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced orcopied in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic ormechanical - without first receiving the written permission ofDaniel Measurement and Control, Houston, Texas, U.S.A.

WARRANTY

Daniel Measurement and Control ("Daniel") warrants all equipment manufactured by it to be freefrom defects in workmanship and material, provided that such equipment was properly selectedfor the service intended, properly installed, and not misused. Equipment which is returned,transportation prepaid to Daniel within twelve (12) months of the date of shipment (eighteen (18)months from date of shipment for destinations outside of the United States), which is found afterinspection by Daniel to be defective in workmanship or material, will be repaired or replaced atDaniel' s sole option, free of charge, and return-shipped at lowest cost transportation. Alltransportation charges and export fees will be billed to the customer. Warranties on devicespurchased from third party manufacturers not bearing a Daniel label shall have the warrantyprovided by the third party manufacturer.

The warranties specified herein are in lieu of any and all other warranties, express or implied,including any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.

Daniel shall be liable only for loss or damage directly caused by its sole negligence. Daniel'sliability for any loss or damage arising out of, connected with, or resulting from any breach hereofshall in no case exceed the price allocable to the equipment or unit thereof which gives rise to theclaim. Daniel's liability shall terminate one year after the delivery of the equipment except foroverseas deliveries and extended warranty products as noted above.

In no event, whether as a result of breach of warranty or alleged negligence, shall Daniel be liablefor special or consequential damages, including, but not limited to, loss of profits or revenue; lossof equipment or any associated equipment; cost of capital; cost of substitute equipment, facilitiesor services; downtime costs; or claims of customers of the purchaser for such damages.

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Functional Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.2 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1.3 General Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

2.0 INSTALLATION

2.1 DanLoad 6000 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.2 Installation Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92.2.1 Card Cage Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92.2.2 Input / Output Board Description and Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2.3 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

2.4 Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-342.4.1 General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-342.4.2 Selection / Installation of Electrical Wire and Cable . . . . . . . . . . 2-362.4.2.1 Input / Output Field Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-392.4.2.2 Electrical Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-402.4.3 Selection / Installation of Wire Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

2.5 Installing the Secondary Keypad / Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-442.5.1 Hardware Setup / Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-442.5.2 Software Setup / Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-442.5.3 Wiring Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-452.5.4 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

3.0 SETUP

3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.2 Man-Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93.2.1 Data Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103.2.2 Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133.2.3 Script Language Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

3.3 Initial Setup Procedure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

ii

3.3.1 Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

3.4 Initial Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

3.5 Process I/O Signal Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-353.5.1 Physical I/O Signal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-363.5.2 Flow Measurement and General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

3.6 Product Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-893.6.1 Sequential Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-893.6.2 In-Line Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-913.6.3 Off-Rack Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91

3.7 Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95

3.8 Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103

3.9 Setup Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106

3.10 Set Contrast / Backlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120

4.0 OPERATION

4.1 Physical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34.1.1 Displays and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34.1.1.1 LED Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34.1.1.2 LCD Alpha-Numeric / Graphic Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54.1.1.3 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

4.2 Batch Delivery Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104.2.1 Controlling the Batch Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

4.3 Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-224.3.1 Additive Injection Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

4.4 Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-344.4.1 Example Data Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

4.5 Alarms /Fault Analysis / Correction /Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . 4-434.5.1 Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-444.5.2 Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-614.5.3 Crash Memory Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

5.0 FLOW METER PROVING5.1 General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85.1.1 Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5.2 Tank Prover Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-265.2.1 Meter Proof RUN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-275.2.2 Meter Proof RUN 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-285.2.3 Meter Proof RUN 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-295.2.4 Meter Proof RUN 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

iii

5.2.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

5.3 Master Meter Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-345.3.1 Meter Proof RUN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-365.3.2 Meter Proof RUN 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-375.3.3 Meter Proof RUN 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-385.3.4 Meter Proof RUN 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-385.3.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

6.0 PROGRAM CODE DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 Program Code Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2 Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

6.3 Security Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

6.4 Unit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

6.5 Valve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

6.6 Meter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

6.7 Component Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

6.8 Delivery Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

6.9 Digital Valve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52

6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56

6.12 Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66

6.13 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74

6.14 I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

6.15 Additive I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126

6.16 Component I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128

6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-134

6.18 Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152

6.19 Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-158

6.20 Dynamic Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1626.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-166

6.21 Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170

6.22 Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-176

6.23 Additive pumps / Block Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-188

iv

APPENDICES

A Installation Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.1 Flow Meter Logical Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

A.2 Component Logical I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

A.3 Flow Control Valve Logical I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

A.4 Additive Injection Logical I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

A.5 Miscellaneous Logical I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

Worksheets 1 to 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15

B.1 Program Code Default Value Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

B.2 Version Dependent Program Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-51

C Recommended Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

D Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

FIGURES

1-1 Typical Load Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

2-1 Standard Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2-2 Standard Enclosure Field Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2-3 Shallow Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2-4 Shallow Enclosure Field Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2-5 Card cage Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2-6 DC Power Supply Voltage Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2-7 AC Power Input Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2-8 CPU Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

2-9 CPU & Analog Inputs Board Combination Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

2-10 DUART Board Address Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

2-11 2-Channel Meter Pulse Input Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2-12 Version 1 AC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

v

2-13 Version 2 AC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

2-14 Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . 2-24

2-15 Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

2-16 DC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

2-17 Secondary Keypad / Display Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

3-1 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

3-2 Parameters List Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3-3 General Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

3-4 Parameter View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

3-5 Keypad (English Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

3-6 Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

3-7 Chinese Script Characters Bitmap (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

3-8 Chinese Script Characters Bitmap (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

3-9 Thai Script Character Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

3-10 Alphanumeric Codes for Thai Bitmap Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3-11 Alpha-Numeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

3-12 Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

3-13 Set Date and Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

3-14 Alarm Action Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64

3-15 Flow Measurement - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86

3-16 Delivery - Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92

3-17 Digital Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109

3-18 Two-Stage Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111(without Stem-Switches)

3-19 Two-Stage Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112(with Stem-Switches)

3-20 Set Contrast / Backlighting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120

4-1 Keypad Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

4-2 Key Functions (Batch Delivery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

4-3 Recipe Selection Display (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

vi

4-4 Additive Selection Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

4-5 Loading Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

4-6 Diagnostic Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

4-7 Input / Outputs Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

4-8 DUART Ports Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

5-1 Prover / Meter Volume Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5-2 Meter Proving Report for Tank Prover Method (Typical) . . . . . . . 5-47

5-3 Meter Proving Report for Master Meter Method (Typical) . . . . . . 5-48

Master Meter Meter-Factors Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

6-1 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

6-2 Parameters List Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

APN A Worksheets 1 to 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 to A-30

APN B Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 to B-50

Section 1

Introduction

Functional Characteristics

Hardware Configuration

General Terminology

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 1

This manual contains information on the installation, setup, and operation of the DanLoad 6000.

The DanLoad 6000 is a versatile microcomputer based batch delivery controller and liquid flow

computer. This type of instrument is commonly referred to as a Preset in the tanker vehicle

loading industry. The DanLoad 6000 is easy to setup on-site for utilization in virtually any

application that requires precise flow measurement and control of liquid batch deliveries. Batch

delivery operations are easily conducted in a logical manner. A batch delivery can be setup and

started with several intuitive commands. The instrument provides a graphic display of the

progress of the batch delivery.

Note

This manual covers the Script Language DanLoad 6000 software configuration version 1.20.

Several configuration parameters (Program Codes) and functions have been added or changed

from the Script Language DanLoad 6000 software version 1.00 and version B of this manual.

The Script Language DanLoad 6000 software version number is displayed during the startup

sequence after power is applied to the instrument.

How to use the Manual

The information contained in this manual is intended for use by operators, shift supervisors,

instrument technicians, process engineers, and terminal / plant managers. To the extent that is

practical, each section of the manual is designed as a stand alone document. The last section,

Section 6, contains a reference for the function of all program codes (parameters) that define the

operation of the DanLoad 6000.

Information applicable to new installations is located in the following sections.

# Section 1 - Introduction

# Section 2 - Installation

# Section 3 - Setup

# Section 6 - Program Code Definitions

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

1 - 2 __________________________________________________ Introduction

Information applicable to system operation is located in the following sections.

# Section 4 - Operation

# Section 5 - Flow Meter Proving

The individual sections contain the following information.

# Section 1 - Introduction (this section)

This section contains an overview of the capabilities of the DanLoad 6000. A glossary of terms

used throughout the manual is located at the rear of this section.

# Section 2 - Installation

This section contains information on installation planning, mechanical installation, and

electrical installation of the DanLoad 6000. Design considerations for on-site placement,

mounting, and wiring methods are included in this section. Also read Section 3, Section 6,

Appendix A, and Appendix B before installing the instrument.

# Section 3 - Setup

This section contains information on the initial setup (functional configuration), script language

activities and modification of setup parameters stored in the DanLoad 6000. The DanLoad

6000 retains setup information in non-volatile memory. Therefore, the initial setup can be

performed in a shop or office, before on-site physical installation of the instrument. Also read

Section 2, Section 6, and Appendix B before installing the instrument.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 3

# Section 4 - Operation

This section contains detailed information on local operation of the DanLoad 6000. Single

product delivery, multi-component blending, and additive injection procedures are covered.

Information on data logs and fault analysis and correction is also located in this section.

# Section 5 - Flow Meter Proving

This section contains information on operator directed, manual flow meter proving using the

DanLoad 6000. The instrument can monitor and perform flow meter proofs using tank meter

provers, master flow meters, or mechanical displacement pipe provers.

# Section 6 - Program Code Definitions

This section contains reference information for all program codes (parameters) which

determine the functional configuration of the DanLoad 6000.

# Appendix A - Installation Worksheets

This appendix contains several worksheets that aid in designing and implementing the system

interconnections and field wiring. These worksheets are described in Section 2 - Installation.

# Appendix B - Program Code Configuration

This appendix contains a list of all parameters and their default values.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

1 - 4 __________________________________________________ Introduction

Overview

The DanLoad 6000 can be operated in an independent stand-alone mode with batch delivery

operations monitored and controlled from the operator control panel located on front of the

DanLoad 6000. The DanLoad 6000 can also function as a slave unit in a terminal automation

system network. The information contained in this manual covers local operation of the DanLoad

6000 in the Stand-alone Mode. The DanLoad 6000 accepts process input signals from and

provides process control signals to the common instruments and devices used in liquid batch

delivery systems. These instruments / devices include: liquid flow meters (turbine and positive

displacement type), multi-stage solenoid controlled flow control valves, additive injectors,

security devices for verifying electrical ground connections and compartment overfills, electric

motor driven pumps, and motor operated block valves. The DanLoad 6000 can be easily setup

(configured) to deliver single component liquids or to blend multiple liquid components in precise

ratios, with or without additive injection. The various possible delivery and blending functions

of the DanLoad 6000 are controlled by operator selectable recipes (predefined delivery control

procedures). Additive injection is controlled by manual selection or automatic selection from a

terminal automation system. These features allow one DanLoad 6000 and the associated liquid

delivery equipment to deliver many different combinations of liquid products, based on

requirements of the client or receiver of the delivered product.

One common application for a DanLoad 6000 is as an on-site controller for delivering refined

hydrocarbon liquid products from loading terminal storage tanks to mobile tanks, such as tanker

trucks, rail tank cars, and tank barges. Some other applications include liquid component

blending and / or additive injection in refinery or chemical plant processes. In addition, liquid

components can be blended with or without additive injection into flowing pipelines or into storage

tanks. A typical load rack installation with a DanLoad 6000 and associated equipment is shown

in Figure 1 - 1.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 5

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

1 - 6 __________________________________________________ Introduction

1.1 Functional Characteristics

The functional characteristics and capabilities of the DanLoad 6000 are presented in this section.

These functional characteristics and capabilities are closely related to the hardware configuration

of the instrument. Section 1.2 - Hardware Configuration, contains general information on the

hardware configuration of the DanLoad 6000. The DanLoad 6000 is delivered from the factory

with several basic electronic modules and other optional modules to accommodate process input

/ output signals. The required process input / output signal boards are determined by the loading

system configuration and should be specified when the DanLoad 6000 is purchased. The mix of

process input / output signal boards and communications modules is field reconfigurable. The

hardware configuration determines the input / output process signal handling capacity and the data

logging / data communications capability of the instrument. The flow measurement and logical

functions listed below are available in all hardware configurations of the DanLoad 6000.

However, each unique installation requires a specific complement of process input / output signal

boards, based on the actual devices that are monitored and controlled in the system.

The DanLoad 6000 can monitor and control operation of up to four flow meters, up to four flow

control valves, delivery of up to four products, and up to six additive injectors simultaneously.

Two high resolution pulse per unit volume outputs are provided for use by external equipment,

such as meter prover counters. Product deliveries and component blending deliveries are selected

by up to thirty configurable recipes (batch delivery / blending control procedures) and automatic

or manual selection of additive injection. The actual implementation of the various possible

process operations are covered in detail in other sections of this manual.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 7

# Batch Delivery

The DanLoad 6000 can automatically measure and control quantity-based preset batch delivery

of one product or a blend of two to four liquid components. During blending operations, one

to four flow meter streams are controlled independently from the other flow meter streams.

Any combination of pulse output type flow meters of different sizes and flow handling

capacities can be monitored and controlled by one DanLoad 6000. Each flow meter stream can

have unique characteristics for the liquid component. For accounting and tracking purposes

a batch delivery or group of consecutive batch deliveries can be combined to form one

transaction.

In addition, the DanLoad 6000 can control batch loading of up to four independent loading

arms, if only one loading arm is in use at any one time.

# Blending

The DanLoad 6000 can automatically measure and control gross or standard quantity based

blending of several liquid components. Component blending can be performed by one of the

following selectable methods.

# Sequential, automatic

# Sequential, manual

# In-line, proportional

# In-line, non-proportional

# Off-rack

Sequential blending is the mixing of two, three, or four components, or transfers one component

at a time to the receiving tank by using block valves, either automatically or manually controlled.

Components are delivered in a time sequence through one flow meter / flow control valve stream.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

1 - 8 __________________________________________________ Introduction

In-line blending is the mixing of two, three, or four components simultaneously measured by

individual flow meters / flow control valves, into one composite delivery stream. The blend ratio

is precisely maintained during in-line proportional blending. The blend ratio is roughly maintained

during in-line non-proportional blending. However, the blend ratio of a completed batch load is

precise after the batch has been completely loaded.

Off-rack blending is performed by using a separate meter skid (off-rack) with flow meters, flow

control valves, and temperature probes for each component stream. The blending operation is

identical to in-line proportional blended with the composite blended product delivered from the

blending skid to one loading arm.

# Additive Injection

The DanLoad 6000 can automatically control injection of one to six additive streams or no

additive, into either a single product stream or a blend delivery stream. Additive injection

can be enabled automatically or manually. Additive injection can be monitored and the

delivery suspended if an additive injector fails. The volume of additive injected can be

totalized to provide accurate accounting.

# Meter Proving

The DanLoad 6000 can be used to perform manual flow meter proofs. Tank provers, master

meters, or mechanical displacement meter proves can be used for flow meter proving.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 9

1.2 Hardware Configuration

The DanLoad 6000 contains electronic modules in the form of plug-in printed circuit boards. The

basic hardware configuration of the instrument is required for normal operation. In some cases,

the instrument in the basic hardware configuration has the capacity to monitor and control the

batch delivery installation. In other cases, additional process input / output signal expansion

printed circuit boards and / or data communications modules may be required. Flow calculations

and logical control capabilities of the DanLoad 6000 in the basic hardware configuration and the

fully expanded configuration are identical. Hardware expansion of the instrument only increases

the process signal handling capacity and / or provides data signal handling capability. Information

on hardware configuration is contained in Section 2 - Installation. The basic configuration of

a DanLoad 6000 is described below.

# Integral text / graphics display and operator keypad mounted in a rugged weatherproof case,

designed for outside installation in NEC Class 1, Group D, Division 1 hazardous atmosphere

environments.

# One DC Voltage power supply with factory selectable power input of 115 Vac or 230 Vac, 47

to 63 Hertz.

# One main processor (CPU) board with two micro-controllers, shared memory, non-volatile

memory, and other related logic and process signal circuitry. Two swing arm status inputs.

And optionally (requires addition of one or two modules to the main processor board):

# One RS-485 port and one RS-232 port OR two RS-485 ports.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

1 - 10 __________________________________________________ Introduction

# One flow meter pulse input board, able to process two flow meter pulse inputs (two flow

meters or IP-252 pulse integrity from one flow meter) and provide two discrete DC Voltage

control outputs.

# One discrete AC input / output board, able to process two status inputs and eight control

outputs (90 to 230 Vac).

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 11

1.3 General Terminology

The terminology used throughout this manual is defined in the table below. Section 6 - Program

Code Definitions contains additional information which helps clarify these terms. Some of the

definitions are based on information contained in American Petroleum Institute (API) standards

and industry accepted use. Other national standards use similar terminology.

Term Definition

additive A liquid that is injected into a primary liquid component in relatively small

quantities, usually less than four percent of the delivered volume total.

Additives are injected into the primary liquid component by an injector

mechanism which places a known, fixed volume of the additive into the

primary liquid component stream for each injector pulse received from the

DanLoad 6000.

arm (also: swing arm, loading arm) A movable pipe / hose assembly used at a

tanker truck loading island. The arm can be designed for either top loading

or bottom loading to the tanker compartments. A swing arm can be

positioned to load at either side of the loading island or the parked state.

batch A preset quantity-based product delivery or blended component delivery of

a single recipe.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

1 - 12 __________________________________________________ Introduction

Term Definition

blending The process of mixing two or more liquid components to form a composite

delivered stream. The DanLoad 6000 can control blending based on a

predetermined recipe by the sequential automatic or manual), the in-line

(proportional or non-proportional), or the off-rack method. The quantity of

each component in a blend is typically greater than two to four percent of the

blended product. Injection of very small quantities of liquids, less than two

to four percent of the blended product, is usually controlled by the additive

injection process.

component Any liquid metered and controlled by the DanLoad 6000. Liquid

hydrocarbons refined from crude oil are usually referred to as products.

Components are base products or tank products stored at a distribution

terminal. The component is measured before blending or additive injection.

gross standard quantity

the gross quantity corrected to standard temperature and pressure. This is a

quantity measurement.

TLMCalculation: gross standard quantity = gross quantity times C (correction

PLMfactor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the meter) times C

(correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the meter)

gross quantity the indicated quantity times the meter factor derived from a meter proving of

the flow meter at a specific flow rate. This is a quantity measurement.

Calculation: gross quantity = indicated quantity times meter factor

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 13

Term Definition

indicated qty The change in the flow meter reading that occurs during a product flow

measurement operation. This is a quantity measurement. (Not displayed by

the DanLoad 6000)

Calculation: indicated quantity = end reading minus start reading

IP-252 Institute of Petroleum standard 252. A British standard for pulse fidelity and

security for pulse output type flow meters. Program codes 233 and 234

define the operation of this function. (Note: Equivalent standard is API

Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards / Chapter 5 - Metering / Section

5 - Fidelity and Security of Flow Measurement Pulsed-Data Transmission

Systems.)

K-factor (system factor)

The pulses per unit quantity generated by a pulse output type flow meter. The

K-factor is also called the system factor. The nominal value is determined by

flow meter design and factory water flow calibration. The actual K-factors

for the flow meters are indicated on the flow meter nameplates.

loading island (also loading rack) An installation of one or more loading arms or risers used

to deliver liquid components to a tanker vehicle located on one or both sides

of the island, depending on the design of the island.

loading riser The related instruments and devices, located in a meter stream, that provide

the liquid component loading capability to a mobile tanker vehicle. (Note:

The flow meter piping can also be installed horizontally, if desired.)

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

1 - 14 __________________________________________________ Introduction

Term Definition

load spot (also bay, lane) One side of a loading island, a position where a tanker

vehicle parks for a loading operation. One load spot can have one or more

loading arms.

meter factor A number obtained by dividing the actual volume of liquid passed through a

flow meter during a meter proving operation by the volume registered by the

flow meter. The meter factor is used in flow calculations to correct the

indicated volume (end flow meter registration minus start flow meter

registration) to the observed gross volume (actual flow meter throughput at

operating conditions)

Meter prover volume corrected to standard conditions Meter factor = ------------------------------------------------------------ Flow meter indicated volume corrected to standard conditions

meter proving A procedure used to determine the meter factor for a flow meter. The K-

factor (exact number of pulses per a volume unit that are generated by a flow

meter) is determined at the factory. The K-factor is used to derive a

mathematical factor, known as meter factor, that is used to adjust results of

the internal flow calculations performed by the DanLoad 6000. (Note: The

flow meter is not re-calibrated; determination of the meter factor allows the

operator to manually re-calibrate the DanLoad 6000 so that the non-

adjustable calibration characteristic [pulses per volume unit (K-factor)] of

the flow meter is incorporated into the flow calculations.)

permissive A discrete signal from a device that is input to a discrete input in the DanLoad

6000. The signal is used by the DanLoad 6000 to allow a product delivery

to be initiated or allow a product delivery to continue. Permissive contacts

are CLOSED in the normal or safe state and OPEN in the abnormal or unsafe

state.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 15

Term Definition

preset A generic term that describes the functional instrument group of the DanLoad

6000. The term originated from mechanical and electrical preset counters.

The DanLoad 6000 provides much more versatility and capability compared

to a simple mechanical or electrical preset counter.

program code One of approximately 800 parameters that define the operation of the

DanLoad 6000. All program codes are defined in Section 6.

quantity (example: gross standard quantity)

The resulting amount of product measured after compensation for operational

temperature and pressure, indicated in one of the following corrected units:

cubic meters, liters, barrels, gallons.

recipe A pre-entered delivery / blending / control description that allows the

DanLoad 6000 to automatically control the product quantity or total quantity

based on percentages of multiple components during a batch delivery

operation. Up to thirty recipes can be defined in the DanLoad 6000.

transaction Grouping of one or more consecutive batch deliveries for accounting

purposes. A transaction always uses one recipe, one additive selection, and

one loading side. An example of a transaction is the delivery of multiple

batches to different compartments in a single tanker vehicle.

volume (example: indicated volume; gross volume)

The actual space occupied by the product measured, indicated in one of the

following actual units: cubic meters, liters, barrels, gallons.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

1 - 16 __________________________________________________ Introduction


Section 2

Installation

Specifications

Installation Planning

Mechanical Installation

Electrical Installation

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 1

Note

Appendix A contains several tables with data on the physical and functional configuration of

the DanLoad 6000. These tables can be photocopied and unique configuration data can be

manually entered to provide a record of specific DanLoad 6000 installations.

This section contains DanLoad 6000 specifications and information on installation of the DanLoad

6000. Installation tasks should be performed in the following order.

# Installation planning

# Initial setup (described in Section 3 - Setup)

# Mechanical (physical) installation

# Electrical installation

The initial setup, described in Section 3 - Setup, must be performed before the DanLoad 6000 is

placed in-service. The initial setup can be performed with only a 115 or 230 Vac power source

connected to the instrument.

Mechanical and electrical installation recommendations for the DanLoad 6000 adhere to general

industry standards for this type equipment and are covered in Section 2.3 - Mechanical Installation

and Section 2.4 - Electrical Installation. The remaining part of Section 2 contains information on

installation planning for the DanLoad 6000.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 2 ___________________________________________________ Installation

2.1 DanLoad 6000 Specifications

# Dimensions (approximate):

Standard The standard enclosure for the DanLoad 6000.

Remote / Secondary

The short enclosure contains the front panel display and keypad only. This enclosure is

usually used as a remote operator station in a two side loading island.

Item Standard Remote / Secondary

Height 13-inches (330 mm) 13-inches (330 mm)

Width 14-inches (355 mm) 14-inches (355 mm)

Depth 14-inches (355 mm) 8-inches (200 mm)

Weight 75-pounds (34 kg) 45-pounds (20,5 kg)

# Power requirements:

115 Vac (+ 10% / - 15%), 47 to 63 Hertz, 1-phase

230 Vac (+ /_ 15%), 47 to 63 Hertz, 1-phase

25 VA nominal

# Cable entry (USA version):

Center 2-inch female NPT, normally used for all DC signal (meter pulse,

RTD, analog, status / control) cables

Left 1-inch female NPT, normally used for AC power input and AC status /

control signals

Right (separate routing for low level signals and status / control signals):

1-inch female NPT, used for meter pulse and / or RTD and / or analog

signals when separate signal routing is required

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 3

# Cable entry (metric version):

Center M50 x 1.5 mm, normally used for all DC signal (meter pulse,

RTD, analog, status / control) cables

Left M25 x 1.5 mm, normally used for AC power input and AC status / control

signals

Right (separate routing for low level signals and status / control signals):

M25 x 1.5 mm, used for meter pulse and / or RTD and / or analog signals

when separate signal routing is required

# Environment:

Temperature[operating with case heater installed]:

-40 to + 140 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to + 60 degrees Celsius)

Temperature[storage (non-operating)]:

-4 to + 158 degrees Fahrenheit (-20 to + 70 degrees Celsius)

(Note: Storage temperature lower limit is due to fluid in the liquid crystal

display (LCD) unit.)

Relative humidity: 5 to 95 percent (non-condensing)

# Radiated emissions:

FCC (CFR 47) class A digital device

CCA LMB-EG-08 section 3.6.3.4

RF interference of 10 V/M over the frequency range of 20 MHZ to 500 MHZ

# Mechanical shock:

Per S.A.M.A. PMC 31.1-1980, Section 5.3

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 4 ___________________________________________________ Installation

# Enclosure:

NEMA 4X weatherproof, corrosion resistant

NEMA 7 for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D areas

EEx d IIB T6, IP65

# Fasteners:

Front cover hex drive bolts and case mounting bolts: M10 - 1.5 (metric)

Two front cover bolts are longer than the other front cover bolts. These two long

bolts have holes near the end of the threaded end to allow placement of a Weight

and Measures seal wires. The seal wires prevent undetected access to the

DanLoad 6000 electronic / field wiring compartment.

Depth of tapped mounting bolt holes: 0.50 inches (13 mm)

Front cover hex bolt wrench: 8-mm (or 5/16-inch) Allen wrench

Torque specification (all bolts): 18 to 21 foot-pounds-force

(24 to 29 Newton-meters)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 5

Standard Enclosure DimensionsFigure 2 - 1

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 6 ___________________________________________________ Installation

Standard Enclosure Field MountingFigure 2 - 2

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 7

Shallow Enclosure DimensionsFigure 2 - 3

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 8 ___________________________________________________ Installation

Shallow Enclosure Field MountingFigure 2 - 4

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 9

2.2 Installation Planning

Installation planning is very important due to the physical and functional reconfigurable

capabilities of the instrument. Several worksheets are provided in Appendix A to aid in

installation planning and system design. These worksheets are used in conjunction with the Setup

Procedure described in Section 3. Installation planning consists of the following three major

tasks.

# Assure that the DanLoad 6000 contains the required number and type of process input /

output signal boards for monitoring and controlling the other devices in the product

delivery system.

# Determine the functions to be performed by the DanLoad 6000. These functions are

selectively enabled during the setup procedure (logical configuration) of the instrument.

# Design the mechanical / electrical installation considering the safety and ease of use by the

operator. Also consider the safety and ease of access to instruments and devices for

maintenance technicians.

2.2.1 Card Cage Description

The DanLoad 6000 is constructed in a modular electronic and functional form. An electronic card

cage is located inside the cast enclosure. The layout of the card cage is shown in Figure 2-5. The

card cage contains a passive backplane with sockets for installation of a main processor board,

a DC power supply board, and one to seven process input / output signal boards. The function

of each board is described in Section 2.2.2.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 10 ___________________________________________________ Installation

Card cage LayoutFigure 2 - 5

NOTE: Placement of I/O boards in card cage determines I/O assignments

during start up. Please see section 3.5.1 for details.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 11

2.2.2 Input/Output Board Description and Jumper Settings

Note

Several of the electronic circuit boards contain jumpers that must be verified for correct

configuration before installation of the instrument. Jumper configuration should be verified

before the setup procedure is executed. Verify the following jumper configurations before

applying any power or connecting any process input / output signals to the instrument.

# Power Supply (DC Voltage)

Installed in the leftward vertical slot (J0) with component side facing right (toward the

I/O card slots).

The DC power supply generates the following voltages for the following uses;

Voltage Use

+ 5 Vdc digital logic

+ 5 Vdc unregulated LCD display unit

+ 15 Vdc / - 15 Vdc analog inputs

+ 12 to + 15 Vdc meter pulse transmitter power supply (100 mA dc version)

+ 24 Vdc DC status / analog transmitters

DC Power Supply Voltage Use

Figure 2 - 6

Two field-wiring connectors are located on the front edge of the power supply board.

TB1 accepts AC power input (either 115 or 230 Vac) and provides a fused output for an

optional internal space heater. TB2 accepts AC Voltage input and provides fused AC

Voltage output to the permissive circuits.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 12 ___________________________________________________ Installation

Jumper Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12692)

Jumper Function

JO1-1 to JO1-2

JO2-1 to JO2-2

115 Vac power input

JO1-2 to JO2-2 230 Vac power input

AC Power Input Jumpers

Figure 2 - 7

The AC power jumpers are soldered wire jumpers located on the DC power supply board.

AC power input should be specified at order time so that the jumpers are installed

correctly at the factory.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 13

# CPU Board

Installed horizontally on top of card cage with component side up.

The main processor board has two CPU' s (central processing units). One CPU processes

the control panel and communications functions and the other CPU performs flow

measurement and process input / output signal handling. Dual port RAM (random access

memory) is used by both CPU' s to transfer data. Data is maintained in a non-volatile

state for ten years by an on-board battery. The CPU board also contains one 3-terminal

connector which is dedicated to one or two dry contact closure inputs used for sensing the

position of a swing-arm switch.

CPU Board Jumper Settings

Jumper Function

E16 to E17

E7 to E8

4Mbit EPROM installed

E2 to E3 Enable display failure /internal

temp alarm LED (yellow LED)

CPU Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 8

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 14 ___________________________________________________ Installation

CPU Board and Analog Inputs Board Combinations - Jumper Settings

The DanLoad 6000 can be configured without an analog inputs board or with a 2-channel

analog inputs or an 8-channel analog inputs board. Jumpers are provided for configuration

of analog ground and digital ground. These jumpers should be set as follows.

Jumper Function

E12 to E13 on the CPU Board No Analog Inputs

Board installed

Remove E12 to E13 on CPU

board and install JP1 on Analog

Inputs Board

Analog Inputs Board is

installed

CPU & Analog Inputs Board Combination Jumpers

Figure 2 - 9

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 15

# DUART (Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) Communications Board

Optional DUART module can be installed, with the component side down, on top of the

main processor board.

One dual serial communications port module (DUART module) with 1 RS-485 and 1 RS-

232 OR 2 RS-485 ports is optional. The communications module is not required for stand-

alone operation of the DanLoad 6000. However, the DUART is required if the data

logging feature is used or if communication to an Automation System is required.

Switch Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12693)

The address of the DanLoad 6000 serial port is set by an eight position DIP switch located

on the optional DUART board. Each address must be unique for data access by a terminal

automation system.

Address

Switch SW1 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Decimal weight 6 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128

0 < reserved> on on on on on on on on

1 off on on on on on on on

2 on off on on on on on on

3 off off on on on on on on

4 on on off on on on on on

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

255 off off off off off off off off

DUART Board Address Switch

Figure 2 - 10

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 16 ___________________________________________________ Installation

# 2-Ch Meter Pulse Board (MPB)

Recommended card cage locations are slots J5 and / or J6, component side faces left

(toward the power supply). The recommended location for a single meter pulse board is

slot J5.

The two-channel meter pulse board provides 8 to 15 Vdc or 24 Vdc power for two meter

pulse preamplifiers and accepts meter pulse inputs from two meter preamplifiers or dual

inputs from one meter. The 2-Ch Meter Pulse Board can be used with 1 single pulse

meter, 1 dual pulse meter or 2 single pulse meters. The meter preamps or pulsers can be

powered with any one of three options. Options 1 and 2 are implemented by installing a

plug-on piggyback power supply module. These modules are adjustable 8-15 VDC power

supplies with either 15 ma (Daniel P/N 3-6000-002) or 100 mA (Daniel P/N 3-6000-022)

outputs. Option 3 uses 24 VDC supplied from the power-supply board. The DC power

source for each meter preamplifier is jumper selectable. Two optically isolated raw meter

pulse outputs (prover outputs) are provided. These outputs are for meter proving and are

duplicates of the raw meter pulse stream. Two DC Voltage control outputs are provided.

These control outputs are assignable to various functions. One common use for these

outputs is to drive external pulse per unit quantity totalizers.

# Power Down Pulse Counting

Should power failure shut the system down, power to the pulsers and preamps will

be sustained long enough to accumulate pulses until the flow control valve closes.

This is available with the 15 mA P/S option only (P/N 3-6000-002).

# Dual Pulse Security for a Single Flow Meter

Dual pulse security is available per the IP252 Level-B standard. This is

accomplished by monitoring two meter pulse inputs that are electrically 90 degrees

out of phase. Reference program codes 233 and 234 in Section 6.13 of this

manual.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 17

Jumper Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12694) P/N 3-6000-022, 100 mA P/S - P/N 3-6000-002, 15 mA P/S

Jumper Connection Function

JP1JP5

1 to 2in

meter 1 preamp power = 24 Vdc

JP1JP5

2 to 3in

meter 1 preamp power = 8 to 15 Vdc (PS1)

JP1JP3JP3JP5

1-to-21-to-23-to-4out

meter 1 input optically isolated and floating, requires external 5 to 24 Vdc supply

JP3JP3

1 to 23-to-4

meter 1 input optically isolated

JP3 2-to-3 meter 1 input direct

JP8 out meter 1 standard input filtering( 5 kHz. low pass filter)

in meter 1 additional high frequency filtering( 50 Hz. low pass filter)

JP2JP4

1-to-2in

meter 2 preamp power = 24 Vdc

JP2JP4

2-to-3in

meter 2 preamp power = 8 to 15 Vdc (PS2)

JP2JP7JP7JP4

1-to-21-to-23-to-4out

meter 2 input optically isolated and floating, requires external 5 to 24 Vdc supply

JP7JP7

1-to-23-to-4

meter 2 input optically isolated

JP7 2-to-3 meter 2 input direct

JP6 out meter 2 normal input filtering(5 kHz. low pass filter)

in meter 2 additional high frequency filtering(50 Hz. low pass filter)

2-Channel Meter Pulse Input Board Jumpers - Figure 2 - 11

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 18 ___________________________________________________ Installation

# AC Discrete Input / Output Board (AC I/O)

Recommended locations are slots J1 and / or J2, component side faces left (toward the

power supply). The recommended location for a single AC I/O board is slot J1.

[Note: There are two different versions of the AC I/O board (Ver. 1 & Ver. 2). Terminal

connections are the same on each version of the board. However, the on-board jumper

configuration is different for each version of the board. Note drawing CE-12695 in

Appendix D and information in Figures 2-12 and 2-13.]

The AC I/O board accepts two discrete (ON/OFF) status inputs and provides eight

discrete (ON/OFF) control outputs. Note Figures 2-12 and 2-13 for jumper settings to

set the discrete input voltage level selection options (24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 90-240 Vac or Vdc).

Internal series resistors in each input circuit should be jumpered (bypassed) if 24 Vac or

24 Vdc signals are used. Control output circuits are 24 to 230 Vac only. Each output

circuit is rated to switch an inductive load of 2 Amps ac maximum, such as a relay or

solenoid coil.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 19

Status inputs are processed as indicated:

Version 1 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)

Inputs are externally powered by 120/240 volts AC/DC or 24 volts AC/DC by

installing a jumper. This voltage should be applied through a contact closure only,

as a solid-state relay may not drop below the input voltage threshold when

deenergized.

The status input is ON when the contact is closed or the voltage is present on the

input.

The status input is OFF when the contact is open or the voltage is removed.

Version 2 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)

All functions are the same as the Version 1 AC I/O Board except that each voltage

range has a jumper selection (24 VAC, 24 VDC, 120 VAC and 240 VAC), and

the inputs will function with either contact closures or solid-state relays.

Note: Version 2 board will not work with 120/240 VDC.

Note

Ganging Triac Outputs: Due to the leakage current inherent to the triac, ganging of

AC triac outputs to one common point is not recommended. If output ganging is

required, the use of interposing relays is recommended in order to provide proper

isolation.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 20 ___________________________________________________ Installation

Jumper Settings - Version 1 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)

(Assembly Drawing CE-12693 - P/N 3-6000-005)


W1 out Input 2 90-to-240 Vac / Vdc

in Input 2 24 Vac / Vdc

W2 out Input 1 90-to-240 Vac / Vdc

in Input 1 24 Vac / Vdc

Version 1 AC I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 12

Jumper Settings - Version 2 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)

(Assembly Drawing CE-12722 - P/N 3-6000-045)


JP1 pins 1 to 2 Input 2 is 24 Vac or 24 Vdc

JP2 pins 1 to 2 Input 1 is 24 Vac or 24 Vdc

JP1 pins 2 to 3 Input 2 is 120 Vac

JP2 pins 2 to 3 Input 1 is 120 Vac

JP1 out Input 2 is 240 Vac

JP2 out Input 1 is 240 Vac

Version 2 AC I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 13

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 21

# Enhanced I/O Board and Additive Injector I/O Board


power supply). The recommended location for a single Enhanced I/O board is slot J1.

[Note: There are two different versions of the Enhanced I/O board. The Ver. 1 style

board is shown in drawing CE-12697 in Appendix D as the “Additive Injector (I/O)

Board”. The “Additive Injector Board” will be recognized as an Enhanced I/O Board

when the DanLoad 6000 displays the identity and location of the boards in the card cage.

The Ver. 2 style board is shown in drawing CE-19027 in Appendix D as the “Enhanced

(I/O) Board”. Terminal connections are the same on each version of the board.

However, the on-board jumper configuration is different for each version of the board.]

The Enhanced (or Additive Injector) I/O board accepts six discrete (ON/OFF) status

inputs (24 Vac or 24 Vdc maximum voltage) and provides six discrete (ON/OFF) control

outputs. Note Figures 2-14 and 2-15 for jumper settings to select discrete input voltage

levels for the two board styles. Control output circuits are 24 to 230 Vac only. Each

output circuit is rated to switch an inductive load of 2 Amps ac maximum, such as a relay

or solenoid coil. Inputs are available as high-speed (< 32 ms), low speed (> 32 ms) or

a mixture of both. Be sure to specify the correct part number.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 22 ___________________________________________________ Installation


# Version 1 (Additive Injector) I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12697)

Internally powered status input (Note Reverse Logic):

The status input is ON when the contact is open.

The status input is OFF when the contact is closed.

Externally powered status input:

The status input is ON when the contact is closed and the voltage is present

on the input.

The status input is OFF when the contact is open and the voltage is

removed.

Note

Ganging Triac Outputs: Due to the leakage current inherent to the triac, ganging of

AC triac outputs to one common point is not recommended. If output ganging is

required, the use of interposing relays is recommended in order to provide proper

isolation.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 23

# Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-19027)

Internally powered status input:

The status input is ON when the contact is closed.

The status input is OFF when the contact is open.

Externally powered status input or solid-state relays:

There are three voltage ranges which are jumper selectable (24 VAC,

24VDC, 120 VAC or 240 VAC). When using DC voltage, the positive

voltage must be on the common input to two-channel inputs.



DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 24 ___________________________________________________ Installation

Jumper Settings - Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board

(Field Wiring Diagram CE-12697) - P/N 3-6000-010 (low speed), -060 (high speed),

-059 (combination low and high speed)

INPUT JUMPER INTERNAL POWER EXTERNAL POWER

1&2 W3 SHORT PINS

1&2, 3&4, 5&6

OPEN

NO JUMPERS

3&4 W2 SHORT PINS

1&2, 3&4, 5&6

OPEN

NO JUMPERS

5&6 W1 SHORT PINS

1&2, 3&4, 5&6

OPEN

NO JUMPERS

Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 14

Note

The maximum voltage for discrete inputs on the Additive Injector Board is 24 Vac

or 24 Vdc.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 25

Jumper Settings - Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board

(Field Wiring Diagram CE-19027) - P/N 3-6000-036 (low speed), -048 (high speed),

-049 (combination low and high speed)

Jumper Schedule

Select Internal Power (JP10 pins 2 to 3)

Input

Channel

24 Vdc

Internal Power

External Power

20 to 30

Vac or Vdc

102 to 140

Vac

204 to 260

Vac

1 and 2 JP9 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6

JP8 1 to 2

JP7 1 to 2

JP9 all out

JP8 1 to 2

JP7 1 to 2

JP9 all out

JP8 2 to 3

JP7 2 to 3

JP9 all out

JP8 all out

JP7 all out

3 and 4 JP6 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6

JP5 1 to 2

JP4 1 to 2

JP6 all out

JP5 1 to 2

JP4 1 to 2

JP6 all out

JP5 2 to 3

JP4 2 to 3

JP6 all out

JP5 all out

JP4 all out

5 and 6 JP3 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6

JP2 1 to 2

JP1 1 to 2

JP3 all out

JP2 1 to 2

JP1 1 to 2

JP3 all out

JP2 2 to 3

JP1 2 to 3

JP3 all out

JP2 all out

JP1 all out

Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 15

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 26 ___________________________________________________ Installation

# DC Discrete Input / Output board (DC I/O) (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12696)


power supply). The recommended location for a single DC I/O board is slot J3.

The DC I/O board accepts six 24 Vdc or 24 Vac discrete (ON/OFF) status inputs and

provides four discrete (ON/OFF) control outputs. The nominal input level is 24 Vdc or

24 Vac, either dry contact closures or externally powered, depending on internal jumper

configuration. See Figure 2-18. Control output circuits are 24 Vdc only. Each output

circuit is rated to switch a non-inductive load of 250 mA dc maximum. Inputs are

available as high speed (< 32 ms), low speed (> 32 ms) or a combination of both. Be sure

to specify the correct part number.


Internally powered status input:



Externally powered status input:

The status input is ON when the contact is closed and voltage is present on the

input.

The status input is OFF when the contact is open and the voltage is removed.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 27

Jumper Settings - DC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12696) - P/N 3-6000-006

(low speed), -058 (high speed), -057 (combination of low and high speed)


W1 2-to-3 in Input 6 floating, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc external input

W1 1-to-2

W1 3-to-4

in Input 6 internal 24 Vdc power furnished


W2 1-to-2

W2 3-to-4



W3 1-to-2

W3 3-to-4



W4 1-to-2

W4 3-to-4



W5 1-to-2

W5 3-to-4



W6 1-to-2

W6 3-to-4


DC I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 16

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 28 ___________________________________________________ Installation

# 2-Channel Analog Input Board (Field Wiring Diagram BE-12707) - P/N 3-6000-061

(standard, -40 to 110 C), -062 (high range, 50 to 200 C), -063 (low range, -50 to -200o o

C)o

Recommended location is slot J7, component side faces left (toward the power supply).

The 2-channel analog input board accepts one 4-wire RTD (resistive temperature device)

input and one 4 to 20 mA dc current loop input. The RTD input must be a platinum RTD,

100 Ohm base resistance at 32 degrees Fahrenheit (0 degrees Celsius). The RTD alpha

is 0.003850 S/S/ C (DIN 43670) and will be 115.54 S at 40 C. A common currento o

source and Vref is provided for the RTD. The 4 to 20 mA dc current loop contains an

internal 225 Ohm precision resistor. The maximum transmitter loop load is 975 Ohms.

Analog transmitter power of 24 Vdc is provided. The RTD inputs are available in a

standard range (-40 to 110 C), high range (50 to 200 C), and a low range (-50 to -200o o

C). Be sure to specify the correct part number.o

Refer to Figure 2-9 for jumper settings.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 29

# 8-Channel Analog Input Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12698) - P/N 3-6000-064

(standard, -40 to 110 C), -065 (high range, 50 to 200 C), -066 (low range, -50 to -200o o

C)o

Recommended location is slot J7, component side faces left (toward the power supply).

The 8-channel analog input board accepts four 4-wire RTD (resistive temperature device)

inputs and four 4 to 20 mA dc current loop inputs. RTD inputs must be platinum RTD' s,

100 Ohm base resistance at 32 degrees Fahrenheit (0 degrees Celsius). The RTD alpha

is 0.003850 S/S/ C (DIN 43670) and will be 115.54 S at 40 C. A common currento o

source and Vref is provided for the RTD' s. Each 4 to 20 mA dc current loop contains an

internal 225 Ohm precision resistor. The maximum transmitter loop load in 975 Ohms.

Analog transmitter power of 24 Vdc is provided. The RTD inputs are available in a

standard range (-40 to 110 C), high range (50 to 200 C), and a low range (-50 to -200o o

C). Be sure to specify the correct part number.o

Refer to Figure 2-9 for jumper settings.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 30 ___________________________________________________ Installation

2.3 Mechanical Installation

In planning the physical installation of the DanLoad 6000, consider ease of use of the instrument

with the operator in a safe and comfortable position. Consideration must also be given to

performance of maintenance tasks without disrupting ongoing product delivery operations in close

proximity. It may be helpful to draw rough diagrams of the normal actions of the operator during

the different possible batch delivery related tasks. Be especially mindful of the location of the

operator in relation to the location of one or two tanker vehicles and their related loading arm /

bottom loading hose connections. Some location / position restrictions may be present when a

DanLoad 6000 is used as a retrofit or upgrade in an existing installation. However, mechanical

installation planning should still be performed. It may be possible to correct an inconvenient

controller mounting location that exists in a current loading rack installation when a DanLoad

6000 is retrofit at the installation.

The major steps performed during installation are listed below.

# Plan the installation

# Fabricate device supports and lay electrical conduit

# Mount the DanLoad 6000 and other load rack devices

# Run and connect all wiring

# Verify and tag each wire

# Seal conduit within 18-inches (450 mm) of each device

# Secure cases and covers of all devices

# Apply electric power

# Setup (configure) DanLoad 6000 and any other devices as required

# Disable product block valves and additive block valves to prevent any product or

additive flow - then verify system monitor and control functions with dry piping

# Enable one product block valve at a time and one additive injection system at a time

- then verify the piping integrity and system operation in increments for each product and

each additive handling system

# Perform meter proofs to determine DanLoad 6000 meter calibration

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 31

Consider the points listed below during installation planning for a DanLoad 6000.

# Maintenance access:

The operator panel is hinged at the bottom side and opens down for ease of maintenance

access. All conduit routing should be to the rear, sides, or down. No object should be

located under the DanLoad 6000 and in front of the conduit connections for a distance of

approximately 15-inches (380 mm) below the instrument.

# Mounting height:

Recommended mounting height is approximately 45 to 50 inches (1.14 to 1.27 meters)

above grade to the bottom of the DanLoad 6000 case. Mounting height determines the

ease of viewing the display panel and ease of use of the keypad.

# Mounting position:

North / south / east / west orientation of the operator control panel is somewhat

predetermined by the loading facility design. Consider the location of the user / operator

in relation to one or two tanker vehicles present and connected at the loading island.

# Mounting fixtures:

Mounting fixtures must be fabricated for the DanLoad 6000. Four M10-1.5 metric thread

bolts for mounting are provided with each DanLoad 6000. The instrument can be bottom

mounted or rear mounted. Bottom mounting is preferable due to the weight of the device.

The mounting attachment should be a 1/8-inch (3 mm) (minimum) thick mild steel

member with four 7/16-inch (11.5 mm) diameter holes that match the bolting pattern

being used. The steel member may be sheet, angle, channel, or other shape.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 32 ___________________________________________________ Installation

The forward pair of mounting screw holes in bottom mount fixtures must be centered no

more than 3/4-inch (19 mm) from the edge. The case has a 2-degree taper to the rear.

The standard case may need a shim as much as 0.170-inch (4.3 mm) thick at the rear pair

of screws to level the instrument. Leveling the case will allow for best conduit alignment.

Fixtures for rear mounting may need additional bracing to ensure rigidity.

# Special installation considerations:

The DanLoad 6000 is designed for installation in an outdoor environment. The instrument

is weather proof and explosion proof per applicable standards. Some of the following

installation suggestions concerning environmental protection describe accepted engineering

practices and should not be considered to be limitations on the utility of the instrument.

# If the loading rack / island area is covered, the DanLoad 6000 should be located

so that the user / operator is protected or partially protected from direct rainfall.

# Tropical climates: It is advisable to place sunshades above the DanLoad 6000 and

other electronic instruments, such as process transmitters. Sunshades should be

located to prevent direct sunlight on the instruments during the hottest part of the

day (10:00 to 15:00). Sunshades can be constructed of metal, fiberglass, or

other suitable materials. They should be rear sloping to direct rain to the rear of

the instrument, away from the user / operator. Avoid sharp edges or corners on

sunshades to prevent injuries.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 33

# Desert areas / blowing sand: In areas where blowing sand in common, it is

advisable to install a cover to protect the operator control panel during idle time.

Continuous blowing sand over an extended time period can affect the readability

of the key legends and the display panel due to the sandblasting effect. A cover

can be fabricated from raw materials or may consist of modified NEMA 4

weatherproof enclosure with a sealed rear cutout for placement over the operator

panel. Use care in the design of any hinged cover so that wind gusts do not move

the cover and cause injuries. Any cover design must allow for maintenance access

to the DanLoad 6000. The operator panel is hinged to open in the down direction

for maintenance access.

# High humidity: In areas of continuous high humidity, it is advisable to place a 3-

inch x 3-inch desiccant pack inside the DanLoad 6000 case. Desiccant packs

should be placed so that expansion due to moisture absorption does not interfere

with any of the equipment or wiring inside the case. Two sources of desiccant

packs are:

# Waterguard Desiccants # A+ Corporation

P.O. Box 1079 Prairieville, Louisiana 70769

16023 I-10 East, Suite 30

Channelview, Texas 77530

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 34 ___________________________________________________ Installation

2.4 Electrical Installation

Warning

Shut off all sources of AC and DC power to the loading island site before installing the

DanLoad 6000.

2.4.1 General Considerations

Use two or three cable entries provided on the bottom of the enclosure for wiring access to the

DanLoad 6000.

# A threaded 1-inch female NPT (or M25 x 1.5 mm metric) connection on the left side of

the unit (for AC power and control / status signals).

# A spare threaded 1-inch female NPT (or M25 x 1.5 mm metric) connection on the right

side of the unit (may be used for meter pulse wiring if it is desired to segregate meter

pulse wiring from all other signals).

# A threaded 2-inch female NPT (or M50 x 1.5 mm) connection for DC cabling and low

voltage level signals in the center.

Note

All cable entries must be sealed within 18-inches (450 mm) of the enclosure with suitable

sealing / potting compound.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 35

Guidelines for field wiring installation:

# External AC and DC wiring must be routed in separate conduits.

# Record cable / wire routing and interconnection information so that as-built documentation

for the system can be generated later.

# Provide remote circuit breakers and optional disconnect switches for all AC and DC power

input circuits.

# Follow power and signal field wiring grounding standards.

# Use only stranded copper wire, equal to or larger gauges as indicated on the basic wiring

diagrams located at the rear of this section, do not cut or weaken wire strands during

insulation removal.

# All wire ends should be clearly marked with slip-on wire tags or similar devices, the wire

tags should preferably be color coded to indicate the voltage level and marked with the

specific signal name.

# Power and signal wires should be cut with an additional length of approximately 2-inches

for service loops to allow terminal board / connector removal.

# All wiring should be positioned within the unit to avoid unnecessary crimping and

overcrowding, and to insure proper clearance for the instrument door and hinges.

# After completion, thoroughly check the wiring to insure that input AC power and all field

input / output signals are correctly connected at the DanLoad 6000 terminations and at the

terminations located on the corresponding field device.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 36 ___________________________________________________ Installation

2.4.2 Selection / Installation of Electrical Wire and Cable

All wiring must conform to the National Electrical Code, local state or other jurisdiction, and

company standards and practices. Recommendations for 115 / 230 Vac power wiring:

# Use multi-strand copper conductor wire and cable for connecting the DanLoad 6000 to the

power source and the field devices.

# All wire and cable must be in new condition, and must adhere to the manufacturer' s

quality standards with the size, type of insulation, voltage rating.

# Recommended wire types and sizes for AC power input to the DanLoad 6000:

# Power feed should be 115 or 230 Vac, 47 to 63 Hertz, single phase, three wire.

A 15 Amp circuit breaker and optionally a power disconnect switch must be

located in a safe area.

# Wire size AWG 14 for power feed for distances up to 250 feet.

# Wire size AWG 12 for power feed for distances of 250 to 500 feet.

# Wire size AWG 10 for power feed for distances of 500 to 1000 feet.

# Contact Daniel Industries, Inc. , Customer Service - Electronics Division, for

power feed distances greater than 1000 feet.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 37

# Single-conductor wiring must be THWN type, which is moisture and heat-

resistant thermoplastic with nylon jacket, approved for dry-and-wet locations, and

has a maximum operating temperature of 75 degrees Celsius (167 degrees

Fahrenheit). The wire or cable jacket must contain the Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc. mark for Gasoline and Oil Resistant, II.

# Shielded wires and cables for meter pulse signals must have shield-drain wires. The

shield-drain wires must not be more than two AWG sizes smaller than the conductors for

the cable. The shield-drain wire must be connected to ground at only one end of the run.

# RS-485 serial data signals should be connected via two twisted pairs with overall shield,

AWG 28 to AWG 22. Ideally, the capacitance should not be greater than 16 pF per foot

(Belden 9842 for example). The use of a signal common (ground) conductor connected

to each device is a recommended option. Capacitance greater than 16 pF per foot may be

used at reduced baud rates and/or with shorter data communication cable runs. See typical

communications connection drawings in Appendix D.

# RS-232 single ended serial data signals should be AWG 28 to AWG 18 for cable lengths

to 15 meters (50 feet). Consult factory for cable lengths greater than 15 meters.

# All cables must have either Teflon or PVC exterior jacket.

# Insulated wire and cable must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer' s

recommendation. Maximum wire tension, maximum insulation pressure and minimum

bending radius must not be exceeded.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 38 ___________________________________________________ Installation

# Use suitable lubrication during wire pulls in conduit to prevent wire stress.

# All cables and individual wires must have cable or wire markers at each termination.

Markers must contain the specific wire or cable codes designated for that particular

circuit. The wire and cable markers must be legible and permanent.

# Check all wiring connected to the DanLoad 6000 for continuity, proper size, and proper

classification. Verify the source or destination of each circuit before connection to the

DanLoad 6000 and related devices.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 39

2.4.2.1 Input / Output Field Signal Wiring

Recommendations for process signal wiring:

# Metal conduit must be used for all process signal wiring.

# Use separate conduits for AC Voltage and DC Voltage circuits.

# All process signal wiring must be a single, continuous length between field devices, and

the DanLoad 6000, unless the length and / or conduit runs require that multiple pulls be

made. In these instances, the individual conductors must be interconnected with suitable

terminal blocks.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 40 ___________________________________________________ Installation

2.4.2.2 Electrical Grounds

Recommendations for electrical grounds:

# A clamp type ground lug (color green) is located on the inside bottom front of the case.

Chassis ground conductors (color code green) inside the DanLoad 6000 enclosure should

be stranded, insulated, copper wire. These device chassis ground conductors should all

be connected to the clamp type ground lug.

# A clamp type ground lug is located on the outside of the case at the rear of the lower right

(facing the operator panel) casting rib. This ground point should be connected to a copper

ground rod as described below.

# A single-point ground (the outside case ground lug) must be connected to a copper-clad,

ten-foot long, 3/4-inch diameter steel rod, which is buried, full-length, vertically, into

the soil as close to the equipment as is practical. (Grounding rod furnished by others.)

# Resistance between the copper-clad steel ground rod and the earth ground must not exceed

25 Ohms. If necessary, additional ground rods may be driven into the ground, while a

spacing of not less than 6 feet is used to separate each of the ground rods. Additionally,

the ground rods must be interconnected with a continuous stranded wire, sized as indicated

below.

# When several DanLoad 6000 units are located in close proximity, each single point

equipment ground must be inter-connected to the single point grounds of the other

DanLoad units. These inter-enclosure equipment grounding connections must be made

in a daisy-chain fashion with only one point of the grounding daisy-chain being connected

to the actual ground rod.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 41

# The equipment-grounding conductors used between DanLoad 6000 units and the copper-

clad steel ground rod, or for inter-enclosure equipment ground connections must be sized

according to the following specifications:

# Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 8 for distances of less than 15 feet.

# Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 6 for distances of 15 to 30 feet.

# Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 4 for distances of 30 to 100 feet.

# Consult Daniel Industries, Inc., Customer Service Department - Electronics

Division for distances greater than 100 feet.

# All inter-enclosure equipment-grounding conductors must be protected by metallic

conduit.

# Shield-drain wires must be connected to ground at only one end of the shielded

conductor run.

# External equipment, such as data printers or terminal automation systems, which

are connected to the DanLoad 6000, must be powered via isolation transformers

to minimize the ground loops caused by the internally shared safety and chassis

grounds.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 42 ___________________________________________________ Installation

2.4.3 Selection / Installation of Wire Conduit

Recommendations for conduit installation:

# All conduit and the associated assembly and installation materials used for the installation

of the DanLoad 6000 must be in new condition and shall adhere to the manufacturer' s

quality standards.

# All conduit runs must have an explosion proof sealing (potting) fitting located within 18-

inches (455 mm) distance from the conduit entrance to the DanLoad 6000.

# The conduit installation must be vapor tight, with threaded hub fittings, sealed conduit

joints and gaskets on covers, or other approved vapor-tight conduit fittings.

# Conduit cutoffs must be square. Cutoffs must be made by a cold cutting tool, hacksaw,

or by some other approved means that does not deform the conduit ends or leave sharp

edges.

# All conduit fitting threads, including factory-cut threads, must be coated with a metal-

bearing conducting grease, such as Crouse-Hinds STL or equivalent, prior to assembly.

# Temporarily cap the ends of all conduit runs immediately after installation to prevent

accumulation of water, dirt, or other contaminants. Conduits must be swabbed out prior

to installing the conductors.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 43

# Where applicable, explosion proof seals must be installed in the conduit.

# Install drain fittings at the lowest point in the conduit run, install seals at the point of

entry to the DanLoad 6000 to prevent vapor passage and accumulation of moisture.

# Use liquid tight conduit fittings, such as Myers Scru-tite, or similar, for conduit which

is exposed to moisture.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 44 ___________________________________________________ Installation

2.5 Installing the Secondary Keypad / Display

2.5.1 Hardware Setup / Configuration

Refer to Figure 2-16 Secondary Keypad / Display Connections.

The primary display/keypad is connected to P2 on the CPU board. The secondary display/keypad

is connected to P3 on the CPU board.

The jumper (W1) on the secondary keypad board is installed to recognize the key codes from the

secondary keypad. The jumper (W1) on the primary keypad board should not be installed.

The weights and measures key (top left of the keyboard) will only function on the primary keypad.

2.5.2 Software Setup / Configuration

The DanLoad 6000 auto-configures any connected display/keypad modules at power-up/reset of

the CPU board. The yellow (top) and red (bottom) LED's (located to the right of the display)

should "blink" on/off (once) just before text appears on the display. The displays/keypad modules

should not be powered on/off independently of the CPU board; they should be powered-up prior

to or at the same time as the CPU board.

The primary and secondary keypad/display modules have independently controlled automatic

backlighting and contrast adjustment. The primary LCD type (program code 355) and secondary

LCD type (program code 358) should be configured appropriately for each.

The primary and secondary displays display the same information simultaneously. However, only

one keypad (primary or secondary) is active at a time. The active keypad is controlled by the

swing-arm switches (SW2 and SW1) on the CPU board and the configured side detect method

(program code 312).

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 45

2.5.3 Wiring Details

The cable that connects the 2 interface cards requires 16 conductors, minimum wire size 24 AWG.

The maximum length of the cable should be 2000 feet (610 meters).

2.5.4 Power Requirements

The standard enclosure furnishes a line Power Supply, which can be 120 or 240 VAC, 47 to 63

HZ. The display/keypad modules power requirement is 7 VDC minimum at 0.5 amperes.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

2 - 46 ___________________________________________________ Installation

Section 3

Setup

Man-Machine Interface

Initial Setup Procedure

Signal Handling

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 1

This section contains information on the initial setup and configuration of the DanLoad 6000

Preset. Any combination of up to four flow meters, up to four components, and up to six

additives can be defined and controlled. The user performs the initial setup of the DanLoad 6000

via the operator control panel by following an automatic sequence of displayed-prompts and key-

press responses. The initial setup routine is a general procedure that combines basic configuration

of the instrument with a tutorial function that familiarizes the user with the methods of changing

values of program codes. The initial setup procedure does not cover all the different types of

parameters. For instance, the basic setup does not cover product blending or additive injection

operations. Section 3.6 contains details on the setup and parameters associated with product

blending. Section 3.7 contains details on the setup and parameters associated with additive

injection.

Section 6 and Appendix A and B contain additional information related to the initial setup

procedure and system configuration. Read Section 6, Appendix A, and Appendix B before

starting the initial setup procedure.

The DanLoad 6000 only requires AC power to execute the setup procedure. Therefore, it is

possible to preconfigure the instrument in a shop or office before on-site installation. The

DanLoad 6000 should have the correct type and number of process signal input / output boards

installed before initial setup procedure is begun. The initial setup procedure is performed in any

of the following instances.

# Before or during installation of a new DanLoad 6000 that has not been setup previously.

# If a new main processor board, that has not been setup, is installed (Note: Spare main

processor boards can be setup for your application in advance. The setup parameters are

retained in non-volatile battery backed RAM (random access memory). Note: A

configured battery backed RAM module can be moved from one main processor board to

another main processor board without loss of configuration data.)

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 2 _______________________________________________________ Setup

# If the integrated RAM / battery module on the main processor board is replaced.

After the initial setup procedure has been completed, the DanLoad 6000 can be easily

reconfigured to add or change operational features such as product blending, additive injection,

new delivery control recipes, data logging, and communication with a terminal automation

system.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 3

3.1 Overview

The major functions of the Script DanLoad 6000 are described below.

# Provides a user interface to the operator in script languages such as Chinese and Thai.

# Accepts various types and combinations of process input signals, such as flow from pulse

output type flow meters, temperatures (RTD), pressures and / or density (4 to 20 mAdc

analog), and discrete contact closures indicating various status and permissive conditions.

# Performs mathematical and logical calculations based on configuration parameters (setup

parameters), user / operator input from the keypad, and the current values and states of

the process inputs.

# Generates discrete relay / solenoid driver control output signals based on the results of the

mathematical and logical calculations performed.

# (Optionally) Transmits selected data logs to a logging printer and / or performs bi-

directional communication, functioning as a slave processor for a terminal automation

system, distributed processing system, or other host computer.

The DanLoad 6000 can be setup to perform many different tasks based on the requirements of

various load rack applications. Setup is accomplished by physical configuration (installing circuit

boards) and then executing the setup routine. The setup routine or logical configuration is

accomplished by user interaction with the operator control panel which consists of a multi-line /

graphical LCD display panel and a numeric / function keypad.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 4 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Information on installation planning, design, and physical configuration of the DanLoad 6000

is covered in Section 2 - Installation. Therefore, it is assumed at this time that the instrument

contains the process input / output signal boards which provide the physical signal handling

capacity for the intended load rack application. The physical configuration, locations and types

of process input / output boards, is automatically sensed by the DanLoad 6000 and is displayed

for verification at the start of the setup routine.

Program Codes (Parameters)

Program codes identify all configuable parameters of the DanLoad 6000. Each Program Code

consists of the following four parts. A three-digit identification number (the program code), a

name, a selection or value (note: some values are preset selections, other values are free form

entry), and one to five program code attributes. The selection or value of a program code affects

the general or specific operation of the DanLoad 6000. Each name / three-digit identification

number combination identifies the specific selection or value. Identical names are repeated when

the associated function is required at several places in a series of similar functions. Therefore,

the name is the general identifier of the program code and the three-digit identification number is

the specific identifier of the program code.

Example: 085 Low flow restart qty 50

Item Description

085 The 3-digit program code identification of the parameter is

in the range of 001 to 831, not all numbers in the sequence

are used, the program code number is a unique identifier of

an associated value or selection.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 5

Item Description

Low flow restart qty The name of the parameter, the name can be unique or can

be repeated for similar parameters in a series of parameters

or can be unique. In this example: PC [085, 091, 097,

103] Low flow restart qty correspond to components 1, 2,

3, and 4.

50 The value of the parameter. In this example, the value can

be any number from 0 to 99999.

<attribute> (not shown) Program codes may have one or more of the following five

attributes set active: Read only, Weights and measures,

Data logging, Value changed, Transaction storage. See

Section 6.1 for additional information on program code

attributes.

Program codes are divided into twenty-one functional groups. Each functional group is divided

into one or more display pages which can be shown on the display panel. Parameters are

accessible for monitoring or changing when the DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Program Mode.

A diagram of the Program Mode menu tree is shown in Figure 3 - 1. All program codes are

accessible via the Setup selection of the Program Mode Menu. Functional groups of program

codes are listed in Figure 3 - 2. The value part of a program code can be changed by keypad

entries.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ____________________________________________________________________________ Section 3-6

Program Mode Menu Alarm reset 6 Alarm Reset display

Setup 6 Setup Menu )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))), *

Program code attributes 6 Program code attributes display *

*

Set date and time 6 Set date and time display *

*

Diagnostics 6 Diagnostics Menu )))))))))))))))))), *

* *

Set contrast/backlighting 6 Set contrast/backlighting display * *

9 9 EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) Diagnostics Menu Setup Menu Firmware versions Security parameters RAM tests Unit parameters Keypad Valve parameters Display Meter parameters Inputs/Outputs Component parameters DUART Delivery parameters ARCNET Digital Valve parameters Crash analysis Pulse per unit outputs Show memory Additive delivery params Show trans memory Factors Exit (ALT+CLEAR) Alarms I/O parameters Additive I/O parameters Component I/O parameters Temp/press/dens Recipes Data communications Dynamic data display Data logging Blending Additive pumps/block valves Exit (ALT+CLEAR)

Menu Tree - Figure 3 - 1

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ____________________________________________________________________________ Section 3-7

Parameters Program Code Used For

Security parameters 001 to 024 operation security

Unit parameters 025 to 046 global parameters

Valve parameters 048 and 049 flow control valves

Meter parameters 050 to 062 flow meters

Component parameters 065 to 077 liquid components

Delivery parameters 078 to 111 batch deliveries

Digital valve parameters 112 to 127 digital flow control valve

Pulse per unit outputs 128 to 134 quantity pulses to external equipment

Additive delivery parameters 135 to 168 additive injection

Factors 169 to 218 flow meter factors

Alarms 219 to 268 actions and limits

I/O parameters 280 to 372 input / output signal assignments

Additive I/O parameters 380 to 397 additive injection signal assignments

Component I/O parameters 400 to 422 component block valve signal assignments

Temperature / pressure / density 426 to 479 quantity correction

Recipes 480 to 660 product / batch deliveries

Data communications 661 to 672 logging / terminal automation system

Dynamic data display 679 to 695 operator data view (programmable)

Data logging 696 to 704 reports to printer

Blending 710 to 799 product blending control

Additive pumps/block valves 800 to 831 additive pump and block valve control

Parameters List Overview - Figure 3 - 2

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 8 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Operating Modes

The form of user interaction with the DanLoad 6000 is defined by the functional state of the

instrument. Communications and interaction with a terminal automation system is defined by the

state of the Operating Mode. The Operating Mode is set by PC 025, located in the Unit

parameters group.

FUNCTIONAL MODE (SET BY THE USER VIA THE CONTROL PANEL):

# Loading Mode Normal operation with the instrument controlling batch product

deliveries to a tanker vehicle.

# Program Mode Permits initial setup and modification of the operation of the

instrument. Access to this mode is passcode restricted and can only

be entered while the DanLoad 6000 is not controlling a batch

delivery operation and a delivery transaction is not open.

OPERATING MODE (SET BY STATE OF PC 025 OPERATING MODE):

# Auto Remote control operation, status to and control from a terminal

automation system.

# Manual Local control operation, status only to a terminal automation

system, no remote control functions performed.

# Stand-alone Independent local operation, status / control functions to / from a

terminal automation system are not implemented.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 9

3.2 Man-Machine Interface

User / operator interaction with a DanLoad 6000 is described below.

# The user issues a command via a single key press / release action or by simultaneously

pressing / releasing two keys. While operating in the Loading Mode, all entries are

single-key press actions. Some entries are simultaneous two-key actions while operating

in the Program Mode.

# The DanLoad 6000 responds by either executing the command immediately or by

prompting the user, via the display panel, for additional data entry.

# If the command is executed immediately, the displayed information will change in some

manner to indicate response to the command.

# If the command cannot be completed without additional information from the user, one

of various types of data input prompt displays will be shown. Now the user has the option

to enter the data in response to the displayed prompt or to return the DanLoad 6000 to the

existing state without modifying any internal or external state or configuration.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 10 _______________________________________________________ Setup

3.2.1 Data Display Operation

While operating in the Program Mode, data from the DanLoad 6000 is presented to the user on

an 8-line by 40-column LCD display panel. Miscellaneous messages and data are displayed in the

format shown in the General Display Format, Figure 3 - 3.

Header lineData lineData lineData lineData lineData lineData lineMessage line

General Display Format

Figure 3 - 3

One common format of the general display is the Parameter View display, Figure 3 - 4. The

Parameter View display is used throughout the initial setup procedure and in the future for

monitoring and / or changing parameter values / selections.

Header lineccc name vvvvvvvvccc name vvvvvvvvccc name vvvvvvvvccc name vvvvvvvvccc name vvvvvvvvccc name vvvvvvvvMessage line

Parameter View

Figure 3 - 4

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 11

The field types displayed in the Parameter View, Figure 3 - 4, are described below.

# Header line An alpha-numeric field that is used to describe the contents

of the display. Usually a parameters group or sub-group

title, such as:

Meter 1 parameters

# ccc A three digit field containing the Program Code that

identifies a specific parameter. Program codes are unique

for each parameter. The range of the program code series

is 001 to 831 (several program code numbers in the series

are not assigned). All program codes / parameters are

described in Section 6 - Program Code Definitions.

# name An alpha-numeric field that contains the name that describes

the function of the program code. Names up to 34-

characters long are used. Identical names are used for

functions that are repeated several times in a series of similar

parameters for different physical or logical items. A typical

name is:

Meter ID

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 12 _______________________________________________________ Setup

# vvvvvvvv A variable length numeric, alpha-numeric, or selection

field that contains the value or selection of the corresponding

parameter (Program Code). The contents of this field can

be changed by the user (unless the value is Read-only). The

value / selection is changed via key entries. The key entry

sequences are dependent on the type of field and are

described in the following section. The three types of fields

that can be displayed in this area are:

# numeric The field can contain a variable number of

digits (0 thru 9), a decimal separator (defined by

PC 040 Decimal separator), and a minus sign (-).

# alpha-numeric The field consists of a variable

number of alpha-numeric characters (also called a

string).

# selection The field consists of one of an internally

defined option selected from a list of possible options

for this field entry.

# Message line An alpha-numeric field used to display a message to the

user. Prompt messages are defined in the applicable sections

of the following setup description.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 13

Keypad (English Version)

Figure 3-5

3.2.2 Keypad Operation

The keypad, located on the operator panel, provides the method for the local operator to enter

commands and data into the DanLoad 6000. The keypad layout is shown below.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 14 _______________________________________________________ Setup

KEY PRIMARY FUNCTION ALTERNATE FUNCTION

0 thru 9 numeric digits

ALT used in combination withother keys to modify thefunction of the other keys, see descriptions in theALTERNATE FUNCTIONcolumn

0 0 digit view I/O configuration summary

1 1 digit toggle minus sign ' -'

3 3 digit increase display contrast (darken)

6 6 digit decrease display contrast(lighten)

START start batch delivery

STOP/PRINT stop batch delivery/printbatch/transaction report

ENTER accept value or execute option PROGRAM

CLEAR remove selected value EXIT

SELECT scroll options list BACKSPACE

87

scroll up scroll left

96

scroll down scroll right

W&M the Weights and Measures security switch(round, spring loaded, sealable switch located in the upper leftarea of the keypad; this switch is sealable in the depressed (CLOSED) position)

Key Functions

Figure 3 - 6

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 15

Several keys perform dual functions, dependent on the operating mode of the DanLoad 6000.

The Loading Mode is active if the Loading Display, the Additive Selection Display, or the Recipe

Selection Display is currently showing on the display panel. The Program Mode is active if the

Program Mode Menu or any related sub-menu is currently showing on the display panel. Specific

functions of the keys in the Loading Mode and the Program Mode are described below.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 16 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Key Function

Loading Mode only:

START Initiate a batch delivery after entry of the preset quantity.

STOP/PRINT Suspend a batch delivery operation in progress or end transaction

in progress. Print an optional transaction report that may include

batch data.

Loading Mode and Program Mode:

W&M (spring loaded captive switch located in the upper left area of the keypad)

The Weights and Measures security switch provides global restriction for

modification of all program codes that have the Weights and Measures

attribute set ON. This restriction prevents users / operators from

modifying the values or selections of these program codes. See Section 6.1

Program Code Attributes for a complete description of program code

attributes and the Weights and Measures security switch.

# CLOSED Depressed and captive with the slot in the vertical

position. Can be wire sealed in this position. Critical weights and

measures variables cannot be modified.

# OPEN Extended with the slot in the horizontal position. Critical

weights and measures variable can be modified (the switch must be

OPEN prior to accessing the Program Mode to enable modification

capability).

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 17

Key Function

ALT This key is used in conjunction with several other keys to change the

primary function performed by the other key. The primary function of a

dual function key is indicated on the top of the key face (white letters /

black background). The alternate function of a dual function key is

indicated on the bottom of the key face (black letters / white background).

Numeric keys 0, 1, 3, and 6 also have alternate functions as indicated

below. The ALT key should be pressed and maintained in the depressed

position while simultaneously pressing and releasing an alternate function

key to execute an alternate function.

0 thru 9

(Loading Mode) Numeric keys used for numeric data entry.

(Program Mode) Numeric keys used for numeric data entry and selection of alpha

character group for data entry.

ALT+ 0 Active in Program Mode only, activates display of the physical

configuration of the DanLoad 6000. The first page displayed contains the

location of the process signal input / output boards detected during the

power-up sequence. Successive pages, accessed by the 98 keys, show the

currently configured state of physical input / output to logical input / output

assignments in the following groups: RTD inputs, 4-20 mA inputs,

Discrete inputs, Discrete outputs

ALT+ 1 Active in Program Mode only. Toggles the minus sign on or off for a

numeric entry. Can be used before, during, or after entry of a numeric

value.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 18 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Key Function

ALT+ 3 Active in Loading Mode and Program Mode. Increases the display contrast

(darkens the display).

ALT+ 6 Active in Loading Mode and Program Mode. Decreases the display

contrast (lightens the display).

ENTER

(Loading Mode) Accept or bypass data item entry or preset quantity entry and

continue.

(Program Mode) Accept the value or selection highlighted by the box cursor.

PROGRAM (ALT+ ENTER)

(Loading Mode) Change to Program Mode.

(Program Mode) Ignore any edit made to the current field selected by the box cursor

and restore the original value / selection.

CLEAR

(Loading Mode) Clear the current data item entry or preset quantity entry.

Remove the Dynamic Data Display window from the loading.

display

(Program Mode) Clear the current numeric or alphanumeric entry.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 19

Key Function

EXIT (ALT+ CLEAR)

(Loading Mode) Bypass the data item entry sequence. If data item entry is defined

(Program Mode) Step to the next higher menu level. Change to Loading Mode when

the Program Mode Menu is displayed.

SELECT

(Loading Mode) Display dynamic data window on the loading display.

(Program Mode) Scroll through selection options. Step to next character position

when editing an alpha-numeric string entry.

BACKSPACE (ALT+ SELECT)

(Loading Mode) No function.

(Program Mode) Step to previous character position when editing an alpha-numeric

string entry. Scroll backward through selection options.

98 (Loading Mode) Change Dynamic Data Display page.

(Program Mode) Step to next or previous program code (parameter) display line.

67 (ALT+ 9 or ALT+ 8)

(Loading Mode) No function.

(Program Mode) Step to next or previous character entry when editing an alpha-

numeric string entry.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 20 _______________________________________________________ Setup

3.2.3 Script Language Support

A language dependent message may be displayed on the DanLoad 6000 on the message line of

the display, via an automation system. Communication command code 1C, “Display message”

can be used to display a user configured script, roman or a mixture of script and roman message

on the DanLoad 6000 graphics LCD display.

Each script language has a set of script characters that are available for display on the DanLoad

6000. A script character has an 8-bit character code from 32 hexadecimal to FF hexadecimal.

A script message may be formed by an 8-bit character code group preceded by a “SCRIPTON”

character code (FF). This special character code is used as an escape sequence to turn on the

script character mapping.

The string of 8-bit character codes are downloaded as part of the “Display message” command.

The script message, preceded by a SCRIPTON (FF) character, are downloaded in the msgtxt

field of the “Display message” command (Refer to the DanLoad 6000 communication

specifications for a description of the “Display message” command). The script message is

always preceded by a "SCRIPTON" character (FF). The preceding "SCRIPTON" characters

activate the bitmaps (script character) for the language that has been selected on the DanLoad

6000. The script language may be selected via program code “Language”. The series of

characters following the "SCRIPON" character invoke individual bitmaps (script characters)

corresponding to the character code.

The bitmaps defined for the language is de-activated by a "SCRIPTOFF" character (8-bit

character code FE). Characters that are preceded by a "SCRIPTOFF" character are displayed

based on the Thai ASCII character set mapping. The ASCII character is the default mapping on

the Script DanLoad 6000 and is invoked if the “SCRIPTON” character is not received.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 21

With the use of the "SCRIPTON" and "SCRIPTOFF" escape sequences a message containing a

mixture of script characters based on the script language chosen, and alphanumerical characters

(e.g English messages) may be displayed on the Download 6000 LCD graphics display via the

automation system.

The Chinese language script characters that are displayed and the character code that invokes them

are shown as follows.

Chinese Script Characters Bitmap (Part 1)

Figure 3 - 7

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 22 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Chinese Script Characters Bitmap (Part 2)

Figure 3 - 8

Thai Script Character Bitmap

Figure 3 - 9

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 23

HI

LO

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0 0 @ P ` p Ç É 3 7 d0 e0 f0

1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ 3 7 d1 e1 f1

2 " 2 B R b r é Æ 3 7 d2 e2 f2

3 # 3 C S c s â ô 3 7 d3 e3 f3

4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö 0 4 8 d4 8 f4

5 % 5 E U e u à ò 0 4 8 d5 9 f5

6 & 6 F V f v å û 0 4 8 d6 e6 f6

7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù 0 4 8 d7 e7 f7

8 ( 8 H X h x ê 1 5 9 d8 e8 f8

9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö 1 5 9 d9 e9 f9

A * : J Z j z è Ü 1 5 9 da ea fa

B + ; K [ k { ï ¢ 1 5 9 db eb fb

C , < L \ l | î £ 2 6 dc ec fc

D - = M ] m } ì ¥ 2 6 dd ed fd

E . > N ^ n ~ Ä . 2 6 de ee fe

(SCRIPT OFF)

F / ? O _ o Å ƒ 2 6 df ef f f

(SCRIPT ON)

Alphanumeric Codes for Thai Bitmap Construction

Figure 3 - 10

Characters codes A0, A1, A2 and A3 are the "waveform drawing" characters; "low", "low to

high", "high to low" and "high", i.e.

+) ), ))))

)))) ))- .))

A0 A1 A2 A3

Characters codes CC to CF are "white spaces". Character codes A4 to CB make up the top left,

top right, bottom left and bottom right portions of large numbers ' 0' through ' 9' displayed on the

loading screen.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 24 _______________________________________________________ Setup

3.3 Initial Setup Procedure Overview

The initial setup procedure guides the user through a sequence of displayed prompts and key press

responses. The user accomplishes the following three tasks while executing the initial setup

procedure.

# Accept or modify several default parameter values / selections that inform the DanLoad

6000 about the physical characteristics of the batch loading system. Section 3.5 contains

information on process input / output channel assignment.

# Accept or modify several default parameter values / selections that inform the DanLoad

6000 about the type of flow calculations and logical operations to be performed.

# Guide the user through interactive verification and / or parameter value changes. This

tutorial function familiarizes the user with the display format and the man-machine

interface, using the keypad.

Read all of this section and review Section 6 - Program Code Definitions prior to performing the

initial setup procedure. In most cases, desired responses to the prompts encountered during the

initial setup procedure can be determined during execution of the setup procedure. However, if

the correct response cannot be determined during the setup procedure, it is permissible to accept

any or all of the default values / selections for the parameters. Any default value or selection that

is accepted or modified can be changed easily at any time in the future.

The initial setup procedure automatically enters default values / selections for some parameters that

are not covered by the procedure. In some cases, these default values / selections require

modification for the intended application. Review the additional information contained in Sections

3.6, 3.7, and 3.8 after the initial setup procedure is completed. This additional information

should be reviewed to assure that the DanLoad 6000 is properly configured for your installation.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 25

3.3.1 Data Entry

Several key press responses are required during execution of the initial setup procedure. The

responses are a press / release of ENTER or 9 to continue, numeric data entries with the 0 thru

9 numeric keys, option selection scrolling with the SELECT key, or alpha-numeric data entry.

The value or option displayed is accepted and entered by pressing the ENTER key or either the

9 or 8 arrow key. Methods for data entry are described below.

# Numeric data entry

Place the box cursor over the selected parameter with the 9 or 8 arrow keys. Enter the

desired number with the numeric keys 0 through 9. Numeric entries are toggled between

negative and positive values by entering the numeric value in the field and then pressing

and holding the Alt key while pressing the 1 digit key. If an entry error is made, press

the CLEAR key to clear the field and start again, or toggle the sign to the opposite state.

# Option data entry

Selection options are contained in short lists permanently stored in the DanLoad 6000.

Place the box cursor over the selected parameter with the 9 or 8 arrow keys. If necessary,

use the SELECT key or the BACKSPACE KEY (ALT+ SELECT) to scroll the list

forward or backward until the desired option is displayed.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 26 _______________________________________________________ Setup

# Alpha-numeric data entry

If alpha-numeric data entry is permitted in a field, the message line will display the

following prompt: 0= Space, 1= A, 2= a, 3= 0, 4= #, 5= "

This prompt indicates to the user that an alpha-numeric string of characters can be entered.

The numbers 1 through 5 point to a specific location in a continuous string of characters.

For example, the number 1 points to the letter A, a string of upper case letters continue

to Z, the next character is a, a string of lower case letters continue to z, the next

character is 0, a string of numbers continues to 9. In other words, each group of

characters is in one continuous string of all possible characters. The apparent groups of

characters do not wrap around to the start of that group.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 27

1 2 3 4 5 5 5 5 5

A a 0 # number/pound " è 0 7 ef

B b 1 $ dollars ' ï 0 7 f0

C c 2 % percent : î 0 7 f1

D d 3 ? quest ion mark ; ì 1 7 f2

E e 4 ! exclamationpoint

( Ä 1 8 f3

F f 5 & ampersand ) Å 1 8 f4

G g 6 + plus < É 1 8 f5

H h 7 - minus > æ 2 8 f6

I i 8 * asterisk [ Æ 2 9 f7

J j 9 / slash ] ô 2 9 f8

K k = equal { ö 2 9 f9

L l . dot } ò 3 9 fa

M m , comma \ û 3 e0 fb

N n ù 3 e1 fc

O o ^ 3 e2 fd

P p ~ Ö 4 e3 fe

Q q 7F Ü 4 8 f f

R r Ç ¢ 4 9

S s ü £ 4 e6

T t é ¥ 5 e7

U u â . 5 e8

V v ä ƒ 5 e9

W w à ))

5 ea

X x | +)-

6 eb

Y y ç ),

.6 ec

Z z ê )) 6 ed

ë 0 6 ee

Alpha-Numeric CharactersFigure 3 - 11

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 28 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Figure 3 - 11 contains a list of all available alpha-numeric characters organized into five

groups. Alpha-numeric characters are entered in the following manner when the prompt

is displayed.

# The flashing square cursor is positioned in the leftward field position. The cursor

indicates the current character entry position within the alpha-numeric field.

# The cursor is moved one character position right each time the SELECT key is

pressed. The cursor is moved one character position left each time the

BACKSPACE (ALT+SELECT) key is pressed.

# To enter an alpha-numeric character in the current character position, press the

number key 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 which indicates the group of characters which

contain the desired entry. Any number group selector can be pressed after the

initial selection, if an error is made. (Note: An easy method to access the Z

character is press 2 to display lower case a then press the 7 (ALT+8) key.)

# The first character of the selected group will now be displayed in the active

character position.

# To select another character from the specified group of characters, press the ALT

key and maintain the key depressed. With the ALT key depressed, press the 6

(ALT+9) to move to the next character in the selection string. Or, with the ALT

key depressed, press the 7 (ALT+ 8) to move to the previous character in the

selection string. The character selections will jog in sequence automatically if both

the ALT key and either one of the arrow keys are simultaneously maintained

depressed. When the desired character is displayed in the active character position,

release the keys.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 29

# Use the SELECT or the BACKSPACE (ALT+SELECT) key to step the cursor

to the next or any desired position in the alpha-numeric field. Repeat the entry

sequence described above until the field display is as desired.

# Special alpha-numeric data entry

Parameters ccc Control meters in the Pulse per unit outputs group and ccc Additive control

meters in the Additive parameters group select one of the fixed options G, N, or X in the

following manner. Place the box cursor over the selected parameter with the 9 or 8 arrow

keys. Maintain the ALT key depressed and select the desired option with the 9 or 8 arrow

keys.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 30 _______________________________________________________ Setup

3.4 Initial Setup Procedure

The Weights and Measures switch located in the upper left area of the keypad should be rotated

until the captive pin passes through the slot and releases the switch to the extended (OPEN)

position. The electrical jumper configuration, described in Section 2 - Installation, should be

verified. AC power should be connected and applied to the instrument.

The sequence of the initial setup procedure is presented below with examples of the displays

presented to the user, an explanation of the contents of the display, and the user response to each

display.

DanLoad 6000CPU-1 firmware v1.20CPU-2 firmware v1.20

Message EPROM v1.20

Power failure mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss

The display example above shows the firmware (application software) version of the DanLoad

6000 and the date and time that AC power input was last removed from the instrument.

DanLoad 6000Running CPU-1 RAM testPassedRunning CPU-2 RAM testPassed

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 31

The display example above shows the results of automatic diagnostic tests that check the operation

of the RAM (random access memory). The normal message is Please wait while the test is in

progress and the normal result message is Passed. A Failed message indicates that a hardware

problem exists in the DanLoad 6000.

Slot 1 EmptySlot 2 AC I/OSlot 3 EmptySlot 4 EmptySlot 5 Meter PulseSlot 6 EmptySlot 7 EmptyDUART = Off ARCNET = Off Any key

The display example above shows the location of all process input / output signal boards installed

and the serial communications capability of the DanLoad 6000. A message DUART = ###,

where ### is 000 to 255, indicates the communications address (set by DIP switches) for the

dual universal asynchronous receiver / transmitter module that handles RS 232 / RS 485 serial

communications is present, otherwise the message is DUART = Off.

The worksheets located in Appendix A should be photo-copied at this time and the copies used to

document the physical input / output signal assignments for the DanLoad 6000. The individual

channel assignments can be viewed and recorded at this time. While viewing the slot assignment

display above, press any key to continue. The following display will be shown.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 32 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Meter inputs01 Chan 0 Meter Pulse in J5 002 Chan 1 Meter Pulse in J5 0

ALT+SELECT to reconfigure

The display example above shows one of several similar displays which indicate the automatic

input / output signal numbering performed by the DanLoad 6000. The 9 and 8 arrows keys are

used to page through this display group. Display types included in this group are:

# Meter inputs (shown above)

# RTD inputs

# 4-20 mA inputs

# Discrete inputs (can be more than one display page)

# Discrete outputs (can be more than one display page)

Section 2.4.1 contains additional information on automatic assignment of input / output channels.

The fields located in this display group are described below.

# Header line Defines the input / output signal type.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 33

# 01 Sequential number for this input. The sequence starts at 01 and

continues through the highest input or output channel of that type.

The DanLoad 6000 assigns these numbers automatically by sensing

the type of board in each slot (J1 to J7). Boards are scanned from

left to right. Therefore, similar type channels in leftward located

boards will have lower numbers than similar type channels in

rightward located boards. A minimum of one meter pulse board

must be present. If an analog board is not present, the RTD inputs

and 4-20 mA inputs groups will display the message No points of

this type.

# Chan # Sequential number of the physical input / output channel on the

corresponding board. The sequence starts at 0. The maximum

value for this field is 7, which corresponds to the eighth output on

an AC I/O board (channels 0 to 7). All other boards have fewer of

the corresponding channel type for the board, than the AC I/O

board.

# Meter Pulse This field indicates the board type in the indicated slot. Entries in

this field can be: Meter pulse, Analog, AC I/O, DC I/O, or

Additive I/O.

# J5 This field indicates the physical location of the board. Entries in

this field can be: J1 through J7.

# 0 The number of times used / referenced in the current configuration.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 34 _______________________________________________________ Setup

# ALT+SELECT to reconfigure

Configuration during the initial setup procedure is automatic and no

response to this prompt is required. If an input / output signal

board is added in slots J1 to J7 in the future, the DanLoad 6000

senses the presence of the new board and always displays the

current configuration in the Slot # <board type> display.

However, the input / output channels are not renumbered until the

manual command (ALT+SELECT) is issued.

(Note: If the input / output signal board complement of a DanLoad

6000 functioning in a loading system is changed and the

ALT+SELECT command is issued, all input / output points of

similar types to the board(s) installed must be checked. The

physical channel to internal logical signal may be changed when the

channels are renumbered to correspond to the new configuration.)

Note

The two swing arm switch inputs on the Main Processor Board and the two high resolution

meter pulse outputs on the Meter Pulse Board are dedicated functions and are not shown in the

Configuration Summary Display.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 35

3.5 Process Input / Output Signal Handling

All input / output signal board slots (J1 to J7) are electrically identical. However, for electrical

isolation of AC and DC signals, only AC I/O or Enhanced I/O boards should be installed in slots

J1 or J2. It is strongly suggested that board placement follow the recommended layout indicated

in the descriptions of each board in Section 2. The recommended board layout provides electrical

isolation of AC Voltage control and status signals (AC I/O and / or enhanced I/O boards) by the

vertical metal partition between slots J2 and J3. In addition, if an analog input signal board is

installed, this board is electrically and physically isolated in the rightward slot J7. A DanLoad

6000 in basic configuration contains the following boards.

I/O Board

Capacity

Input Output

main processor 2 RS-485 or 1 RS-485 and 1 RS-232 and / or 1 LAN

2 DC (dedicatedfunction: swing arm)

N/A

one meter pulse 2 pulse 2 pulse (dedicatedfunction: highresolution meterpulse)2 DC (control)

one AC I/O 2 DC/AC (status) 8 AC (control)

Basic Configuration

Figure 3 - 12

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 36 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Basic configuration considerations:

# Serial communications require that either a DUART module for RS-485 / RS-232. A

DUART module is required for data logging to a printer or data logging device.

# The two meter pulse inputs on each meter pulse board can be either single pulse inputs

from two separate flow meters or a dual pulse input from one flow meter (IP-252 pulse

security. Channel A is used for flow measurement, Channel B is used for verification of

Channel A integrity), a maximum of two meter pulse boards can be installed.

# The swing arm input is normally from either a single switch or dual switch swing arm.

This input is used for swing arm side detect and keypad side enable and to indicate the load

rack side to a terminal automation system.

3.5.1 Physical Input and Output Signal Assignment

The DanLoad 6000 automatically assigns physical input and output channel numbers during initial

setup or when manually commanded to do so. The channel assignment is performed as follows.

The instrument scans the input / output signal boards located in slots J1 (leftward) through J7

(rightward) in that order. Each board is identified and the physical channels on each board,

indicated in Appendix A - Worksheets 3 through 7b, are assigned a sequential channel number

corresponding to the same type channel. These physical I/O channel assignments can be viewed

by pressing the ALT+0 key while operating in the Program Mode. While viewing the channel

assignments, the prompt message ALT+SELECT to reconfigure is displayed on the message line.

Issuing this command causes the DanLoad 6000 to re-number the physical input / output channels

if the board complement has been altered in any manner since the last configuration. There are

five different types of input / output signals that can be handled by the DanLoad 6000. These

channel types are listed below.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 37

I/O Channel Type Description

Meter inputs Assigned meter pulse input numbers 01 and 02 if one meter pulse board is

installed. Assigned meter pulse input numbers 01, 02, 03, 04 if two meter

pulse board are installed.

RTD inputs Assigned RTD input number 01 if a 2-channel analog board is installed.

Assigned 01, 02, 03, 04 if an 8-channel analog board is installed.

4-20 mA inputs Assigned 4-20 mA input number 01 if a 2-channel analog board is installed.

Assigned 01, 02, 03, 04 if an 8-channel analog board is installed.

Discrete inputs Assigned discrete input numbers from 01 to the maximum number of

discrete status inputs present, in the order that the inputs are encountered

by the configuration scan.

Discrete outputs Assigned discrete output numbers from 01 to the maximum number of

discrete control outputs present, in the order that the inputs are encountered

by the configuration scan.

The physical channel assignments are indicated under each channel type header in the following

format.

cc Chan n <board type> in Jn s

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 38 _______________________________________________________ Setup

where:

cc = Logical (software assigned) channel number (for this type of point)

assigned to this point. This number is assigned automatically. Vdc and

Vac status inputs are numbered sequentially in the same series. Each

channel number is dependent on the I/O board location and the physical

board channel. Vdc and Vac control outputs are numbered sequentially in

the same series, dependent on the I/O board location and the physical

board channel.

Chan n = Sequential channel number 0 to n that identifies the physical channel on the

I/O board. The maximum range for this number is 0 to 7. (Note:

Maximum of 8 output channels on an AC I/O board.)

<board type> = Board name: Meter Pulse, AC I/O, DC I/O, Add I/O, 2-Ch.

Analog, 8-Ch. Analog

Jn = Slot number, J1 through J7, where the board is located.

s = (reserved for future use)

The logical channel assignments are solely dependent on I/O board locations. This assignment

informs the DanLoad 6000 of the physical input / output signal configuration and assigns non-

duplicated logical channel numbers (leftward column) for identifying each point. The physical

channel assignments cannot be changed. The assignments are determined by the process I/O

board complement and type of boards.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 39

Discrete Signal Processing

As a general rule, discrete input and output signals are processed in the following manner. The

operating state of a field contact closure status input is CLOSED when the field sending or sensor

device is in a DEENERGIZED, OPEN, NORMAL, or SAFE state. The operating state of a field

control output is OPEN when the controlled device is in a DEENERGIZED, CLOSED, OFF, or

IDLE state. Discrete outputs that control flow control valves, block valves, or pumps are

maintained CLOSED to OPEN the valve or RUN the pump motor so that an open wire, open coil,

or power failure to the DanLoad 6000 will cause the affected valve(s) to move to their CLOSED

positions and pump motors to stop running. This method of handling status / permissive inputs

and control outputs assures that operation of the loading system is inherently fail-safe.

Safety circuits (permissive status inputs) are normally closed switch or relay contacts that indicate

a normal or safe condition from the corresponding device. Common permissive devices are

vehicle ground connection detectors, tank overspill detectors, and fire warning systems. The

DanLoad 6000 has the capability of detecting up to eight general purpose safety circuit inputs,

six recipe selection inputs, and four block valve status inputs. Several normally closed contacts

for different safety circuits can be field wired in series. This implementation reduces the number

of physical discrete inputs required, but also generalizes the common safety input. The DanLoad

6000, or terminal automation system, cannot determine the specific device that has generated the

safety circuit open alarm when several permissive signals are wired in series.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 40 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Logical Signal Processing

All process computing instruments handle input and output signals as logical variables while

processing these variables internally. This means that calculations that use the variables are

independent from the external source or destination of the signals. The DanLoad 6000 also

implements logical signal handling techniques at the process signal interface level by allowing any

process input or output signal to be connected to any physical input or output channel of the same

type, such as meter pulse, RTD, status input, or control output. Each physical input and output

channel is assigned to an internal logical channel (function) during the setup procedure. This

design provides greater application versatility for the user by allowing one common physical

configuration of the DanLoad 6000 to be adaptable to most applications and avoiding

configurations with unnecessary and unused input / output signal handling hardware. In addition

to installation versatility, the spare parts stocking requirements are greatly reduced so that only

a minimal number of different types of electronic signal input / output boards are required.

The actual links (assignments) between a physical input and output channels and internal

processing of these channels is performed manually during the initial setup of the DanLoad 6000.

These assignments can be changed later if required. The current physical channel to logical

channel assignments can be viewed at any time. All physical input / output channel to logical

channel assignments are defined in the following parameter groups. Appendix A contains

worksheets that identify each point.

# Meter parameters, PC's 050 to 062

# I/O parameters, PC's 280 to 372

# Additive I/O parameters, PC's 380 to 397

# Component I/O parameters, PC's 400 to 422 and 361 to 372

# Additive pumps / block valves, PC's 800 to 831

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 41

The channel assignments defined by these parameters are viewable while operating in Program

Mode. The rightward column of the parameter display line contains a one or two digit number.

This number is the currently assigned physical channel number in the series of channel numbers

corresponding to the type of channel.

Flow meter pulse input channel and RTD input channel assignments are probably acceptable in

the default state. However, discrete status inputs and control outputs may have been assigned,

during the initial setup procedure to default physical inputs / outputs that do not electrically match

the field devices.

Example: PC 288 Pump control output for component (product) number 1 may have been

assigned to a control output on an AC I/O board and the pump control device in the field is

actuated by 24 Vdc. If this were the case and a DC I/O board was installed, the pump control

output should be manually re-assigned to a control output from the DC I/O board. The I/O point

re-assignment procedure is described in Appendix A.

Copies of the worksheets located in Appendix A with the physical configuration data manually

entered should be available at this point.

Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key to exit the input / output signal configuration display area

and continue with the initial setup.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 42 _______________________________________________________ Setup

DanLoad 6000 Unit is not configured

Initial setup required

Enter passcode _________

The display example above shows messages that indicate the initial setup procedure has never been

executed on this DanLoad 6000. Enter the factory default passcode, 6000, with the numeric keys

and then press the ENTER key.

The Set Date and Time display is shown next. This display provides the method the set the current

date and time for the DanLoad 6000 internal calendar / clock. The date and time are maintained

by an on-board battery on the main processor board and does not require external power.

Set Date and Time

Current date is mm/dd/yy Enter new date (mm/dd/yy): Current time is hh:mm:ss Enter new time (hh:mm:ss):

Set Date and Time Display

Figure 3 - 13

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 43

The current date and time are displayed in the formats indicated in the Set Date and Time display.

The date format is always in the form (mm/dd/yy) during the initial setup. After the initial setup

is complete, the date format can be change via PC 038 Date format, if desired. The date and

time default during initial setup and before modification is: 01/01/93 00:00:ss [January 1,

1993, several seconds (ss) after midnight (00:00:00)]. The flashing underline cursor is

displayed right of the Enter new date (mm/dd/yy): prompt line for entry of a different date than

the current date. Use numeric keys 0 to 9 to enter all or part of a new date. If it is desired to

leave the value for any component of the current date unchanged, press the ENTER key. The

ENTER key must be pressed once after each component of the date is entered or to accept the

current value in that component. After the date has been entered or accepted, the flashing

underline cursor moves to the right of the Enter new time (hh:mm:ss) prompt. The time value

is entered or accepted in a similar manner as the date entry. The EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key

may be used at any time to step to the next entry line.

The Set Date and Time display can be accessed at any time after the initial setup procedure is

completed by selecting Set Date and Time from the Program Menu.

Meter totalizers Meter Gross Std 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0

Press any key to continue

The display example above shows the gross and standard values of the flow meter accumulators.

The values may be zeros as indicated or some other values.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 44 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Initial setupIs this unit a blender No

The display example above shows the default selection No, which indicates that the application

is single component loading. The default selection sets the number of flow meters, number of

flow control valves, and number of components to 1.

If the application requires blending of two to four components, press the SELECT key to scroll

the pick list to the Yes option. Press the ENTER or the 9 arrow key to select the next parameter.

The Type of blender defaults to Seq.(auto). If another type of blending control is desired, press

the SELECT key to scroll the options list (options are described in Section 6 - 026 Unit type.

Press the 9 arrow key to select the next parameter.

If Type of blender is Seq.(auto) or Seq.(manual), the next prompt displayed is:

065 Number of components which defaults to 2

If Type of blender is In-line or Off-rack, the next prompt displayed is:

050 Number of meters which defaults to 2

Accept or change the default value as required.

Initial setupIs this unit a blender YesType of blender Seq.(auto)065 Number of components 2

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 45

Note

For the remaining description of the initial setup procedure, it is assumed that:

Is this unit a blender selection remains the default option No

The following description covers one flow meter, one flow control valve, and one component.

The procedure for defining multiple devices and components is similar except for the

requirement to define additional parameters for the additional devices and components.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 46 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Meter 1 parameters051 Meter ID M1052 Meter pulse board input 1053 Valve to be controlled 1xxx0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3= 0, 4=#, 5="

The display example above shows parameters related to flow meter number 1. The No selection

for blending has set the number of meters to 1, parameter 050 indicated below is not displayed

in the initial setup procedure:

050 Number of meters 1

Parameter:

051 Meter ID M1

Is set to the default string M1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on the bottom

line to allow the user to change this string to any five characters.

Parameter:

052 Meter pulse board input 1

Is set to the default value 1. This entry indicates that the physical flow meter 1 that has the

descriptive tag name M1 is connected to meter pulse board input 1 (channel 1 (terminals 1, 2,

3). If there is only one meter pulse board in the DanLoad 6000, this number can only be 1 or 2.

However, if there are two meter pulse boards in the DanLoad 6000, valid input assignments

would be 1, 2, 3, or 4. It is important to note that this assignment informs the DanLoad 6000

that a physical flow meter with an arbitrary name identification, M1 in this case, is assigned to

the physical pulse input channel 1. Future references to this flow meter, for relation to other

physical equipment or process tasks, are as meter 1, regardless of the name identification or

pulse input channel.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 47

If IP-252 dual pulse security checking is implemented, the pulse input processing is handled as

follows.

IP-252 Pulse Security

FlowTransmitter

Meter Pulse CardInput

Meter LogicalInput

Logical MeterAssignment

A1 MP board 1 channel 1 1(2 not used)

1

B1 MP board 1 channel 2

A2 MP board 2 channel 1 3(4 not used)

2

B2 MP board 2 channel 2

If the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a Seq.(auto) or Seq.(manual) multi-component blender,

components are defined at this time. If the DanLoad 6000 is configured as an In-line or Off-rack

blender, flow meters 2 through 4, as required, are defined at this time.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 48 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Component 1066 Component ID Component #1067 Meter 1068 Available Yes

0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3= 0, 4=#, 5="

The display example above shows parameters related to component number 1. The No selection

for blending has set the number of components to 1, PC 065 indicated below is not displayed in

the initial setup procedure:

065 Number of components 1

Parameter:

066 Component ID Component #1

Is set to the default string Component #1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on

the message line to allow the user to change this string to any sixteen characters.

Parameter:

067 Meter 1

Is set to the default value 1. This number indicates that flow meter 1 is assigned to measure this

component. Only one flow meter, meter 1, is defined at this time so 1 is the only valid

assignment. However, this assignment can be from 1 to 4 depending on the number of flow

meters defined in the installation. ZERO disables the component, thus making it unavailable for

loading. (This parameter defines the relation between components (products) and flow meters.)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 49

Parameter:

068 Mass Adjustment 0.000000

This parameter sets the component’s “mass computation adjustment factor”, i.e. 1, where:

Mass = Net volume x (Density - Buoyancy) x 1.

Zero disables mass computation. A non-zero value causes the “standard Quantity”, i.e. the meter

component, batch and running totalizer standard quantities, to be computed as mass (using the

formula above) rather than net volume. Buoyancy is configured via program code 426. Refer to

Section 6 for further discussion and examples.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 50 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Delivery parameters 078 Maximum preset qty 3000 079 Minimum preset qty 50 080 Preset/delivery type Gross 081 Delivery display type Gross082 Stop key action Low flow083 Fall back qty 1000

The display example above shows global parameters related to the delivery method used to deliver

all defined components. The default delivery parameters should be verified or changed as required

to match the requirements of the installation.

Parameter:

078 Maximum preset qty 3000

Is set to the default value 3000. The entry sets the upper limit, in quantity units, for any batch

delivery, that can be entered by the user / operator during a loading operation setup. This

number is in quantity units. The value is typically set to the quantity of the largest compartment

to be loaded in any authorized tanker vehicle. This number is the typical upper quantity limit for

any delivery operation. Operating procedures may require loading of a quantity in excess of this

number by loading more than one batch to one compartment.

Parameter:

079 Minimum preset qty 50

Is set to the default value 50. The entry defines the lower limit, in quantity units, for any batch

delivery, that can be entered by the user / operator during a loading operation setup. This number

is in quantity units. The value is normally set to the expected minimum quantity to deliver. This

quantity is referred to as the flushing quantity at some installations.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 51

Parameter:

080 Preset/delivery type Gross

Is set to the default selection Gross. This selection indicates that the gross quantity calculation is

used for delivery control. The flow control valve always controls ramp up to high flow rate based

on gross delivered quantity. The flow control valve controls ramp down to the low flow rate and

terminates delivery based on the quantity type selection in this field. Optionally this parameter can

be set to standard quantity.

Parameter:

081 Delivery display type Gross

Is set to the default selection Gross. This selection indicates that the Loaded, Remaining, and

Transaction values are displayed in gross quantity. Optionally this parameter can be set to

standard quantity.

Parameter:

082 Stop key action Low flow

Is set to the default selection Low flow. This selection indicates the action to take after the STOP

key is pressed during a batch delivery. The flow rate is reduced until the low flow rate is achieved

and then the load is terminated by commanding the flow control valve to close.

Parameter:

083 Fall back qty 1000

Is set to the default value 1000. This value is the quantity that flows at a fall back flow rate before

the DanLoad 6000 attempts to ramp up to the next higher flow rate.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 52 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Comp 1 delivery parameters084 Low flow start qty 50085 Low flow restart qty 20086 Low flow stop qty 50087 Line pack delay (secs) 2088 Pump stop delay (secs) 30089 Block valve delay (secs) 0

The display example above shows parameters related to the delivery method used to deliver the

component number 1 only. These default delivery parameters should be verified or changed as

required depending on the design of the installation.

Parameter:

084 Low flow start qty 50

Is set to the default value 50. This value indicates the quantity units that must be loaded at the low

flow rate before issuing the high flow command to the flow control valve.

Parameter:

085 Low flow restart qty 20


flow rate before issuing the high flow command to the flow control valve. If the quantity specified

by PC 084 Low flow start qty has been delivered, this quantity is used after restart of a batch

delivery that has been temporarily suspended for any reason.

Parameter:

086 Low flow stop qty 50


flow rate before issuing the close command to the flow control valve at the end of a batch delivery

operation.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 53

Parameter:

087 Line pack delay (secs) 2

Is set to the default value 2. This value indicates that the pump run relay output is energized two

seconds before the command is issued to open the flow control valve to low flow rate setting.

Parameter:

088 Pump stop delay (secs) 30

Is set to the default value 30. This value indicates that the command to close the flow control

valve is issued and 30 seconds later the pump run relay output is de-energized.

Parameter:

089 Block valve delay (secs) 0

Is set to the default value 0. This value indicates that the control output to open the component

block valve is issued and 0 seconds later (immediately) the command to open the flow control

valve to low flow rate is issued. The block valve control output is opened (block valve closed)

at the termination of the batch delivery.

If the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a multi-component blender, additional components are

defined at this time.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 54 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Delivery parameters (cont'd)108 Ramp clicks 30109 Maintenance clicks 30110 Additive pump stop (secs) 10111 Primary component 1

The display example above shows global parameters related to the method used to adjust flow

control valves, additive pump control, and blending.

Parameter:

108 Ramp clicks 30

Is set to the default value 30. This value is the number of times that the DanLoad 6000 attempts

to increase the flow rate to the next higher flow rate without success, before ceasing attempts and

maintaining the fall back flow rate. Click refers to the jog output to the valve control solenoids.

Parameter:

109 Maintenance clicks 30

Is set to the default value 30. This value is the number of times that the DanLoad 6000 attempts

to maintain the current normal flow rate without success, before ceasing attempts and falling back

to the next lower flow rate. Click refers to the jog output to the valve control solenoids.

Parameter:

110 Additive pump stop (sec) 10

Is set to the default value 10. This value is the number of seconds between the end of the load

operation and deenergizing the additive pump control circuits.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 55

Parameter:

111 Primary component 1

Is set to the default value 1. This value sets the number of the component to use for calculation

of blend ratios and for line flushing.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 56 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Meter factors169 Number of factors/component 2170 Meter factor method Fixed

The display example above shows global parameters related to the method used to handle meter

factors for all components / flow meters.

Parameter:

169 Number of factors/component 2

Is set to the default value 2. This value indicates that two meter factors for each component at two

different flow rates (low flow start/stop and high flow) will be defined. Up to four flow rates

for each component can be defined.

Parameter:

170 Meter factor method Fixed

Is set to the default selection Fixed. This selection indicates that the exact meter factors are used

and no mathematical interpolation of the meter factor values between associated flow rate points

will be performed.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 57

Component 1 factors171 Nominal K-factor 23.0172 Master meter factor 1.0000

The display example above shows parameters related to component number 1 only. The DanLoad

6000 maintains the fixed relationship between each defined component and each flow meter so that

high flow measurement accuracy can be maintained when multiple components are delivered

through one flow meter.

Note

The values of PC [171, 182, 193, 204] Nominal K-factor parameters have great affect on

control of the quantity of product delivered and course measurement accuracy. These parameter

values must be set properly before any loading operation is performed.

Parameter:

171 Nominal K-factor 23.0

Is set to the default value 23.0. This value indicates the K-factor (system factor) for the flow

meter. [NOTE: The initial K-factor should be the pulses per unit of product obtained from the

flow meter identification plate or from the manufacturer. This number should be mathematically

rounded to one decimal place (nn.n)].

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 58 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Parameter:

172 Master meter factor 1.0000

Is set to the default value 1.0000. This value is the base meter factor value used for comparison

with all system meter factor entries. PC ccc Comp p meter factor f meter factors are compared

to the PC ccc Master meter factor for the component and are considered invalid if they deviate

more than +/- the percentage value of PC 215 Master MF %. In this example, assuming that PC

215 Master MF % is the default value of 2.00, acceptable meter factors must be within the range

of 0.9800 to 1.0200 (NOTE: The master meter factor is calculated by the 171 Nominal K-factor

divided by the actual K-factor and mathematically rounded to four decimal places.)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 59

Component 1 factor 1174 Flow rate 1 200175 Meter factor 1 1.0000

The display example above shows parameters related to PC ccc Component number 1 and PC ccc

Meter factor 1 (low flow rate) only.

Parameter:

174 Flow rate 1 200

Is set to the default value 200. This value is the low flow rate (start/stop rate) in quantity units

per minute (such as gallons per minute). The engineering units are dependent on the value of PC

ccc Nominal K-factor which determines the quantity unit accumulation units and flow rate units

for the flow meter.

Example: If quantity units are gallons, engineering units for this parameter are gallons per

minute.

Parameter:

175 Meter factor 1 1.0000

Is set to the default value 1.0000. This value is the nominal meter factor that is used when

component 1 is flowing at the low flow rate defined by PC 174 Comp 1 flow rate 1. (NOTE:

The meter factor is calculated by the PC ccc 171 Nominal K-factor divided by the actual K-factor

and mathematically rounded to four decimal places.)

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 60 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Component 1 factor 2176 Flow rate 2 600177 Meter factor 2 1.0000

The display example above shows parameters related to component number 1 and meter factor 2

(high (loading) flow rate) only.

Parameter:

176 Flow rate 2 500

Is set to the default value 500. This value is the high flow rate in quantity units per minute (such

as gallons per minute). The engineering units are dependent on the value of PC ccc Nominal K-

factor which determines the quantity unit accumulation units and flow rate units for the flow

meter. Example: If quantity units are gallons, engineering units for this parameter are gallons

per minute.

Parameter:

177 Meter factor 2 1.0000

Is set to the default value 1.0000. This value is the nominal meter factor that is used when

component 1 is flowing at the high flow rate defined by PC 176 Comp 1 flow rate 2. (NOTE:

The initial meter factor should be 1.0000 until an actual meter factor can be determined from a

meter proof. The initial meter factor is calculated by PC ccc 171 Nominal K-factor divided by

the actual K-factor and mathematically rounded to four decimal places.)

A third and fourth flow rate for component 1 can be defined at this time if desired. If the

DanLoad 6000 is configured as a multi-component blender, additional flow rates / meter factors

are defined at this time.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 61

MF validation215 Master MF % 2.00216 Adjacent MF % 0.25

The display example above shows global parameters that set the limits for validation of manually

entered meter factors.

Parameter:

215 Master MF % 2.00

Is set to the default value 2.00. This value is the setpoint for verification of individual component

meter factors with respect to the Master meter factor for the component. Program codes for

master meter factors and components are indicated in the table below.

Components 6 1 2 3 4

Master Meter Factors 6 172 183 194 205

Comp p meter factor 1 175 186 197 208




DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 62 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Parameter:

216 Adjacent MF % 0.25

Is set to the default value 0.25. This value is the setpoint for verification of individual component

meter factors with respect to adjacent meter factors for the component. Program codes for master

meter factors and adjacent meter factors are indicated in the table below.

Components

1 2 3 4

Master Meter Factors 6 172 183 194 205

Adjacent Meter Factors 9

Comp p meter factor 1 9

175 186 197 208

8Comp p meter factor 2 9

177 188 199 210

8Comp p meter factor 3 9

179 190 201 212

8Comp p meter factor 4 181 192 203 214

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 63

Alarm parameters220 Secondary alarm reset (secs) 300

The display example above shows a global parameter that sets the storage time for secondary

alarm conditions.

Parameter:

220 Secondary alarm reset (secs) 300

Is set to the default value 300. This value indicates that active alarms designated as Secondary

alarms will be automatically cleared (reset) after 300 seconds has elapsed.

The time limit allows time for the operator to correct a condition that causes a secondary alarm

to occur during loading. The secondary alarm condition terminated the batch delivery. However,

if the cause of the secondary alarm is cleared within the time specified by PC 220 Secondary

alarm reset (secs), the product delivery can be restarted. If the cause of the alarm is not cleared

within the time specified by PC 220 Secondary alarm reset (secs), the batch delivery is ended

and a new batch must be defined before delivery can resume.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 64 _______________________________________________________ Setup

The response to each alarm is controlled by the setting of the Alarm Action corresponding to that

alarm. The four possible alarm actions are described below. The alarm actions for several

alarms are limited to less than four selections. The Alarm action for several alarms is pre-

determined and cannot be changed.

Alarm Action Description Reset

Primary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is

shut and the delivery is suspended. Delivery cannot

resume until the alarm is cleared.

RED (lower) LED on operator panel is steady ON

Alarm discrete output, PC 287 Alarm control output

is maintained closed (if defined).

Alarm data is stored in Alarm Storage Memory.

Keypad in Program Mode.

Alarm reset discrete input, PC 344

Primary alarm reset (if defined).

Terminal automation system.

Secondary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is

shut and the delivery is suspended. Delivery cannot

resume until the alarm is cleared or the Secondary

alarm reset time has elapsed.

RED (lower) LED on operator panel is pulsed ON

/ OFF

Alarm discrete output, PC 287 Alarm control output

is pulsed (if defined).


Correct cause of alarm

Automatically reset after time value

in PC 220 Secondary alarm reset

(secs) has elapsed.

Info An event message is displayed on the message line

of the display panel for ten seconds.


<not applicable>

Off Disable monitoring of this alarm. <not applicable>

Alarm Action Summary

Figure 3 - 14

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 65

Alarm parameters (cont'd)221 Low flow alarm action Primary222 Minimum flow rate 100223 Low flow time (secs) 10224 High flow alarm action Primary225 Maximum flow rate 660226 High flow time (secs) 10

The display example above shows parameters which define the global method of processing low

and high flow rate conditions for any defined flow meter.

Parameter:

221 Low flow alarm action Primary

Is set to the default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the Low flow alarm becomes

active, the current delivery operation will be suspended.

Parameter:

222 Minimum flow rate 100

Is set to the default value 100. This value is the minimum flow rate (quantity units per time unit)

allowed for the time period indicated by PC 223 Low flow time (secs).

Parameter:

223 Low flow time (secs) 10

Is set to the default value 10. This value is the elapsed time allowed for the flow rate to be

continuously below the minimum flow rate specified by PC 222 Minimum flow rate before the

alarm is triggered.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 66 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Parameter:

224 High flow alarm action Primary

Is set to the default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the High flow alarm becomes


Parameter:

225 Maximum flow rate 660

Is set to the default value 660. This value is the maximum flow rate (quantity units per time unit)

allowed for the time period indicated by PC 226 High flow time (secs). This flow rate setting

should be set above and close to the normally expected high flow rate. This setting allows rapid

detection of a loss of control of the flow control valve condition.

Parameter:

226 High flow time (secs) 10

Is set to the default value 10. This value is the elapsed time allowed for the flow rate to be

continuously below the minimum flow rate specified by PC 225 Maximum flow rate before the

alarm is triggered.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 67

Alarm parameters (cont'd)227 Overrun limit qty 2.0228 Underflow alarm action Off229 Underflow limit qty 5.0230 No flow t-o alarm action Primary231 No flow t-o (secs) 5232 Unauthorized flow limit qty 10.0

The display example above shows parameters which define the method of processing several flow

related error conditions.

Parameter:

227 Overrun limit qty 2.0

Is set to the default value 2.0. This value is the quantity units allowed to be delivered which

exceed the preset quantity. The alarm can only occur after the DanLoad 6000 has attempted to

stop the delivery in the normal manner. The alarm priority selection is permanently set to

Primary. If the Overrun limit qty alarm becomes active, the delivery operation in progress will

be suspended. (NOTE: It may be necessary to temporarily set this value to a significantly larger

value while the first several batches are delivered at a new installation. This is required so that

the DanLoad 6000 can calculate the final trip or closing quantity delivered. The DanLoad 6000

does not calculate the final trip quantity if the delivery is terminated by an alarm action.)

WARNING

Use several small batch deliveries to load a vessel after initial setup. This procedure permits

verification of proper flow control valve operation and prevents overfilling the vessel.

Parameter:

228 Underflow alarm action Off

Is set to the default selection Off. This selection indicates the action taken if the delivered quantity

is less than the value of PC 229 Underflow limit qty. The Off selection disables the underflow

alarm.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 68 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Parameter:

229 Underflow limit qty 5.0

Is set to the default value 5.0. This value is the number of quantity units allowed for the delivered

quantity to be less than the preset quantity at the end of a batch delivery operation.

Parameter:

230 No flow t-o alarm action Primary

Is set to the default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the No flow alarm becomes


Parameter:

231 No flow t-o (secs) 5.0

Is set to the default value 5.0. This value is elapsed time allowed for not receiving any pulses

from the flow meter when the system is in a component flowing configuration.

Example: The pump is running, the block valve is OPEN, and the flow control valve is

OPEN and no pulses are detected.

Parameter:

232 Unauthorized flow qty 10.0

Is set to the default value 10.0. This value is the quantity units allowed accumulated due to flow

through a flow meter when a batch delivery is not active. The priority selection is permanently

set to Primary. The unauthorized flow condition exits when product is passing through the flow

meter and the flow control valve is commanded to the CLOSE position. If the Unauthorized flow

quantity alarm becomes active, an attempt will be made to shut-in the flow meter stream. Note

the meter stream should be shut-in if a delivery operation is not in progress. This alarm could

indicate a loss of control of the component flow control valve or block valve or both valves.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 69

Alarm parameters (cont'd)233 Error limit (pulses) 0234 Reset count (pulses) 10000235 Data logging alarm action Info236 Comms fail alarm action Primary237 Comms fail t-o (secs) 10

The display example above shows parameters related to the method of processing pulse security

error conditions. These parameters are only applicable in installations that used IP-252 pulse

security methods and only during batch deliveries.

Note

Pulse security implementation is hardware and software dependent. The value of PC 233 Error

limit (levels B and C) must be set to 0, to prevent triggering this alarm, if the physical flow

meter installation does not provide the required dual pulse train to the DanLoad 6000.

Parameter:

233 Error limit (pulses) 0

Is set to the default value 0. This value is the error count at which a pulse security alarm occurs.

Pulse security checks are performed only when a load is in progress. This is an 8-bit hardware

down counter, which can be set at any time by software and generates an interrupt when it reaches

zero, i.e. error limit exceeded. Zero disables pulse security.

Parameter:

234 Reset count (pulses) 10000

This parameter is used for pulse security level “B” and is set to the default value 10000. This

value is used to reset the accumulated pulse comparison error count from dual pulse train

comparison to zero after 10000 errors have been accumulated during the current delivery

operation.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 70 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Example: If PC 233 Error limit (pulses) is set to 10 and PC 234 Reset count (pulses) is set to

1000, the DanLoad 6000 allows no more than 10 pulses errors for each

accumulated 1000 input pulses.

Parameter:

235 Data logging alarm action Info

This selection is used to specify the action taken when a data logging alarm (overwriting an alarm

message in the alarm message storage memory) occurs.

Parameter:

236 Comms fail alarm action Primary

This selection is used to specify the action taken when a communications failure with a terminal

automation system or host computer occurs. A communications fault can occur during a batch

delivery or during idle time. This alarm will halt a delivery in progress. In all cases, the alarm

must be specifically reset before the DanLoad 6000 can resume operation.

Parameter:

237 Comms fail t-o (secs) 10

This value specifies the allowable time between receiving messages from the terminal automation

system before issuing a Comms fail alarm.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 71

Alarm parameters (cont'd)238 Temp fail alarm action Primary239 Minimum temperature -40.0240 Maximum temperature 110.0241 Density fail alarm action Primary242 Minimum density/gravity 0.0000243 Maximum density/gravity 0.0000

The display example above shows parameters related to the method of RTD temperature input

signal and density input signal error conditions.

Parameter:

238 Temp fail alarm action Primary

Is set to the default selection Primary. This selection indicates that the current delivery operation

will be suspended if the process temperature input is less than the value of PC 239 Minimum

temperature or greater than the value of PC 240 Maximum temperature. A Primary alarm must

be manually reset or specifically reset from a terminal automation system. The Primary setting

detects temperature input failures. The backup temperature specified by PC [434, 437, 440,

443] Comp p backup temp is not used in the Primary mode.

Parameter:

239 Minimum temperature -40.0

Is set to the default value -40.0. This value is lower limit allowed for a process temperature input

before a Temp fail alarm is issued.

Parameter:

240 Maximum temperature 110.0

Is set to the default value 110.0. This value is upper limit allowed for a process temperature input

before a Temp fail alarm is issued.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 72 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Parameter:

241 Density fail alarm action Primary

Is set to the default selection Primary. This selection indicates that the current delivery operation

will be suspended if the process density/gravity input is less than the value of PC 242 Minimum

density/gravity or greater than the value of PC 243 Maximum density/gravity. A Primary alarm

must be manually reset or specifically reset from a terminal automation system. The Primary

setting detects density/gravity input failures. The backup density/gravity specified by PC [457,

459, 461, 463] Comp p backup density/gravity is not used in the Primary mode.

Parameter:

242 Minimum density/gravity 0.0000

This value is lower limit allowed for a process density input before a Density fail alarm is

triggered.

Parameter:

243 Maximum density/gravity 0.0000

This value is upper limit allowed for a process density input before a Density fail alarm is

triggered.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 73

Alarm parameters (cont'd)244 Minimum pressure 0.0245 Maximum pressure 0.00246 Additive error limit 3247 Feedback time 10248 Block valve time (secs) 10

The display example above shows parameters related to the method of processing the indicated

error conditions.

Parameter:

244 Minimum pressure 0.0

This value is the low pressure setpoint used for validation of pressure input signals.

Parameter:

245 Maximum pressure 0.00

This value is the high pressure setpoint used for validation of pressure input signals.

Parameter:

246 Additive error limit 3

This value sets the error count limit for triggering an Additive error limit alarm.

Parameter:

247 Feedback time 10

This value sets the time in seconds that an additive injection feedback signal can be energized

before and Additive error limit alarm is triggered.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 74 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Parameter:

248 Block valve time (secs) 10

This value sets the time allowed for a component block valve to close after the block valve control

output has been deenergized at the end of a loading operation or when a loading operation is

temporarily stopped.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 75

Alarm parameters (cont'd)249 Circuit 1 alarm action Secondary250 #1 Ground detector open251 Circuit 2 alarm action Primary252 #2 Overspill detector open


error conditions.

Parameter:

249 Circuit 1 alarm action Secondary

This selection specifies the action to be taken if safety circuit 1 is open.

Parameter:

250 #1 Ground detector open

This selection is the message that is indicated when safety circuit 1 is open.

Parameter:

251 Circuit 2 alarm action Primary


Parameter:

252 #2 Overspill detector open


DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 76 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Alarm parameters (cont'd)253 Circuit 3 alarm action Secondary254 #3 Permissive power failure255 Circuit 4 alarm action Secondary256 #4 Additive injection failure


error conditions.

Parameter:



Parameter:

254 #3 Permissive power failure


Parameter:



Parameter:

256 #4 Additive injection failure


_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 77

Alarm parameters (cont'd)257 Circuit 5 alarm action Secondary258 #5 Arm down side 1259 Circuit 6 alarm action Secondary260 #6 Arm down side 2


error conditions.

Parameter:



Parameter:

258 #1 Arm down side 1


Parameter:



Parameter:

260 #2 Arm down side 2


DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 78 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Alarm parameters (cont'd)261 Circuit 7 alarm action Secondary262 #7 Walkway down side 1263 Circuit 8 alarm action Secondary264 #8 Walkway down side 2


error conditions.

Parameter:



Parameter:

262 #7 Walkway down side 1


Parameter:



Parameter:

264 #8 Walkway down side 2


_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 79

Alarm parameters (cont'd)265 Circuit 5 type 1266 Circuit 6 type 2267 Circuit 7 type 1268 Circuit 8 type 2


error conditions.

Parameter:

265 Circuit 5 type 1

This selection limits checking for an open safety circuit 5.

Parameter:



Parameter:



Parameter:



DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 80 _______________________________________________________ Setup

The following table indicates the scope of the values of PC's 265 to 268.

PC 265 to 268 Circuit x type

Type Description

0 Check Safety circuit x while a batch load is in progress

1 Check Safety circuit x while a batch load is in progress ONLY at side 1

2 Check Safety circuit x while a batch load is in progress ONLy at side 2

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 81

Recipes480 Number of recipes 1

Recipe 1481 Name Recipe #1482 Component 1 % 100.00483 Component 2 % 0.00484 Component 3 % 0.00485 Component 4 % 0.00486 Sequence to load 10=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3=0 4=#,5="

The display examples above show parameters related to the method defining recipes that control

the delivery of components in blending operations. Validation of recipe component percentages

is performed when a recipe is selected and when a preset quantity is entered. Component

percentages are validated as follows.

# Sequential blending

The sum of the percentages referenced by PC ccc Sequence to load PC must equal 100.

Example: Sequential Blending(065 Number of components = 3)

Program Code Valid Invalid

481 Name

482 Component 1 % 70 70

483 Component 2 % 20 30

484 Component 3 % 10 0


486 Sequence to Load 312 32

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 82 _______________________________________________________ Setup

# In-line blending

The sum of the percentages of 1 through PC 065 Number of components must equal 100.

Example: In-line Blending(065 Number of components = 3)

Program Code Valid Invalid

481 Name

482 Component 1 % 70 70

483 Component 2 % 20 20



486 Sequence to Load

Parameter:

480 Number of recipes 1

Is set to the default value 1. This value causes one set of recipe definition parameters to be

available for configuration.

Parameter:

481 Name Recipe #1

Is set to the default string Recipe #1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on the

message line to allow the user to change this string to any sixteen characters. The name of the

currently selected recipe is shown in the upper left area of the display while operating in the

Loading Mode.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 83

Parameter:

482 Component 1 % 100

Is set to the default value 100. This value sets the recipe to define a single component

(component #1) for delivery. This value was set automatically because of the initial selection of

No blending (one flow meter, one flow control valve, and one component)

Parameter:

483 Component 2 % 0

Is set to the default value 0. This value indicates that this component is not used.

Parameter:

484 Component 3 % 0


Parameter:

485 Component 4 % 0


Parameter:

486 Sequence to load 1

Is set to the default value 1. This value indicates only one component is delivered when this recipe

is selected. If more than one component is defined, the other components can be specified in the

sequence to load by indicating the component number at the desired sequence place in this

parameter.

Example: PC ccc Sequence to load set to 142 indicates that during sequential loading,

component 1 is loaded first, component 4 is loaded second, component 2 is loaded third,

then the complete batch load is terminated.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 84 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Setup complete

Press ALT+CLEAR to exit

The display example above shows that the initial setup procedure is finished. Press the EXIT

(ALT+CLEAR) key to continue. The permissive power indicator (green LED) and the display

panel will be OFF for a few seconds. The DanLoad 6000 is now in the Loading Mode.

Additional parameters, such as those controlling additive injection, that were not covered in the

initial setup procedure should be reviewed and modified if required at this time.

Assuming that only one recipe was defined, the loading display indicated below is displayed.

Loaded 0 Gal 0%

+))),* *

Preset 0 Recipe * *Remaining 0 Recipe * *Enter preset qty .)))-

The Loading Display example above is the normal display for the English language that is

presented to the user / operator during normal operation. The user / operator is able to define the

delivery quantity and monitor the delivery operation via this display and the keypad. Batch

delivery operations are described in Section 4 - Operation.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 85

If “Thai” has been selected via PC 028 Language, the loading display indicated below is

displayed.

3.5.2 Flow Measurement and General Parameters

The table below indicates the input and output signal assignment parameters related to associated

parameters in the DanLoad 6000.

DanLoad 6000 Field Signal Types

Signal Description

Flow inputs meter pulse inputs rom flow meter preamplifieror pulse transmitter

Temperature inputs 4-wire RTD (resistive temperature device)

Pressure inputs 4 to 20 mAdc pressure transmitter

Density/gravity inputs 4 to 20 mAdc density/gravity transmitter orconverter device

Discrete inputs switch or relay contact closure

Discrete outputs driver for relay or solenoid coil

Parameters related to flow measurement and general parameters are shown in the following table.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 86

Flow Measurement - General (Figure 3 - 15)

Inputs Related Program Codes Outputs

METER PULSE INPUTS

Meter 1

052 Meter pulse board input

Meter 2


Meter 3


Meter 4


218 Product units mnemonic (engineering units label for products)

050 Number of meters (number of flow meters)

051, 054, 057, 060 Meter ID (process tag)

053, 056, 059, 062 Valve to be controlled (flow control valve assignment)

128 Number of pulse per unit outputs (enable PC 313 / PC 314)

129, 132 Control meters (source of PC 313 / PC 314)

130, 133 Factor (factor for PC 313 / PC 314)

131, 134 Pulse width (ms) (pulse width for PC 313 / PC 314)

169 Number of factors/component (flow rate / meter factor sets for all flow meters)

170 Meter factor method (fixed or linear interpolation)

COMPONENT P [METER M ASSIGNMENT FROM PC 067, 070, 073, 076 METER]

171, 182, 193, 204 Nominal K-factor (nameplate K-factor to one decimal place)

172, 183, 194, 205 Master meter factor (validation factor to four decimal places)

215 Master MF % (midpoint for ccc Master meter factor validation)

174, 185, 196, 207 Comp p flow rate 1 (low flow rate setpoint)

175, 186, 197, 208 Comp p meter factor 1 (corresponding meter factor)

176, 187, 198, 209 Comp p flow rate 2 (high flow rate or fall back flow rate)

177, 188, 199, 210 Comp p meter factor 2 (corresponding meter factor)

178, 189, 200, 211 Comp p flow rate 3 (high flow rate or fall back flow rate)

179 190, 201, 212 Comp p meter factor 3 (corresponding meter factor)

180 191, 202, 213 Comp p flow rate 4 (high flow rate)

181 192, 203, 214 Comp p meter factor 4 (corresponding meter factor)

216 Adjacent MF % [MF1-2] [MF2-1 / MF2-3] [MF3-2 / MF3-4] [MF4-3]

219 Safety circuit message (default safety circuit alarm message)

221 Low flow alarm action (alarm result)

222 Minimum flow rate (low alarm setpoint for Flow rate too low meter m )

223 Low flow time (secs) (low flow allowable time limit)

224 High flow alarm action (alarm result)

225 Maximum flow rate (high alarm setpoint for Flow rate too high meter m )

226 High flow time (secs) (high flow allowable time limit)

233 Error limit (pulses) (IP 252 error count for Pulse security error meter m )

234 Reset count (pulses) (IP 252 error count reset)

313 Pulse per unit output 1


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 87

RTD INPUTS

318 Meter 1 temp input




319, 325, 331, 337 Meter m offset (Ohms) (RTD wire length resistance compensation)

353 RTD inputs (RTD input type definition)

426 Buoyancy (density adjustment for buoyancy in air)

427 Temperature units (engineering units)

430 Reference temperature (base temperature for corrections)

431 Sample qty (product quantity measured between temperature samples)

432, 435, 438, 441 Comp p temp option (calculation method)

433, 436, 439, 442 Comp p alpha (coefficient of thermal expansion for product)

434, 437, 440, 443 Comp p backup temp (default fixed temperature)

238 Temp fail alarm action (alarm result)

239 Minimum temperature (low alarm setpoint for Temperature failure meter m )

240 Maximum temperature (high alarm setpoint for Temperature failure meter m )

4 TO 20 MADC INPUTS

320 Meter 1 pres input




429 Pressure units (engineering units)

444, 447, 450, 453 Comp p pres option (calculation method)

445, 448, 451, 454 Comp p F-factor (compressibility factor for product)

446, 449, 452, 455 Comp p vapor pressure (equilibrium vapor pressure for product)

464, 468, 472, 476 Pressure @4 mA (zero scale setpoint)

465, 469, 473, 477 Pressure @20 mA (full scale setpoint

244 Minimum pressure (low alarm setpoint for Pressure failure meter m )

245 Maximum pressure (high alarm setpoint for Pressure failure meter m )

4 TO 20 MADC INPUTS

321 Meter 1 dens input




046 Density/gravity scale (number of decimal places)

428 Density units (engineering units)

456, 458, 460, 462 Density/gravity option (enable / disable)

457, 459, 461, 463 Backup density/gravity (default fixed density / gravity)

466, 470, 474, 478 Density @4 mA (zero scale setpoint)

467, 471, 475, 479 Density @20 mA (full scale setpoint)

241 Density fail alarm action (alarm result)

242 Minimum density/gravity (low alarm setpoint for Density failure component p)

243 Maximum density/gravity (high alarm setpoint for Density failure component p)

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 88

Swing arm 1

Swing arm 2

312 Side detect method (swing arm loading side permissive)

343 Auto/manual change-over 025 Operating mode (auto / manual)

344 Primary alarm reset 220 Secondary alarm reset (auto clear time for Secondary alarms) 287 Alarm control output

345 Safety circuit 1 249 Circuit 1 alarm action (alarm result)

250 #1 Ground detector open (default message)


252 #2 Overspill detector open (default message)


254 #3 Permissive power failure (default message)


256 #4 Additive injection failure (default message)


258 #5 Arm down side 1 (default message)

265 Circuit 5 type (general or loading island side)


260 #6 Arm down side 2 (default message)



262 #7 W alkway down side 1 (default message)



264 #8 W alkway down side 2 (default message)


_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 89

3.6 Product Blending

From two to four products can be blended into the loaded composite stream. The Delivery -

Blending table located at the end of this section contains an overview of all physical input and

output signals and internal control parameters that are related to product delivery / blending

equipment and procedures.

The basic configuration of the type of blending to be performed is controlled by the entry in PC

026 Unit type. The configurable blender types are described below.

3.6.1 Sequential Blending

Sequential blending is the loading of one product at one time. The blend ratio is correct only after

all components of the blend have been loaded. A DanLoad 6000 that controls loading of one

product is configured as a sequential blender, although no blending action is performed. Block

valve control for each component can be controlled either automatically or manually as described

below.

# Seq.(auto)

The DanLoad 6000 controls the opening and closing of the component block valves

automatically.

# Seq.(manual)

The DanLoad 6000 prompts the operator to open and close the component block valves at

the start and end of each batch loading.

Prompt: Open block valve - press ENTER after a batch delivery has been

configured and the START key is pressed

Prompt: Close block valve - pres ENTER after delivery of the batch and after the

flow control valve has been closed

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 90 _______________________________________________________ Setup

The response to either prompt is to press the ENTER key to execute the open or close

block valve operation.

The loading method for sequential blending is described below.

# Setup the batch loading operation and press the START key.

# Open the flow control valve to increase the flow rate of the component to the low flow rate

value and maintain the low flow rate for the specified time period.

# Open the flow control valve to increase the flow rate of the component to the high

(normal) flow rate value and maintain the flow rate during the component delivery.

# Close the flow control valve to decrease the flow rate of the component to the low flow

rate value and deliver the specified quantity at the low flow shutdown rate.

# After the low flow rate quantity has been delivered, shut the flow control valve.

# If only one component was specified in the recipe, the batch delivery is complete at this

time, if another component was specified in the recipe, this component is loaded in the

same manner as specified by the steps listed above. The sequence of component loading

is repeated for each component specified by the recipe and in the order to load specified

by the recipe.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 91

3.6.2 In-Line Blending

In-line blending is the simultaneous blending and loading of two to four products. Each product

has a dedicated flow meter and flow control valve. In-line blending can be either non-proportional

or proportional as described below.

# In-line non-proportional

In-line non-proportional blending is accomplished by delivering the lesser quantity

component(s) of the blend at the normal flow rate, which is less than the flow rate for the

highest quantity component of the blend. After the lesser quantity component(s) have

been delivered, the highest quantity component continues delivery until the blend ratio is

attained. The total blend ratio can be in error until the total preset quantity is delivered.

# In-line proportional

In-line proportional blending is accomplished by controlling the ratio between all

components at all times during the delivery by controlling the individual flow rate of each

component. The ratio of the delivered blend is correct at all times during the delivery.

Therefore, the delivery can be stopped at any time and the delivered blend will be within

tolerance.

3.6.3 Off-Rack Blending

Off-rack blending uses a separate skid with two to four flow meters, located away from the load

rack. The DanLoad 6000 delivers a single recipe (components are loaded simultaneously) to one

or more delivery points.

Parameters related to product blending are indicated in the following table.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 92

Delivery - Blending (Figure 3 - 16)


026 Unit type (blender type)

027 Valve type (flow control valve type)

048 Number of valves (number of flow control valves)

049 Initial flow time (secs) (time before flow control action begins)

115, 119, 123, 127 Open method (control during Initial flow time (secs))

065 Number of components (number of products)

066, 069, 072, 075 Component ID (product identification)

067, 070, 073, 076 Meter (flow meter assignment for product)

068, 071, 074, 077 Mass adjustment (massa adjustment factor)

078 Maximum preset qty (maximum batch size)

079 Minimum preset qty (minimum batch size)

080 Preset/delivery type (gross quantity / standard quantity)

081 Delivery display type (gross quantity / standard quantity)

082 Stop key action (result of STOP key press)

083 Fall back qty (quantity delivered at fall back flow rate)

084. 090, 096, 102 Low flow start qty (low flow delivery quantity)

085, 091, 097, 103 Low flow restart qty (low flow delivery quantity after restart)

086, 092, 098, 104 Low flow stop qty (low flow shutdown quantity)

087, 093, 099, 105 Line pack delay (pump start 6 TIME 6 open flow control valve)

088, 094, 100, 106 Pump stop delay (close flow control valve 6 TIME 6 pump stop)

108 Ramp clicks (number of attempts to increase flow rate)

109 Maintenance clicks (number of attempts to maintain flow rate)

112, 116, 120, 124 Low flow % error (allowable low flow rate deadband)

113, 117, 121, 125 High flow % error (allowable high flow rate deadband)

114, 118, 122, 126 Valve delay (secs) (flow control valve response time)

227 Overrun limit qty (alarm setpoint for Unable to close valve meter m )

228 Underflow alarm action (alarm result)

229 Underflow limit qty (alarm setpoint for Valve closed early meter m )

230 No flow t-o alarm action (alarm result)

231 No flow t-o time (secs) (alarm setpoint for Timed-out - no flow detected meter m )

232 Unauthorized flow limit qty (alarm setpoint for Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter m )

Valve 1

292 Solenoid 1 (upstream)

293 Solenoid 2 (downstream)

288 Pump control output

Valve 2




Valve 3




Valve 4




Load phase

315 Trip 1 output

316 Trip 2 output

317 Trip 3 output

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 93

Flow control valve

(continued from previous page)

BLENDING

111 Primary component (for blend ratio error detection and / or line flushing)

714 Clean line qty (quantity of 111 Primary component to load at end of delivery)

712 Rate reduction (fall back flow rate for blend deliveries)

713 Low flow start qty (blend quantity to load at low flow startup rate)

715 Low prop fac (flow rate to deliver low proportion components of a blend)

716 Correct after qty (quantity allowed to be loaded before blend ratio correction)

717 Alarm after qty (quantity allowed to be loaded before checking blend ratio alarm)

718 Adjustment qty (quantity of a blend which is subject to the blend ratio)

719 Comp % display (display blend components in gross quantity or standard quantity)

722 Blend error method (the method for calculating an error in the blend ratio)

723 Max dev % (maximum percent deviation in the blend)

724 Blend tol % (blend tolerance percentage)

725 Max dev qty (maximum blend deviation quantity)

726 Blend tol qty (blend tolerance quantity)

727 Blend sample qty (blend sample quantity)

METER M

728, 734, 740, 746 Flow adj fac (flow adjustment factor)

729, 735, 741, 747 Radio adj fac (blend ration adjustment factor)

COMPONENT P

752, 758, 764, 770 Stop rate (sum of the shutdown low flow rates for all components of a blend)

(continued from

previous page)

361 Recipe 1 input

362 Recipe 2 input

363 Recipe 3 input

364 Recipe 4 input

365 Recipe 5 input

366 Recipe 6 input

348 Safety circuit 4 (must be set to 0 to enable the recipe remote selection below)

481, 487, 493, 499, 505, 511 Recipe Name (identification)

482, 488, 494, 500, 506, 512 Component 1 percentage




486, 492, 498, 504, 510, 516 Sequence to load (blending sequence)

367 Recipe 1 output

368 Recipe 2 output

369 Recipe 3 output

370 Recipe 4 output

371 Recipe 5 output

372 Recipe 6 output

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 94

Component 1

401 Block valve input

Component 2


Component 3


Component 4


089, 095, 101, 107 Block valve delay (open block valve 6 TIME 6 open flow control valve)

248 Block valve time (secs) (time allowed to close product block valve)

Component 1

400 Block valve output

Component 2


Component 3


Component 4


Component Combinations

408 Combination 1 (1XXX)

409 Combination 2 (X2XX)

410 Combination 3 (XX3X)

411 Combination 4 (XXX4)

412 Combination 5 (12XX)

413 Combination 6 (1X3X)

414 Combination 7 (1XX4)

415 Combination 8 (X23X)

416 Combination 9 (X2X4)

417 Combination 10 (XX34)

418 Combination 11 (123X)

419 Combination 12 (12X4)

420 Combination 13 (1X34)

421 Combination 14 (X234)

422 Combination 15 (1234)

342 Off-rack start/end remote control of batch / blend start and stop

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 95

3.7 Additive Injection

From one to six additives, or no additives can be injected into the loaded stream. The primary

features of the additive injection control system are listed below.

# Each of the selected additives is injected based on the delivered batch quantity (the sum

of the components delivered). The additive injection operation is reset at the start of each

batch delivery. This method of additive injection control assures that the desired additive

ratio is maintained at all times.

# Additives can be selected individually or simultaneously by either local keypad commands,

external switches, or a terminal automation system.

# Injection of each additive can be verified by individual feedback circuits for each additive.

# The volume of each additive injected can be totalized. Totalization can be based on

injection output pulses (Ratio outputs) or positive feedback pulses (Feedback inputs).

# Discrete outputs can be configured to control an additive pump for each additive. The

configured pump output for a selected additive is energized at the start of the batch load

at the same time the component pump outputs are energized. The additive pump outputs

are deenergized at the end of a batch load at the same time the component pump outputs

are deenergized plus the time specified by PC 110 Additive pump stop (secs). PC 110

Additive pump stop (secs) delay time applies to all selected additive pumps. This feature

permits the additive pumps to remain running as consecutive batches are loaded into one

compartment.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 96 _______________________________________________________ Setup

# Discrete outputs can be configured to control an additive line block valve for each additive.

The configured additive block valve output for a selected additive is energized at the start

of the batch load at the same time the additive pump outputs and the component pump

outputs are energized. The additive block valve outputs are deenergized when the preset

quantity of the product minus the quantity of PC 138 Clean line qty has been delivered.

Additive quantity injection is calculated by the DanLoad 6000 to compensate for any

quantity specified by PC 138 Clean line qty.

Several program codes define parameters used by the additive injection process. These parameters

are described in the following tables.

PC Name Function

Common to all Additive Injection

044 Additive units Engineering units for additive totalizing in the Dynamic Data Display elements 096 to

101 Add x total and 115 to 120 Add x batch.

110 Additive pump stop (secs) Time between load stop and deenergize additive pump outputs.

135 Number of additives Total number of additive injectors controlled.

136 Selection method Method used to select additives:

# External All configured PC ccc Ratio outputs are cycled. Individual outputs can be

disabled with series switches or relays in each output circuit.

# Prompt Local operator is prompted to select each configured additive with the

Additive selection display at the start of each transaction.

# Inputs Each configured additive is selected by the corresponding PC

[382, 385, 388, 391, 394, 397] Selection input in the

CLOSED state during the batch loading.

137 Totalizing method Method used to totalize additives (see text below).

138 Clean line qty The quantity of product delivered without additive at the end of a load to prevent

additive contamination in the next load.

246 Additive error limit Limit of ccc Ratio output pulses that are not verified by PC ccc Feedback input pulses

(see text below).

247 Feedback time Maximum time that a PC ccc Feedback input can be energized before an Additive x

failure alarm is generated.

255 Circuit 4 alarm action Select the response to an Additive injection failure alarm.

256 #4 Additive injection failure The message Additive injection failure for PC 255 Circuit 4 alarm action.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 97

PC Name Function

Additive 1 (see Section 6 for corresponding PC's for Additives 2 to 6)

139 Additive control meters Select the component flow meters and either gross or standard quantities for

controlling additive injection.

140 Ratio qty The delivered quantity increment that controls PC ccc Ratio output. When fifty

percent of this quantity is delivered, PC ccc Ratio output is energized. When one-

hundred percent of this quantity is delivered, PC ccc Ratio output is deenergized.

Therefore, PC ccc Ratio output duty cycle is always 50/50 (50 % energized and 50

% deenergized).

141 Offset volume The volume to be delivered without any additive injection. This volume is delivered,

then PC ccc Ratio output is energized. From this time forward, PC ccc Ratio output

cycle is controlled by the measured delivered volume and the value of PC ccc Ratio

qty.

142 Totalizing volume The volume of additive injected when each PC ccc Ratio output is generated or each

PC ccc Feedback input is received. This volume times the value of Dynamic Data

Display elements Add x total or Add x batch determines the actual volume of additive

injected.

143 Available Allows disabling selection of this additive in the Additive Selection Display. If the

additive is not available, a batch load that specifies this additive cannot be started.

380 Ratio output A discrete output assignment used to select the control output for an additive injector

device.

381 Feedback input A discrete input assignment used to select the status input for verifying that an additive

has been injected.

382 Selection input A discrete input assignment used to select an additive for injection if PC 136 Selection

method is set to Inputs.

800 Pump output A discrete output assignment used to select the control output for an additive pump.

801 Block valve output A discrete output assignment used to select the control output for an additive line block

valve.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 98 _______________________________________________________ Setup

PC 137 Totalizing method sets the common mode for totalizing all additives. The totalizing

method is divided into the following two parts.

# Totalize additives based on output (Ratio output) or on input (Feedback input).

# Method of handling the Feedback inputs, which can be Single Pulse per Ratio Cycle or

Double Pulse per Ratio Cycle or Handshake Ratio Output and Feedback Input.

The options for PC 137 Totalizing method are described below. Pulse timing diagrams are shown

for the different feedback methods. The symbols used in these diagrams are defined below.

Symbol Description

VO Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers if PC137 Totalizing method is set to: Out, Out/Sgl, Out/Dbl, Out/Hshk

VI Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers if PC137 Totalizing method is set to: In, In/Sgl, In/Dbl, In/Hshk

R+ Increment the ratio counter. If PC 137 Totalizing method is set to: Out/Sgl, Out/Dbl, Out/Hshk, In/Sgl, In/Dbl, In/Hshk, verify that [the absolutevalue of the ratio counter minus 1 is less than or equal to the value of PC 246Additive error limit. If not true, issue an Additive x failure alarm.

R- Decrement the ratio counter. If PC 137 Totalizing method is set to: Out/Sgl, Out/Dbl, Out/Hshk, In/Sgl, In/Dbl, In/Hshk, verify that [the absolutevalue of the ratio counter less than the value of PC 246 Additive error limit. If not true, issue an Additive x failure alarm.

T0 Timer started when PC [380, 383, 386, 389, 392, 395] Ratio output isenergized. Time-out occurs and generates an Additive x failure alarm if a PC[381, 384, 387, 390, 393, 396] Feedback input is not received and thecorresponding [380, 383, 386, 389, 392, 395] Ratio output is notdeenergized.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 99

Notes:

# Add x total is Dynamic Data Display element 096 to 101. Add x batch is Dynamic DataDisplay element 115 to 120. (see PC 680 to 695 Element x data code for additionalinformation.)

# The ratio counters are internal up / down counters, one for each additive. One ratiocounter is incremented for each corresponding PC ccc Ratio output and is decremented foreach corresponding PC ccc Feedback input. This operation allows a comparison of thevalue of ratio counters to a preset limit, PC 246 Additive error limit, to determine ifproblems exist in the additive injection loops.

# 137 Totalizing method: Out

The Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch loading. The additive ratio counter

is ignored. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for each of the

ccc Ratio output cycles. ccc Feedback inputs are not monitored.

# 137 Totalizing method: In


is ignored. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for each of the

ccc Feedback input cycles. ccc Ratio outputs are not monitored.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 100 _______________________________________________________ Setup

# 137 Totalizing method: Out/Sgl or In/Sgl


set to zero at the start of the batch loading. One PC ccc Feedback input is expected after PC ccc

Ratio output is energized. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers

for each PC ccc Ratio output (Out/Sgl) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Sgl).

+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON VO* * VO* * VO* *

R+* * R+* * R+* * 7 Ratio Output * * * * * *

* * * * * *

)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF

+)), +)), +)), 7 ON VI* * VI* * VI* *

R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback Input * * * * * *

* * * * * *

))))))- .)))))))))))- .)))))))))))))- .))))))))))Q 7 OFF

Single Pulse per Ratio Cycle

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 101

# 137 Totalizing method: Out/Dbl or In/Dbl


set to zero at the start of the batch loading. One PC ccc Feedback input pulse is expected after

the PC ccc Ratio output is energized and one PC ccc Feedback input is expected after the PC ccc

Ratio output is deenergized. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers

for each PC ccc Ratio output (Out/Dbl) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Dbl).

+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON VO* * VO* * VO* *

R+* * R+* * R+* * 7 Ratio Output * * * * * *

* * * * * *

)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF

+)), +)), +)), +)), +)), +)), 7 ON VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* *

R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback * * * * * * * * * * * * Input

* * * * * * * * * * * *

))))))- .)))- .))))- .))))- .))))- .))))- .))))Q 7 OFF

Double Pulse per Ratio Cycle

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 102 _______________________________________________________ Setup

# 137 Totalizing method: Out/Hshk or In/Hshk

An Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch loading. An additive ratio counter

set to zero at the start of the batch loading. An additive injection timer is set when PC ccc Ratio

output is energized. One PC ccc Feedback input pulse is expected after the PC ccc Ratio output

is energized. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for each PC

ccc Ratio output (Out/Hshk) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Hshk).

+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON VO* * VO* * VO* *

R+* * R+* * R+* * 7 Ratio Output T0* * T0* * T0* *

* * * * * *

)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF

+))))), +)))))), +)))))), 7 ON VI* * VI* * VI* *

R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback * * * * * * Input

* * * * * *

)))))))- .))))))))- .))))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF

Handshake Ratio Output and Feedback Input

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 103

3.8 Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter

When the mass of product is required (for display, data logging or delivery control) there are two

options; 1) use a mass meter, e.g. a Coriolis effect flow meter, which reports "pulses per unit

mass" to the DanLoad 6000, or 2) use a volumetric flow meter, e.g. a turbine meter, which

reports "pulses per unit gross volume" to the DanLoad 6000 and have the DanLoad 6000 compute

the mass from the gross volume. Both options are possible with the DanLoad 6000. This section

describes the second option.

In order to have the DanLoad 6000 compute product mass, the DanLoad 6000 should first be

configured to compute the standard quantity in the usual way, i.e. specify temperature units,

temperature correction option per component, pressure correction option per component,

temperature input (RTD) per meter or backup temperature per component, density input (4-20

mA) per meter or backup density per component, etc. The temperature and pressure correction

options are likely to dictate the density units used by the DanLoad 6000. If a "live" density input

is used, the input density should be corrected to standard conditions external to the DanLoad

6000.

Mass computation is enabled by entering a mass computation adjustment factor per component,

which causes the standard volume to be recomputed as mass, i.e. for "standard quantity" read

"mass". Thus, batch mass, meter mass totalizers, component mass totalizers, etc. can be

displayed in the dynamic data display, printed on data logs and requested by an automation

system. The meter standard quantities to 2 decimal places (data codes 147, etc.) are not

recomputed as mass, and still show the standard volume even when mass computation is enabled.

This allows meters to be proved volumetrically, if required. If meters are proved by mass, i.e.

by comparison with a weighscale, the following should be considered:

- The weighscale' s resolution/accuracy will contribute to overall inaccuracy.

- The meter factor adjustment is still applied to the gross volume measured by

the DanLoad 6000.

- Flow rates on the DanLoad 6000 are in gross volume units per minute.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 104 _______________________________________________________ Setup

The mass computation adjustment factor provides the flexibility to compute mass in almost any

units (pounds, kilograms, etc.) from volume and density in almost any units. However, it should

be noted that the DanLoad 6000 displays mass only in (rounded to nearest) whole units, e.g. ± 0.5

tons if the mass computation adjustment factor computes tons. See program code 68 for more

information and examples. An adjustment for buoyancy in air can be included in the mass

computation. See program code 426 for more information.

It is also possible to preset by mass, e.g. to preset and load a batch of 10,000 kilograms, by

enabling mass computation (as described above) and then setting the preset/delivery type to "Std"

(standard quantity). See program code 80 for more information.

Care should be exercised when enabling mass computation and, more importantly, when

presetting by mass since the number of mass units can be very different from the number of

volume units. Small batches should be loaded in order to verify the configuration.

Mass Loading Example:

Application: It is desired to preset and deliver an amount in units of mass using a gross volume

meter, e.g. a liquid turbine meter or a PD meter.

In this particular example the unit of mass to be delivered is in Kilograms by measuring a gross

volume in Liters, at a average batch temperature of 28.5 °C, of a product with density .7560

grams/cm using "China" temperature correction table.3

The DanLoad 6000 is configured as follows:

"PC 080 Preset/delivery type" Std

"PC 081 Delivery display type" Std

"PC 046 Density/ gravity scale" 4

"PC 457 Backup/density gravity" 0.7560

"PC 426 Buoyancy (PC 426) 0.0011

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 105

"PC 430 Reference temperature" 20

"PC 432 Temperature option" China

"PC 068 Mass adjustment" 1.000000

"PC 218 Product units mnemonic" Kg

"PC 680 Element 1 data code" 103



Note: Mass adjustment is used as a multiplier to convert gross volume to mass and takes into

account density units (grams/cm ), K factor units (pulses/liters) and desired mass units3

(Kilograms).

The DanLoad 6000, when configured as above displays the mass loaded in Kilograms in large

numbers next to the word Loaded. The SELECT key may be pressed in the loading screen to

invoke the dynamic data display which displays "Mtr1 grs batch" and "Mtr 1 std batch".

When the DanLoad 6000 is configured as described, and a quantity of 748 Kg is preset, the

DanLoad 6000 delivers 748 Kg. The DanLoad displays the meter 1 grs batch quantity loaded

as 1000 (which is in liters), and the meter 1 std batch quantity loaded as 748 (which is in

Kilograms).

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 106 _______________________________________________________ Setup

3.9 Setup Checklist

This sub-section, the following sub-sections, and Appendix B should be reviewed after the initial

setup procedure is completed. A check list is provided that contains a brief description of all

parameters groups and their relation to various operational configurations. Section 6 - Program

Code Definitions contains additional information on all program codes and options.

Access to Program Mode from Loading Mode: press the PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER) key,

enter the passcode, the factory default passcode is 6000, press the ENTER key. The Program

Mode Menu is now displayed. The first selection, indicated by the box cursor, is Setup. Press

the ENTER key to access the Setup Menu. The Setup Menu contains twenty-one parameter group

selections divided into four display pages. Each of these parameter groups is listed below. The

applicable parameters in each group should be verified before the DanLoad 6000 is placed into

service.

# Security Parameters Control access to DanLoad 6000 setup and operation.

# Unit Parameters General global parameters.

# Valve Parameters Assign flow control valves.

# Meter Parameters Assign flow meter to flow control valve.

# Component Parameters Assign component to flow meter.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 107

# Delivery Parameters Define batch loading control parameters.

Define the pump / block valve / flow control valve timing relationship. The parameters indicated

below set the timing for each component.

open start open close stop BV PUMP FCV FCV BV PUMP * * * * * *))))3))))))))3))))))))))))))))))3))))))))))))))3)2))))))))3))))

* *7----- LPD -----6 * *7-- PSD-6 *

*7--------- BVD ----------6*

where:

BV - block valve

FCV - flow control valve

LPD - ccc Line pack delay (secs)

BVD - ccc Block valve delay (secs)

PSD - ccc Pump stop delay (secs)

Startup:

The line pack delay and block valve delay are relative to the opening of the flow control valve at

the start of a loading operation. The diagram indicates the line pack delay time is shorter than

block valve delay time. Both of these delays are independent and only related to the opening of

the flow control valve. Therefore, the delays may be set to open the block valve and start the

pump simultaneously or to start the pump before opening the block valve. If 0 seconds delay is

entered for the line pack delay and the block valve delay, the pump starts, the block valve opens,

and the flow control valve opens simultaneously. The logic does not allow configuration for

starting the pump or opening the block valve after the flow control valve is commanded OPEN.

PC ccc Valve delay (secs) parameter in the Digital Valve Parameters group sets a time period that

is added to the computed time to open or close the flow control valve.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 108 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Shutdown:

The flow control valve is shut to stop the flow. The block valve is automatically closed when no

flow is detected. For a normally terminated delivery, the pump stop delay is from the time that

no flow is detected until the pump output is de-energized.

PC ccc Block valve delay (secs) in the Alarms group sets the time period to allow after sending

a block valve CLOSE command (discrete output OPEN) before activating an Unable to close

block valve # alarm, if the block valve fails to respond to the CLOSE command.

# Digital Valve Parameters Define operation of flow control valves.

This group of parameters define the characteristics for operation of digital flow control valves

(throttling valves) only. Fixed setpoint stem switch valves do not use these parameters.

However, two-stage valves with one or two stem switches do use the Solenoid 1 and Solenoid 2

control outputs to control the valve actuator. The control logic for digital flow control valves is

shown in Figure 3 - 10. And the control and status logic for two-stage valves with stem switches

is shown in Figure 3 - 11.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 109

Digital Flow Control Valve Operation

Device

Valve State

Closed Opening Static Open Closing

Solenoid 1 (upstream)control output

open closed closed open

Upstream pilot valve open closed closed open

Solenoid 2 (downstream)control output

open closed open open

Downstream pilot valve closed open closed closed

Digital Flow Control Valve

Figure 3 - 17

The incremental open / close state of a digital flow control valve, such as a Daniel model 1815

or Dan-Flo valve, is controlled by two variable duration pulsed control outputs (Solenoid 1 and

Solenoid 2). A digital flow control valve has a sealed variable capacity chamber downstream of

the movable plug. The upstream surface area and cavity surface area of the plug plus pressure

exerted by a closing spring, closes the plug against the seat and stops all flow through the valve

when the upstream process liquid is allowed to enter the cavity (through normally open Solenoid

1). This is the normal state of the valve with neither solenoid powered.

The valve is opened to the low flow setpoint by closing the upstream (cavity fill) pilot and

opening the downstream (cavity drain) pilot. The DanLoad 6000 senses the flow rate from the

meter pulse input and stops the valve from opening when the desired flow rate is attained. The

valve open / close action is stopped at any position by closing the downstream (cavity drain) pilot

and closing the upstream (cavity fill) pilot. Flow rate through the flow meter is adjusted

dynamically. The valve is closed by closing the downstream (cavity drain) pilot and opening the

upstream (cavity fill) pilot.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 110 _______________________________________________________ Setup

WARNING

The Daniel model 1815 flow control valve has an needle valve located in the upstream pilot

circuit that can be used to restrict the flow in this circuit and slow the valve opening speed. A

corresponding needle valve located in the downstream pilot circuit can be used to restrict flow

in that circuit and slow the valve closing speed. These two needle valves are normally set fully

open so that the DanLoad 6000 has maximum possible control of the valve. These needle valves

should only be adjusted by persons familiar with the operation of these valves. Use caution

when delivering a product after one or both of these needle valves have been adjusted. Mis-

adjustment of the needle valves can cause tank overfill and spillage or under delivery.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 111

Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (without Stem-Switches) Operation

Device

Valve State

Closed

Opening to

Low Flow Start &

Low Flow Start

Opening to Full

Open & Full Open

Closing to

Low Flow Stop &

Low Flow Stop Closed

Solenoid 1

control output

open close close close open

Solenoid 2

control output

open open close open open

Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (without Stem-Switches)

Figure 3 - 18

The Solenoid 1 and Solenoid 2 control outputs are used to control the open / close position of a

flow control valve without stem switches. A flow control valve without stem switches does not

control the flow rate based on rate of flow feedback from the flow meter. The flow rate at low

flow start high flow (normal flow) and low flow stop is controlled by an external flow rate

regulator. Control output Solenoid 1 is closed to open the valve. The valve opens to the low flow

start position and the low flow start quantity is delivered at that rate. After the low flow start

quantity has been delivered, control output Solenoid 2 is closed to open the flow control valve to

the high (normal flow rate) position. When the remaining quantity equals the low flow stop

quantity, control output Solenoid 2 is opened to position the valve at the low flow stop flow rate.

After the low flow stop rate is delivered, control output Solenoid 1 is opened and the flow control

valve is fully shut. All flow through the valve ceases.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 112 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (with Stem-Switches) Operation

Device

Valve State

Closed Opening

Low Flow

Start

Full

Open Closing

Low Flow

Stop

Solenoid 1 (upstream)

control output

open closed open open open open

Stem switch 1 (normally open)

(low flow stop)

closed --- open open open to

close

Solenoid 2 (downstream)

control output

open open open open closed open

Stem switch 2 (normally

closed)

(low flow start)

closed close to

open

open open ---

Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (with Stem-Switches)

Figure 3 - 19

The Solenoid 1 and Solenoid 2 control outputs and the Stem switch 1 and / or Stem switch 2 status

inputs can be used to control the open / close position of a flow control valve with one or two stem

switches. A flow control valve with stem switches does not control the flow rate based on rate of

flow feedback from the flow meter. The flow rate for low flow startup and (optionally) low flow

shutdown is manually set by mechanical adjustments of the one or two stem switches. Control

output Solenoid 1 is closed to open the valve. The valve opens until a close-to-open transition

of Stem switch 2 is sensed. Control output Solenoid 1 is opened at that time. The valve remains

at the low flow startup mechanical setting for a selectable time period. After the time period has

elapsed, control output Solenoid 1 is closed again and the valve is fully opened. Low flow

shutdown is attained by closing control output Solenoid 2 until an open-to-close transition of Stem

switch 1 is sensed. Control output Solenoid 2 is opened at that time. The valve remains at the low

flow shutdown mechanical setting until a selectable quantity is delivered. After the quantity has

been delivered, control output Solenoid 2 is closed again and the valve is fully closed.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 113

# Pulse per Unit Outputs Define up to two pulse outputs.

# Additive Delivery Parameters

Define additive injection parameters.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 114 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Program Code Additive 1 Injection Related Function

Parameters common to all additive injection:

135 Number of additives Sets the total number of additive injectors to control.

136 Selection method Method for selection the additive injection while operating in the

Stand-alone Mode or the Manual Mode.

# External All additive ratio outputs enabled by PC 135

Number of additives program code are

cycled. Each additive injector output circuit

can be selectively enabled / disabled by a

series switch.

# Prompt The local operator is prompted (Additive

Selection Display) to select the desired

additives before the start of each transaction.

# Inputs All additive ratio outputs enabled by PC 135

Number of additives program code are cycled

if enabled by an external contact closure

input for that EACH specific additive.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 115


137 Totalizing method Selects method of totalizing injected additive volume:

# Out Increment the additive volume totalizer once

for each additive ratio output cycle.

# Out/Sgl Increment the additive volume totalizer once

for each additive ratio output cycle. One

feedback cycle per each ratio output cycle.

# Out/Dbl Increment the additive volume totalizer once

for each additive ratio output cycle. Two

feedback cycles per each ratio output cycle.

# Out/Hshk Increment the additive volume totalizer once

for each additive ratio output cycle.

Handshake feedback cycle.

# In/Sgl Increment the additive volume totalizer once

for each additive feedback cycle. One

feedback cycle per each ratio output cycle.

# In/Dbl Increment the additive volume totalizer once

for each additive feedback cycle. Two

feedback cycles per each ratio output cycle.

# In/Hshk Increment the additive volume totalizer once

for each additive feedback cycle. Handshake

feedback cycle.

# In Increment the additive volume totalizer once

for each additive feedback input cycle.

Additive totalization is independent from the

ratio output cycle.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 116 _______________________________________________________ Setup


138 Clean line qty The quantity of product to deliver at the end of a load without additive

injection. This additive free delivery assures that the load rack delivery line

and arm are additive free and ready for the next loading operation.

139 Additive control meters Define the combination of gross and / or standard flow through any

combination of flow meters for control of additive injection.

140 Ratio qty The delivered quantity through the configured additive control

meters that controls one cycle of additive injection.

141 Offset volume Set the gross volume to deliver through the configured additive

control meters before starting additive injection. The additive

injection ratio outputs are suppressed during the delivery of this

volume at the start of each batch delivery.

142 Totalizing volume Set the volume that is injected by the additive injector for each

injection cycle.

143 Available Enable or disable the capability to select this additive in the Additive

Selection Menu during batch delivery setup.

380 Ratio output Assign the additive injection function output to a physical AC or DC

control output.

381 Feedback input Assign the additive injection verification input from the injector

mechanism to a physical AC or DC status input.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 117


382 Selection input Assign the additive injection enable input from an external contact

closure to a physical AC or DC status input. If this input is

assigned, the input must be closed and remain closed to enable

injection of additive number 1.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 118 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Additive Injection Operations:

Additive number 1 injection is performed in the following manner.

# The batch delivery is started.

# The batch volume specified by PC 141 Offset volume is delivered.

# After the offset volume has been delivered, the additive injector is controlled by the

following algorithm.

Control output PC 380 Ratio output is turned ON when the following equation is true:

Delivered volume MOD ratio volume = ratio volume / 2

Control output PC 380 Ratio output is turned OFF when the following equation is true:

Delivered volume MOD ratio volume = ratio volume

# Additive 1 injected volume is totalized, if required, as follows.

# Factors Define the K-factors and meter factors for flow

meters.

NOTE: Very important to verify these values.

# Alarms Define alarm setpoints or trigger conditions.

# I/O Parameters Verify / define physical board and input / output

signal assignments.

# Additive I/O Parameters Define additive input / output signal assignments.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 119

# Component I/O Parameters

Define component block valve input / output signal

assignments.

# Temperature / Pressure / Density

Define procedures to use in temperature , pressure,

and density or gravity calculations (if applicable).

# Recipes Define delivery control / blend recipes.

# Data Communications Define parameters for data communications ports

(applicable to systems with terminal automation

system and / or remote data printer).

# Dynamic Data Display Verify / define data elements for display.

# Data Logging Enable / disable report printing data printer.

# Blending Define the control parameters for product blending

operations.

# Additive pumps/block valves

Assignment of output signals for additive injection

pumps and additive injection block valves.

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

3 - 120 _______________________________________________________ Setup

3.10 Set Contrast / Backlighting

Access to the Set Contrast / Backlighting display is via the Set contrast/backlighting selection of

the Program Mode Menu. This display provides the method to change the current contrast and

backlighting settings for either the local or remote LCD panel.

Set contrast/backlighting SELECT display Primary

8/9 adjust contrast level n ALT+8/ALT+9 adjust backlight level n


Set Contrast / Backlighting Display

Figure 3 - 20

If only the local display is present, it is preselected and indicated. Use the 8 and 9 arrow keys

to adjust the contrast level. A value of 0 is minimum contrast, a value of 15 is maximum

contrast. Use the ALT+8 and ALT+9 keys to adjust the backlight level. A value of 0 is

backlight off, a value of 7 is maximum backlight intensity.

Section 4

Operation

Man-Machine Interface

Batch Delivery

Additive Injection

Data Logging

Fault Analysis / Correction

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 1

This section contains information on operation of the DanLoad 6000 Preset during batch delivery

and multiple batch delivery transactions. Operation of the DanLoad 6000 is defined by program

codes (PC's). Program codes consist of an identification number, a name, and a value or

selection. Program codes are configured during the setup procedure described in Section 3 -

Setup. Section 6 - Program Code Definitions contains additional information on the function of

all program codes.

A batch is defined as the delivery of one single product or a blend consisting of two to four

components, with or without additives. A single batch delivery may constitute a transaction, that

is no more batches will be delivered to this client at this time. A batch delivery begins when the

user / operator presets a quantity to be delivered and initiates the delivery. A batch delivery can

be suspended and restarted at any time if the following two limitations are met. All the permissive

circuits are closed (no active permissive alarm condition) and the Remaining quantity is greater

than the value set in PC 079 Minimum preset qty. The batch delivery is terminated when the last

pulse from the flow meter is detected and the batch delivery cannot be restarted due to one of the

conditions mentioned above.

A transaction is defined as one or more batch deliveries that are grouped together for accounting

purposes. Transactions are logically the delivery of one or more batches to one client, which

would be the case in multiple batches delivered to multiple compartments in a tanker vehicle. The

DanLoad 6000 allows the operator to define the batch deliveries that comprise a transaction. A

transaction is terminated if any of the following conditions occur.

# Loss of power to the DanLoad 6000.

# The swing arm position is changed from the current active delivery side.

# An end transaction command is received from the terminal automation system.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 2 ____________________________________________________ Operation

# The STOP/PRINT key is pressed and a delivery operation is not in progress. If a batch

delivery is temporarily suspended by pressing the STOP/PRINT key, and it is desired to

continue the batch delivery, the ENTER and START key press sequence will restart the

batch delivery. If while the batch delivery is suspended, the STOP/PRINT key is

pressed, the transaction is terminated and either the Recipe Selection Display, the Additive

Selection Display, or the Loading Display is presented to the user / operator, depending

on the system configuration. The system configuration was defined by the setup

procedure. At this time, a new batch delivery which will be part of a new transaction can

be defined.

The batch delivery procedure is described in Section 4.2. Batch delivery control parameters are

preset by the user / operator. Parameters are selected as follows.

# A recipe selection: Performed automatically if only one recipe is defined or performed

manually if two or more recipes are defined. The recipe defines the single product or

multi-component blending characteristics of the batch delivery. (Section 6 - PC's 480 to

660).

# An additive selection: Required if additive injection selection method PC 136 Selection

method is set to Prompt and the additive is selected PC [143, 148, 153, 158, 163, 168]

Available.

# Entry of one to five data items: Each data item can be from zero to eight numeric digits,

data items are used by terminal automation systems for batch / transaction accounting

purposes (Section 6 - PC's 030 to 037).

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 3

All of the batch delivery parameters must be preset before a batch delivery can begin. A

transaction must share all of these parameters for all associated batch deliveries. Therefore, a

transaction is restricted to one or more batch deliveries of a single product or a single blend of

components which have preselected additive injection parameters. A transaction cannot include

multiple recipes, or various additive injection combinations.

4.1 Physical Configuration

The display panel, status indicators, and keypad that are mounted in the operator control panel

provide man-machine interface with the instrument.

Desired functions are controlled via command entries at the keypad in response to displayed data

and prompt messages.

4.1.1 Displays and Controls

Two types of displays are provided, a multi-line alpha-numeric character / graphic LCD (Liquid

Crystal Display) panel and three (red, green, yellow) LED (Light Emitting Diode) status

indicators.

4.1.1.1 LED Status Indicators

The three LED status indicators are visible through the vertical window located to the right of the

LCD display panel. During normal operation of the DanLoad 6000 in the Stand-alone mode or

the Manual mode (not connected to a terminal automation system) the yellow indicator is OFF

and the green indicator is ON if safety circuits are enabled and connected properly.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 4 ____________________________________________________ Operation

These indicators provide the following status information.

LED Status Function

AUTO/MANUAL

(yellow) OFF The DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Stand-alone Mode or the Manual

Mode (PC 025 Operating Mode). (Note: Local operation is identical in

either of these two modes.)

ON The DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Auto Mode (linked to a host

computer and operating as a slave unit) (PC 025 Operating mode).

FLASHING

# (Two short pulses every two seconds) Case internal temperature out

of range, power is removed from the keypad and display panel.

# (One short pulse every two seconds) Case internal temperature has

returned within limits after an out of range state.

# (Rapid flashing) Power failure or low power condition.

PERMISSIVE POWER

(green) ON The permissive power circuit is closed (normal state when a batch delivery

is in progress). The function of the green LED indicator is dependent on

the state of the permissive circuit, located on the power supply module,

and is not programmable.

OFF The permissive power circuit is open when a batch delivery is in progress.

This indicates an abnormal state which is due to permissive power failure

or failure of one or more permissive circuits wired in series (wired AND)

with the permissive power source (the function of the green LED indicator

is dependent on the state of the permissive circuit and is not

programmable)).

(Normal state when batch delivery is not in progress)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 5

LED Status Function

ALARM STATUS

(red) ON A primary alarm is active (see Section 4.5 for information on alarm

action).

OFF All alarms are inactive (normal state).

FLASHING A secondary alarm is active (see Section 4.5 for information on

alarm action).

4.1.1.2 LCD Alpha-numeric / Graphic Data Display

The LCD data display has a back-lighting feature for ease of reading in low ambient light

conditions. The intensity of the back-lighting is controlled by the intensity level of ambient light

(PC's 355 to 360).

Data is displayed in up to three basic formats during normal batch delivery setup and delivery

operations. These three display formats are:

# Recipe Selection Display

This display is presented to the user / operator if more than one recipe has been defined.

If only one recipe has been defined, that recipe is selected automatically and the Recipe

Selection Display is not presented to the operator. Information on recipe selection and an

example of this display are provided below in this section.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 6 ____________________________________________________ Operation

# Additive Selection Display

This display is presented to the user / operator if one or more additives have been defined

and the additive prompt option, PC 136 Selection method set to Prompt. In the case

where additives have been defined and made available, PC [143, 148, 153, [158, 163,

168] Available set to Yes, injection of all additives is always turned off and each additive

must be manually enabled via operator interaction. If no additives have been defined, the

Additive Selection Display is not presented to the operator. Information on additive

injection selection and enabling and an example of this display are provided below in this

section.

# Loading Display

This display is always presented to the user / operator to provide data feedback during

definition of a batch delivery operation and during delivery of the batch or group of

batches (transaction). Information on batch loading and an example of this display are

provided below in this section.

# Dynamic Data Display

This display can be manually selected to provide the user / operator with additional system

parameters that are useful during system configuration, batch loading, and meter proving.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 7

Keypad Layout

Figure 4 - 1

4.1.1.3 Keypad

The numeric / function keypad provides the method for the user / operator to select recipes and

additives, enter the desired preset quantity, and control batch deliveries. Some key functions are

only applicable to setup of the DanLoad 6000 while in the Program Mode. These special functions

are not used in normal batch delivery operations and therefore are not covered in this section. The

keypad layout is indicated in Figure 4 - 1.

Note: The Weights and Measures switch is the lockable and sealable pushbutton switch located

in the upper left corner of the keypad.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 8 ____________________________________________________ Operation

KEY FUNCTION

0 thru 9 numeric digits for data entry

ENTER accept the manually entered value and continue

CLEAR reject the manually entered value and continue

SELECT toggle the Off / On option for each definedadditive

9 scroll down, move the select box to the nextitem in the Recipes Selection Display or theAdditive Selection Display

8 scroll up, move the select box to the previousitem in the Recipes Selection Display or theAdditive Selection Display

START initiate the batch loading operation after batchsetup data has been entered

STOP/PRINT stop the batch loading operation and print batchand / or transaction report, if enabled

PROGRAM access to the Program Mode for modification ofnon-restricted program codes and system data

W&M the Weights and Measures security switch

Key Functions (Batch Delivery)

Figure 4 - 2

Key functions applicable to batch delivery operations are listed in Figure 4 - 2. The description

of the batch delivery procedure in Section 4.2 contains in-context information of the function of

the various keys. The PROGRAM key and the Weights and Measures switch are not used

during normal batch deliveries. However, the user / operator should be familiar with the

functions of the PROGRAM key and Weights and Measures switch.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 9

# PROGRAM key

The PROGRAM key is used, while operating in the Loading Mode and no batch delivery

is in progress, to access the Program Mode. This action is accomplished by pressing the

ALT key and while maintaining the ALT key depressed, simultaneously press the

ENTER / PROGRAM key. The Enter passcode _________ prompt is displayed on the

message line at this time. The response is for the user / operator to enter their predefined

passcode (one to nine digits). If a passcode is not entered within thirty seconds or if an

invalid passcode is entered, the message Invalid passcode is displayed on the message line.

Press the CLEAR key to re-display the normal loading prompt, Enter preset qty. Section

3 - Setup and Section 6 - Program Code Definitions contain information on operation

of the Program Mode.

# Weights and Measures security switch

Several parameters, accessible as program codes in the Program Mode, have direct effect

on the validity and accuracy of the batch quantity calculations. These parameters were

specified during the setup procedure to have Weights and Measures attributes. Parameters

with the Weights and Measures attributes set have three levels of protection to restrict

modification of their values or options settings. A valid user passcode must be entered,

the user must have supervisor privilege, and the Weights and Measures switch must be

open (in the extended position). If the drift pin through the spring loaded switch actuator

is visible, the switch is open. During normal operation, this switch should be closed and

wire sealed in the closed position.

Additional information on the Program Mode and the function of the Weights and Measures

switch is located in Section 3 - Setup and Section 6 - Program Code Definitions.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 10 ____________________________________________________ Operation

4.2 Batch Delivery Procedure

This sub-section contains a description of normal operation of the DanLoad 6000 during batch data

entry, batch delivery, and termination of a batch delivery. The description covers operation of

the DanLoad 6000 in either the Stand-alone Mode or the Manual Mode. Operation in both of

these modes is identical from the user / operator viewpoint. Operation of the DanLoad 6000 as

a slave device to a terminal automation system is installation dependent and is not covered in this

manual.

It is assumed at this point that the DanLoad 6000 is in the idle state, that is no batch delivery is

in progress and no transaction is open. If two or more recipes have been setup, the Recipe

Selection Display is displayed at the start of the transaction. If only one recipe has been setup,

the single recipe is assumed to the active recipe and the Recipe Selection Display is not shown.

When a recipe is selected, the availability of each recipe component is checked. The ccc

Available parameter for all recipe components, located in the Component parameters group, PC's

065 to 077, must be set to Yes. In the case of sequential blending, the sum of the selected

component percentages specified by PC ccc Sequence to load parameter of the recipe, PC's 480

to 660, must be 100. In the case of in-line blending, the sum of the percentages of all four

components in the recipe must be 100. An example of the Recipe Selection Display is provided

below. Two lines are reserved for graphics display at the bottom.

Recipes mm/dd/yy hh:mm Regular Gasoline Kerosene Premium Gasoline Diesel

Recipe Selection Display (Typical)

Figure 4 - 3

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 11

To select the product (recipe) for delivery from the Recipe Selection Display by using the 9 or

8 key to position the select box over the desired product (recipe), then press the ENTER key.

If one or more additives have been setup and PC 136 Selection method is set to Prompt, the

Additive Selection Display is presented to the user / operator. PC ccc Available (additive),

located in the Additive delivery parameters group, PC's 135 to 168, are all set to No at the start

of a transaction so that any required additive must be manually selected by the user / operator.

While operating in the Automatic Mode, additive injection is controlled by the terminal automation

system. While operating in the Stand-alone Mode or the Manual Mode, additive injection is

dependent on the option selected for PC 136 Selection method and related factors described below.

# 136 Selection method = External (default selection) All configured additives are injected

if an external enable contact closure is closed.

# 136 Selection method = Prompt The Additive Selection Display is presented to the

operator for manual selection of each additive before the start of each transaction. (Note:

In AUTO mode, at least one of the additive delivery enable PC's [143, 148, 153, 158,

163, 168] Available, must be set to yes to enable presentation of the Additive Selection

Display.)

# 136 Selection method = Inputs Any configured additive is injected if the corresponding

external enable contact closure (PC ccc Selection input) for that particular additive is

closed.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 12 ____________________________________________________ Operation

The selected recipe is indicated in the top line of the Additive Selection Display. An example of

the Additive Selection Display is illustrated below.

Premium Gasoline mm/dd/yy hh:mmAdditive #1 OffAdditive #2 OffAdditive #3 Off

Use arrow keys and SELECT

Additive Selection Display

Figure 4 - 4

To select the additive from the Additive Selection Display use the 9 or 8 keys to position the select

box over the desired additive, then press the SELECT key to toggle the option from Off to On

(or from On to Off if an entry error is made). Press the ENTER key after all desired (zero to

six) additives have been enabled for injection into the delivered stream.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 13

The Loading Display is presented to the user / operator at this time. The Loading Display allows

the user / operator to enter the preset quantity to be delivered and to monitor the delivery of the

batch and transaction. An illustration of the Loading Display is provided below.

Loaded 0 Gal 0%

+))),* *

Preset 0 Recipe * *Remaining 0 Recipe * *Enter preset qty .)))-

Loading Display

Figure 4 - 5

The Loading Display, Figure 4 - 5, illustrates several alpha-numeric and numeric fields related

to batch deliveries and a graphic representation of the batch delivery receiving tank. The fields

contained in the Loading Display are described below.

# Loaded field contains the batch quantity of the delivered product. The value in this field

is incremented in quantity units until either the preset quantity is reached or the delivery

is suspended or terminated.

# Preset field contains the batch quantity to deliver which is manually entered by the user /

operator in response to the Enter preset qty prompt shown on the message line of the

display panel.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 14 ____________________________________________________ Operation

# Remaining field contains the batch quantity that has not yet been delivered during a batch

delivery. (Preset quantity minus loaded quantity equals remaining quantity)

# Product units mnemonic field (PC 218) contains up to six characters used to display

alphanumeric characters, script characters, or a mixture of script and alphanumeric

characters on display columns next to the large numbers showing the “Loaded” quantity.

Refer to PC 028 Language and notes on configuring a script message prior to the

description of PC 031 #1 Enter data item #1 in Section 6 for more information concerning

language selection and use of scripts.

# Recipe name (First 6 characters of recipe name) field contains the name of the current

recipe manually selected by the operator or automatically selected if only one recipe is

defined.

# Bar graph percentage display is the rectangle displayed on the right side of the display

panel. This display is a bar graph representation of the quantity percentage loaded to the

receiving tank. As the Loaded quantity is incremented and the Remaining quantity is

decremented, the bar graph percentage is proportionately shaded in black. The black

shading represents the Loaded quantity and the unshaded portion represents the Remaining

quantity. The number located at the top of the tank indicates the percentage of the Preset

quantity that has been Loaded. The normal range of this number is 0% to 100%.

However, percentages greater than 100 percent are indicated for a delivery quantity in

excess of 100 percent of the preset quantity.

# Message line is the bottom line of the display panel and is used to display various status

messages to the user / operator. The content and meaning of the messages are explained

below in the Controlling the Batch Delivery section.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 15

4.2.1 Controlling the Batch Delivery

If a data item prompt or prompts were defined during the setup procedure the prompts will be

displayed during batch delivery setup. Data item prompts accept user / operator numeric entries

of up to five 8-digit numeric values that are saved in transaction storage memory or printed in data

log in manual or stand-alone modes. In auto mode, data items are communicated to a terminal

automation system for transaction accounting purposes. Data item entries are not used internally

by the DanLoad 6000. Data item prompts are messages that are presented on the message line of

the display panel when the Loading Display is first shown. These prompt messages are defined

during setup with PC's 030 to 036.

The general format of a data prompt message is:

Enter data item #1 ________

However, note that the message shown above is a default entry which can be changed to a

meaningful prompt message during setup. Actual messages in the desired language that could be

displayed are: Enter order number:, Enter driver number:, Enter trailer number:, etc. The

response is to enter the desired number, from one to eight digits and then press the ENTER key.

If PC 036 Prompt time-out (secs) has been defined, and no entry is made within the time-out time

period, the Recipe Selection Display will be redisplayed to allow restarting the batch delivery

setup procedure. If an error is made during the numeric entry, press the CLEAR key and reenter

the number. If an invalid number is entered and accepted, press the STOP/PRINT key to

terminate and re-start the transaction. If an entry is not required, press the ENTER key to

continue. After all one to five data items have either been entered or bypassed, the Loading

Display as shown in Figure 4 - 5, with the Enter preset qty prompt is presented to the user /

operator.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 16 ____________________________________________________ Operation

If data item entries have not been defined in the setup procedure, the Loading Display is presented

as shown in Figure 4 - 5, with the Enter preset qty prompt displayed.

The quantity to deliver is entered with the numeric keypad. If an entry error is made, press the

CLEAR key to reset the entry and start again. If the entry is correct, press the ENTER key to

accept the entry and continue. If the selected recipe component percentages and components

specified by PC ccc Sequence to load program code do not equal 100 percent, the message Invalid

recipe (percentages) is displayed on the message line at this time. This setup error condition can

be corrected by selecting the Program Mode > Setup Menu > Recipes program codes and

revising either the percentages of the individual components specified by the loading sequence and

/ or the loading sequence program code. If the entered value is less than the value of PC 079

Minimum preset qty, the message Invalid entry - less than minimum is displayed on the message

line of the display panel. Press the CLEAR key to reset the entry and start again. If the entered

value is greater that the value of PC 078 Maximum preset qty, the message Invalid entry - more

than maximum is displayed on the message line of the display panel. Press the CLEAR key to

reset the entry and start again.

If the manual entry passes the high and low preset quantity validation checks, the Preset and

Remaining field values are set to the entered value, the Delivered value is set to zero, and the

message Press START when ready or STOP to cancel is displayed on the message line of the

display panel. If the STOP/PRINT key is pressed at this time, the batch delivery that is setup

is aborted. The message Please wait is displayed on the message line of the display panel and then

the Recipe Selection Display is re-displayed to allow reentry of a new batch delivery definition.

Any open transaction is also terminated by this action.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 17

The green LED ON indicates that the environment is safe for the loading operation. If all

permissive circuits are not in the safe state, the corresponding alarm message (Connect safety

circuit, etc.) is displayed.

The following message sequence is displayed on the message line of the display panel during a

normal batch delivery operation.

# Open block valve - press ENTER

This message and operator entry is only required if the selected unit type is Seq.(manual)

(manual sequential blender).

# Opening block valve

The block valve for the component is being opened.

# Line pack delay

The pump for the component is running and the loading line is being packed.

# Ramping up to high flow rate

The flow control valve or valves are opening in stages to increase the flow rate to the

maximum predefined flow rate.

# Load in progress

The batch delivery is in progress in a normal manner.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 18 ____________________________________________________ Operation

# Ramping down to low flow rate

The flow control valve or valves are closing in stages to decrease the flow rate to the

predefined low flow rate.

# Shutting valve

All open flow control valves are closed. Block valves are closed if the unit is not a manual

sequential blender.

# Close block valve - press ENTER

This message and operator entry is only required if the selected unit type is Seq.(manual)

(manual sequential blender).

The following tasks are performed during the batch delivery operation.

# The display panel shows the preset quantity, the delivered quantity (incrementing), the

transaction quantity (incrementing), and the remaining quantity (decrementing). These

accumulators indicate either gross or standard quantities dependent on the setup

parameters.

# Up to four delivery flow rates can be defined for each flow meter / flow control valve

combination. The DanLoad 6000 always attempts to deliver the product at the maximum

defined flow rate except during low flow startup and shutdown times. The rate of flow is

controlled automatically without interaction with the user / operator. If the highest defined

flow rate cannot be maintained for some reason, the DanLoad 6000 will set the flow rate

at the next highest maintainable flow rate, which is selected in the setup, and periodically

attempt to increase the flow rate to the maximum defined flow rate.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 19

# Up to six additives can be injected into the delivered batch. The ratio of the quantity of

each additive to the delivered batch quantity is automatically controlled.

# All permissive inputs are monitored continuously for abnormal conditions. An open

permissive circuit will cause the green LED indicator to turn OFF, indicating no

permissive power, cause an alarm message to appear on the message line of the display

panel and may suspend the batch delivery, depending on the defined control parameters.

# All process variables are monitored continuously and compared to limit setpoints.

Abnormal process conditions will cause an alarm and the corresponding message to appear

on the message line of the display panel and may suspend the batch delivery, depending

on the defined control parameters.

# Real-time process input data and calculated process data, such as real-time flow rates,

average temperatures, etc., can be monitored by the Dynamic Data Display window which

is displayed in the center area of the Loading Display. The SELECT key is pressed to

activate the Dynamic Data Display window if PC 679 Enable dynamic data display is set

to “yes”. The 9 and 8 arrow keys are used to change display pages (one to four display

pages, with four data items in each display page - for a total of up to sixteen different

items, can be predefined). The CLEAR key removes the Dynamic Data Display window

and re-displays the standard Loading Display.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 20 ____________________________________________________ Operation

# The batch delivery can be temporarily suspended by pressing the STOP/PRINT key. The

batch delivery can be restarted if the quantity remaining to deliver is greater than the

minimum preset quantity and all permissive circuits are closed, indicating that the system

is safe and ready for batch delivery.

# If a power failure occurs during a batch delivery operation, the DanLoad 6000 continues

to supply power to the flow meter preamplifier and accumulate pulse inputs from the flow

meter for approximately one hour after the external power input is removed. The date and

time of the power failure are saved in non-volatile memory and are indicated in a message

on the first display presented when power is restored to the instrument.

# Normal termination of a batch delivery is achieved automatically by setting the flow

control valve to the low flow value and then fully closing the flow control valve when the

preset batch quantity has been delivered. The flow control algorithm calculates the average

quantity delivered from final closure of the flow control valve to cessation of flow based

on the flow meter / flow control valve / product combination. (Note: The final shutdown

quantity is dependent on the line pressure. Therefore, when multiple loading arms share

the same pump or pumps, the final shutdown quantity can vary, dependent on the loading

configuration of the associated equipment at the time of shutdown.)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 21

# When the DanLoad 6000 is in the idle / ready state, the Loading Display is presented to

the user / operator with the prompt Enter preset qty. The previously delivered quantity is

indicated in the Loaded field and the Remaining field indicates 0. The Loading Display

remains in this state until the user / operator initiates a new batch delivery (part of the

open transaction) by entering the quantity to be delivered. Or the open transaction is

closed by pressing the STOP/PRINT key without a batch delivery in progress.

Each delivered batch quantity total will be combined in the transaction delivered total until

the STOP/PRINT key is pressed when a delivery is not in progress.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 22 ____________________________________________________ Operation

4.3 Additive Injection

Additives can be automatically injected into the delivered product or component blend. The

additive volume in relation to the delivered product volume is usually very small, typically less

than four percent of the delivered quantity. The basic features of the additive injection operations

are listed below.

# Control the injection of one to six additives (or no additive). Additive injection is quantity

based and determined by the configured ratio, PC [140, 145, 150, 155, 160, 165]

Ratio qty, of the preset batch quantity and the quantity of additive injected, which is

controlled by PC [139, 144, 149, 154, 159, 164] Additive control meters. The

quantity of additive to inject is reset at the start of each batch delivery operation.

Therefore, additive injection is based on batch quantity and not transaction quantity.

However, the same additive or additives selection applies to all batches that are part of a

transaction.

# Allow additives to be selected from the terminal automation system and / or a discrete

selection input for each additive and manual selection with the keypad while viewing the

Additive Selection Display.

# (Option) Accumulate and / or verify the quantity totals of the injected additives.

# (Option) Deliver a clean line quantity, without additive injection, at the end of each

loading operation. Additive injection ratio is maintained correctly with or without clean

line loading implemented.

# (Option) Inhibit additive injection for part of a batch load.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 23

# The DanLoad 6000 can be configured to provide either an AC or DC control output to

self-controlled or automatic additive injection systems that require a one-to-one drive

signal. In addition, either an AC or DC status input (default Safety circuit #4) can detect

an alarm condition from the additive injector.

4.3.1 Additive Injection Control

The following three groups of parameters control the method of additive injection and the

associated discrete input / output signals.

# 135 to 168 Additive delivery parameters

(methods for delivery and quantities to deliver)

# 380 to 397 Additive I/O parameters

(control outputs and selection / verification inputs)

# 800 to 831 Additive pumps/block valves

(control outputs for additive pumps and block valves)

Six independent control / status circuits can be setup. Injection of each additive is controlled by

any combination of the gross and / or standard accumulated quantities for from one to four flow

meters. If an additive is selected, the ratio output for the selected additive is switched ON and

OFF at a rate which is proportional to the batch delivered quantity through each specified flow

meter.

The quantity of each additive injected can be accumulated if desired. These quantities can be

viewed in the Dynamic Data Display and transmitted to a terminal automation system for

accounting purposes.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 24 ____________________________________________________ Operation

Additive Injection Typical Configurations

Example 1

Configuration

Program

Code

Description Value

025 Unit type Sequential




139 Additive 1 control meters G

140 Additive 1 ratio qty 40.0

138 Clean line qty 0


Test Results

Preset

Quantity

Additive Ratio computed by

DanLoad 6000

Additive

injections

400 40.00 10

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 25

Example 2

Configuration

Program

Code

Description Value









Test Results

Preset

Quantity


DanLoad 6000

Additive

injections

400 (400 - 20) ÷ (400 ÷ 40) = 38.00 10

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 26 ____________________________________________________ Operation

Example 3

Configuration

ProgramCode Description Value









Test Results

Preset

Quantity


DanLoad 6000

Additive

injections

400 (400 - 10) ÷ (400 ÷ 40) = 39.00 10

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 27

Example 4

Configuration

Program

Code

Description Value









Test Results

Preset

Quantity


DanLoad 6000

Additive

injections

400 (400 - 10 - 20) ÷ (400 ÷ 40) = 37.00 10

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 28 ____________________________________________________ Operation

Example 5

Configuration

Program

Code

Description Value

025 Unit type In line



524

525

Component 1 %

Component 2 %

60.00

40.00

067

070

Component 1 meter number


1

2

139 Additive 1 control meters GX


138 Clean line qty (additive) 0


714 Clean line qty (component) 0

Test Results

Preset

Quantity

Meter 1

Gross

Meter 2

Gross


DanLoad 6000

Additive

injections

400 240 160 40.00 6

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 29

Example 6

Configuration

Program

Code

Description Value




524

525

Component 1 %

Component 2 %

60.00

40.00

067

070



1

2






Test Results

Preset

Quantity

Meter 1

Gross

Meter 2

Gross


DanLoad 6000

Additive

injections

400 240 160 (240 - 60) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 30.00 6

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 30 ____________________________________________________ Operation

Example 7

Configuration

Program

Code

Description Value




524

525

Component 1 %

Component 2 %

60.00

40.00

067

070



1

2






Test Results

Preset

Quantity

Meter 1

Gross

Meter 2

Gross


DanLoad 6000

Additive

injections

400 240 160 (240 - 30) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 35.00 6

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 31

Example 8

Configuration

Program

Code

Description Value




524

525

Component 1 %

Component 2 %

60.00

40.00

067

070



1

2






Test Results

Preset

Quantity

Meter 1

Gross

Meter 2

Gross


DanLoad 6000

Additive

injections

400 240 160 (240 - 60 - 30) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 25.00 6

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 32 ____________________________________________________ Operation

Example 9

Configuration

Program

Code

Description Value




524

525

Component 1 %

Component 2 %

60.00

40.00

067

070



1

2






Test Results

Preset

Quantity

Meter 1

Gross

Meter 2

Gross


DanLoad 6000

Additive

injections

400 240 160 (240 - 60) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 30.00 6

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 33

Example 10

Configuration

Program

Code

Description Value




524

525

Component 1 %

Component 2 %

60.00

40.00

067

070



1

2

139 Additive 1 control meters GG





Test Results

Preset

Quantity

Meter 1

Gross

Meter 2

Gross


DanLoad 6000

Additive

injections

400 240 160 (400 - 60 - 30) ÷ (400 - 40) = 31.00 10

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 34 ____________________________________________________ Operation

4.4 Data Logging

This sub-section contains information on the data logging and reporting capabilities of a DanLoad

6000 equipped with an optional DUART board. The data logging feature allows the DanLoad

6000 to generate an audit trail for documentation of operation of the loading system. The function

provides a cost effective manual backup documentation system for use if the terminal automation

system fails.

The program codes listed below, are used to enable or disable automatic logging of the

corresponding data.

Program Code Log Function

696 Batch summary

697 Transaction summary

698 Alarm log

699 Power fail log

700 Program mode entry/exit

701 W&M switch opened/closed

702 Program value change log

703 Meter proving run log

704 Crash memory summary

Data logging usually involves sending the enabled reports / data to a common 80-column dot

matrix printer. However, data logs can be sent to a personal computer or any other data logging

device that can handle serial input ASCII data.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 35

Data is sent from the DanLoad 6000 to the printer or logging device as each event occurs. This

method of operation is called event logging. Logs are not stored in the Danload 6000. However,

if the DanLoad 6000 detects that the printer or logging device is off-line, logs are held in memory

until either the printer / logging device becomes on-line, then the stored logs are printed or the

log memory is full. The action taken if the data logging memory becomes full is specified by PC

235 Data logging alarm action.

Several DanLoad 6000's can share one data printer or logging device. Printer sharing requires

a special device that accepts the serial data link from each DanLoad 6000 and provides one serial

data link to the printer.

The text language of the data logs is specified by PC 028 Language.

4.4.1 Example Data Logs

An example of each type of data log associated with normal batch deliveries and transactions is

provided below. The Meter proving run log is described in Section 5 - Flow Meter Proving and

the Crash memory summary log is described in Section 4.5 - Fault Analysis / Correction. A brief

description of the contents of each field follows the data log example.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 36 ____________________________________________________ Operation

Batch Summary

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Batch Summary

Transaction nnnn Side n Recipe #1 aaaaaa

Enter data item #1 nnnnnnnn





Batch nnnn Preset nnnn Gross nnnn Std nnnn

Started mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss Stopped mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss Gross Std Temp Dens Pres Gal Gal Deg C lb/ft3 psiComponent #1 nnnnnn nnnnnn nnn.n nnnn.n nnnn.n

Component #2 nnnnnn nnnnnn nnn.n nnnn.n nnnn.n



A batch summary is generated automatically at the end of each batch delivery or when power is

restored after a power outage occurred during a batch delivery. The fields contained in the Batch

Summary are described below.

# Unit The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings on the optional

DUART board.

# Transaction A sequential numeric value, generated internally for identification of each

transaction.

# Side The loading island side where the delivery was made.

# Recipe ## The name of the recipe that controlled the delivery.

# <Enter data item #1>

Up the five lines of data prompts and corresponding manually entered

numeric data. The number of lines printed is dependent on the number of

data prompts defined by PC 030 Number of data item prompts. Data item

prompts are re-defined by the alpha-numeric entries for parameters 031 to

035 (03x Enter data item #x). The corresponding values, printed to the

right of the prompt messages, are the manual entries from the start of the

batch delivery.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 37

# Batch A sequential numeric value, generated internally for identification of each

batch delivery, this row (record) also contains the gross quantity

delivered and the standard quantity delivered (sum of all components).

# Preset The preset quantity obtained from the batch data entry.

# Gross The accumulated gross quantity for the composite batch delivery.

# Std The accumulated standard quantity for the composite batch delivery.

# Started Date and time the delivery started.

# Stopped Date and time the delivery stopped.

# Component #

One row (record) for each delivered component, with the following data

indicated:

# Gross quantity delivered of this component, the engineering units

label is obtained from PC 029 Product units.

# Standard quantity delivered of this component, the engineering

units label is obtained from PC 029 Product units.

# Average temperature of this component (negative values are

indicated), the engineering units label is obtained from PC 427

Temperature units.

# Average density of this component, the engineering units label is

obtained from PC 428 Density units.

# Average pressure of this component, the engineering units label is

obtained from PC 429 Pressure units.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 38 ____________________________________________________ Operation

Transaction Summary

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Transaction Summary

Transaction nnnn Side n Recipe ## aaaaaa Gross nnnnnn Std nnnnnn

Started mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss Stopped mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss






Start End Start End gross gross std stdMeter 1 totalizer nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn

Meter 2 totalizer nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn


















Additional batch transaction records for this transaction, as required.

A transaction summary is generated automatically at the end of each transaction consisting one or

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 39

multiple batch deliveries or when power is restored after a power outage occurred while a

transaction is in progress. The fields contained in the Transaction Summary are described below.

# Start gross / End gross

Start std / End std

The gross and standard quantities are indicated for each active flow meter

(Meter m totalizer).

# Batch A sequential numeric value, generated internally for identification of each

batch delivery, this row (record) also contains the gross quantity

delivered and the standard quantity delivered (sum of all components).

# Preset The preset quantity obtained from the batch data entry.

# Gross The accumulated gross quantity for the composite batch delivery.

# Std The accumulated standard quantity for the composite batch delivery.

# Started Date and time the delivery started.

# Stopped Date and time the delivery stopped.

# Component #

One row (record) for each delivered component, with the following data

indicated:

# Gross quantity delivered of this component, the engineering units

label is obtained from PC 029 Product units.

# Standard quantity delivered of this component, the engineering

units label is obtained from PC 029 Product units.

# Average temperature of this component (negative values are

indicated), the engineering units label is obtained from PC 427

Temperature units.

# Average density of this component, the engineering units label is

obtained from PC 428 Density units.

# Average pressure of this component, the engineering units label is

obtained from PC 429 Pressure units.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 40 ____________________________________________________ Operation

Alarm

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Alarm aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

An alarm log is generated automatically when an alarm condition is detected for alarms which

have the alarm action attribute set to Primary or Secondary. The fields contained in the Alarm

log are described below.

# Unit The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings o the optional

DUART board.

# <time> Date and time that the alarm condition was detected.

# <message> Alarm message, messages are indicated in Section 4.5.

Power Failure Date and Time

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Power failed mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss

A power failure log is generated automatically when power is restored to the DanLoad 6000. The

fields contained in the Power failure log are described below.


DUART board.

# <time> The current date and time and the date and time that power was removed

from the DanLoad 6000.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 41

Program Mode Entry and Exit

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- User aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa entered program mode

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- User aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa exited program mode

A program mode entry/exit log is generated automatically whenever the program mode is entered

or exited. The fields contained in the Program mode entry/exit log are described below.


DUART board.

# <time> Date and time of the event.

# User The user / operator name obtained from PC ccc User ID parameter entry.

Weights and Measures Switch

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Weights and measures switch opened

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Weights and measures switch closed

A weights and measures switch log is generated automatically whenever the state of the weights

and measures switch, located on the operator control panel, is changed. The fields contained in

the Weights and measures switch log are described below.


DUART board.


# <message> The message Weights and measures switch opened or

Weights and measures switch closed.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 42 ____________________________________________________ Operation

Program Code Value Changed

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Program Code Value Changed

User aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Value 480 Number of recipes 5

A program code value changed log is generated automatically whenever a program code value is

changed for a program code which has the Data logging attribute set to Yes. (Note: This attribute

defaults to Yes for all program codes during initial startup (cold start). The fields contained in

the Program code value changed log are described below.


DUART board.


# User The user / operator name obtained from PC ccc User ID parameter entry.

# Value The program code number and name followed by the current program code

value.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 43

4.5 Alarms / Fault Analysis / Correction / Diagnostic Tests

This sub-section contains information on the analysis and correction of common fault conditions

that can occur during batch delivery operations.

# Alarm messages and causes of the alarm messages are described in Section 4.5.1.

Additional information on alarm parameters and other parameters in located in Section 6

- Program Code Definitions.

# Diagnostic tests, available in the Program Mode, are described in Section 4.5.2.

# A Crash memory log is automatically generated, if enabled, if a processor memory error

is detected. Section 4.5.3 contains information on this error log.

Crash memory logs should be saved and the log occurrence reported to:

Daniel Industries, Inc.

Electronics Products Customer Service

Telephone: (281) 897-2900

FAX: (281) 897-2901

(Phone / FAX are answered 24-hours)

General information on all alarm conditions and messages is provided on the following pages.

Additional information on alarms is provided in the Alarms group, program codes 219 to 268,

and the I/O Parameters group, PC's 280 to 360, in Section 6.

Note that PC 219 Safety circuit message defines the default safety circuit alarm message that will

be displayed on a safety circuit fault. The cold-start program code value is Specific, displaying

a detail message for the operator, eg. “Ground detector open”. The other option is General,

which displays a more generic message, eg. “Safety circuit 1 failure”. The alarm messages for

safety circuits 1 through 8 are user configurable in the selected script “Language”.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 44 ____________________________________________________ Operation

4.5.1 Alarm Messages

Flow rate too low meter # Default Range

221 Low flow alarm action Primary OffInfoPrimary

222 Minimum flow rate 100 0 to 99999

223 Low flow time (secs) 10 5 to 999

Notes:

# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1,2, 3, 4).

# The flow rate units for PC 222 Minimum flow rate aredetermined by the corresponding PC [171, 182, 193, 204]Nominal K-factor for the flow meter (GPM, LPM, dLPM,BPH, LBH, KGH).

# This alarm is triggered by problems in the componentpumping circuit, flow control valve circuit, flow meterpreamplifier, or flow meter sensor.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 45

4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)

Flow rate too high meter # Default Range

224 High flow alarm action Primary OffInfoPrimary

225 Maximum flow rate 2000 0 to 99999

226 High flow time (secs) 10 5 to 999

Notes:

# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3, 4).

# The flow rate units are determined by the corresponding PC [171, 182, 193, 204] Nominal K-factor for the flow meter (GPM, LPM,dLPM, BPH).

# This alarm is triggered by problems in the component pumpingcircuit, flow control valve circuit, or flow meter circuit.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 46 ____________________________________________________ Operation


Unable to close valve meter # Default Range

--- Overrun limit alarm action Primary <none>

227 Overrun limit qty 2.0 0.0 to 99.9

Notes:


# The alarm action is internally set to Primary.

# This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow control valve circuit. PC ccc Low flow stop qty too small, unstable flow rate during low flowstop, K-factor to small (insufficient pulse rate input for frequencycalculation), flow control valve jammed OPEN by debris or mechanicalfailure.

# After valve is repaired or adjusted, the DanLoad 6000 will need todeliver a minimum of three batches in order to determine the valveclosure time.

Valve closed early meter # Default Range

228 Underflow alarm action Off OffPrimary

229 Underflow limit qty 5.0 0.0 to 99.9

Notes:


# This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow control valve circuit.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 47


Timed-out - no flow detected meter # Default Range

230 No flow time-out alarm action Primary OffInfoPrimary

231 No flow time-out (secs) 5 1 to 99

Notes:


# This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow meter circuit (badpreamplifier or pulse input wiring), pump circuit, the component blockvalve circuit, or the flow control valve circuit, failure of meter pulseboard or main processor board.

Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter # Default Range

--- Unauthorized flow limit alarm action Primary <none>

232 Unauthorized flow limit qty 10 0.0 to 99.9

Notes:



# This alarm is triggered by problems in the block valve or flow control valve circuit, such as a mechanical failure (bad O-rings, etc.) of the valve or pulsation of theproduct caused by multiple arms, valves, pumps in the same circuit in use at thesame time.

# After valve is repaired or adjusted, the DanLoad 6000 will need to deliver a minimumof three batches in order to determine the valve closure time.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 48 ____________________________________________________ Operation


Pulse security error meter # Default Range

--- Pulse security alarm action Primary <none>

233 Error limit (pulses) 0 0 to 255

234 Reset count (pulses) 10000 0 to 65535

Notes:



# The pulse security per IP 252 level B is implemented by an electronicmodule installed on the meter pulse input board. (Reference Britishstandard IP 252 or API standard MPMS Chapter 5, Section 5.)

# This alarm is triggered by pulse comparison errors between two pulse traininputs from a single flow meter. Causes of errors are A / B input pulsetrains reversed, preamplifier failure, wiring failure.

# PC 233 Error limit (pulses) must be set to 0 (zero) to disable this function. .

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 49


Data logging memory full Default Range

235 Data logging alarm action Info InfoPrimary

Notes:

# This alarm is triggered when the data logging memory becomes full. This condition is usually caused by the data logging printer being off-line, out of paper, or otherwise not available. The data logging function isenabled or disabled by the Data logging parameters.

Comm failure channel x Default Range

236 Comm fail alarm action Primary InfoPrimary

237 Comm fail time-out (secs) 10 1 to 300

Notes:

# In the alarm message, x is the RS-232 / RS-485 channel identifier (A orB).

# This alarm is triggered if a message is not received from the terminalautomation system within the elapsed time entry in PC 237 Comm failtime-out (secs) parameter. Errors caused by failure of terminalautomation system, error in DUART address assignment or portprotocol configuration (PC's 661 to 672).

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 50 ____________________________________________________ Operation


Temperature failure meter # Default Range

238 Temperature failure alarm action Primary InfoPrimary

239 Minimum temperature -40.0 -99.9 to999.9

240 Maximum temperature 110.0 -99.9 to999.9

Notes:


# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the RTD temperature input assignedto the indicated flow meter. Temperature inputs are assigned by PC's 318,321, 324, 327. Some causes of this alarm are: temperature of product out-of-range (can be caused by faulty product heater or product remaining inheater too long a time), failure of RTD or failure of wiring to RTD/

# Fixed temperature values used in case of failure of the live temperatureinputs are set by PC's 434, 437, 440, 443. These fixed temperaturevalues are assigned to components, however, the DanLoad 6000 relatesthe current component flow to the current flow meter. The alarm meter #indicates a specific RTD input.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 51


Density failure component # Default Range

241 Density fail alarm action Primary InfoPrimary

242 Minimum density/gravity

243 Maximum density/gravity

Notes:

# In the alarm message, # is the actual component number (1, 2, 3, 4).

# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the density input assigned to theindicated component.

Pressure failure meter # Default Range

--- Pressure failure alarm action Primary <none>

244 Minimum pressure 0.0 0.0 to9999.9

245 Maximum pressure 0.00 0.0 to9999.9

Notes:


# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the pressure input assigned to theindicated flow meter.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 52 ____________________________________________________ Operation


Additive # failure Default Range

--- Additive error alarm action Primary <none>

246 Additive error limit 3 1 to 99

Notes:

# In the alarm message, # is the actual additive number (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).

# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the additive injector mechanism.Additive injection can be monitored by the assigning the corresponding PC[381, 384, 387, 390, 393, 396] Feedback input to physical discreteinputs.

Unable to maintain blend Default Range

--- Blend tolerance alarm action Primary <none>

247 Overall blend tolerance % 2 1 to 5

Notes:

# This alarm is triggered by the DanLoad 6000 sensing that the ratio of thedelivered components does not match the current active recipe. Thisproblem is caused by errors in the pumping circuits, flow control valvecircuits, or block valve circuits.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 53


Unable to close block valve # Default Range

--- Block valve close fail alarm action Primary <none>

248 Block valve delay (secs) 10 0 to 99

Notes:

# In the alarm message, # is the actual component block number (1, 2, 3, 4).

# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the corresponding block valve control circuit. The position of the block valve is sensed by PC [401, 403, 405, 407] ccc Blockvalue input, corresponding to one of four component block valves. Componentblock valves are controlled by PC's 400, 402, 404, and 406.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 54 ____________________________________________________ Operation


Ground detector open Default Range

249 Circuit 1 alarm action Secondary SecondaryPrimary

250 #1 Ground detector open 7message

1 to 34characters

Notes:

# If the language selection is changed, then changes in the “safety circuitmessages” (PC 250, 252, 254, 256, 258, 260, 262, 264) should also beconsidered.

# General permissive input, message specified by PC 250 # 1 Grounddetector open can be modified.

# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete inputassigned to PC 345 Safety circuit 1.

Overspill detector open Default Range


252 #2 Overspill detector open 7message

1 to 34characters

Notes:

# General permissive input, message specified by PC 252 #2 Overspilldetector open can be modified.


_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 55


Permissive power failure Default Range


254 #3 Permissive power failure 7message

1 to 34characters

Notes:

# General permissive input, message specified by PC 254 #3 Permissivepower failure can be modified.


Additive injection failure Default Range


256 #4 Additive injection failure 7message

1 to 34characters

Notes:

# General permissive input, message specified by PC 256 #4 Additive injection failurecan be modified.

# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assigned to PC348 Safety circuit 4.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 56 ____________________________________________________ Operation


Arm down side 1 Default Range


258 #5 Arm down side 1 7message

1 to 34characters

265 Circuit 5 type 1 0 to 2

Notes:

# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by PC 258 #5 Armdown side 1 can be modified.

# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete inputassigned to PC 349 Safety circuit 5. The side detect function is controlledby PC 265 Circuit 5 type which senses the swing arm side based on theoption selection of PC 312 Side detect method.

# The permissive input can be set to be side independent or to be dependenton either side.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 57


Arm down side 2 Default Range


260 #6 Arm down side 2 7message

1 to 34characters


Notes:

# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by PC 260 #6 Armdown side 2 can be modified.



DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 58 ____________________________________________________ Operation


Walkway down side 1 Default Range


262 #7 Walkway down side 1 7message

1 to 34characters


Notes:

# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by PC 262 #7Walkway down side 1 can be modified.



_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 59


Walkway down side 2 Default Range


264 #8 Walkway down side 2 7message

1 to 34characters


Notes:

# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by PC 264 #8Walkway down side 2 can be modified.



DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 60 ____________________________________________________ Operation


Primary internal temperature out of range Secondary internal temperature out of range Default Range

--- Internal temperature alarm action Primary <none>

Notes:

# This alarm is triggered if the internal temperature of the DanLoad 6000 is less thanor greater than the allowable limits for operation of the LCD display panel. Poweris removed from the display panel and the yellow LCD indictor flashes to alert theoperator. Operating temperature limits are 0 degrees Celsius to +60 degreesCelsius. The DanLoad 6000 can be operated to minimum temperatures of -40degrees Celsius if an internal heater is installed to maintain the internal temperatureat 0 degrees Celsius or greater.

# This alarm is indicated in the following manner by the yellow LED located on thefront panel.

# (two short pulses every two seconds) the internal case temperature iscurrently out of range, power is removed from the keypad and the display

# (one short pulse every two seconds) the internal case temperature was out ofrange but has returned within limits, the alarm has not been acknowledgedyet

# Problems caused by low ambient temperatures may be corrected with the additionof an internal space heater. Problems caused by high ambient temperatures may becorrected by installation of a sunshade over the DanLoad 6000. See Section 2 - Installation for additional information.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 61

4.5.2 Diagnostic Tests

RAM (random access memory) diagnostics are run continuously while power is applied to the

DanLoad 6000. The RAM diagnostic and several other diagnostics are described in this section.

Several of the diagnostic tests are designed for maintenance troubleshooting and have limited use

for operations personnel. However, the operations personnel should be aware of the reaction of

the instrument to some types of failures. These failure indications are described in this sub-

section.

A group of diagnostic tests are accessible for manual execution via the Diagnostics selection in the

Program Mode Menu. Access to the Program Mode Menu is described in Section 4.1.1.3. When

the Diagnostics selection is activated, the Diagnostics Menu shown below in displayed.

Diagnostics Menu Pg 1 of 2Firmware VersionsRAM testsKeypadDisplayInputs/OutputsDUART More 9

Diagnostics Menu Pg 2 of 2Crash analysisShow memoryShow transaction memoryExit (ALT+CLEAR)

More 8

Diagnostic Menu

Figure 4 - 6

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 62 ____________________________________________________ Operation

The following selections in the Diagnostics Menu are available.

# Firmware Versions

The firmware versions of the program for the two CPU's and the message EPROM is

displayed. The power failure message indicating the date and time of the last power failure

is also displayed.

# RAM tests

The passed / failed results of the continuously running RAM tests is displayed. If a RAM

test fails at any time, all discrete outputs are OPENED, causing all flow control valves

and block valves to close and all pumps to stop running. The cause of the failure must be

corrected before the DanLoad 6000 can be used. (Note: The contents of RAM are not

modified by the diagnostic tests.)

# Keypad

A prompt message Press key to test ... is displayed. The name of any key pressed is

displayed beside the prompt message. Multiple keys can be pressed until the EXIT

(ALT+CLEAR) key is pressed to re-display the Diagnostics Menu.

# Display

The display backlighting level is stepped at one second intervals through the indicated

numeric level range of 0 to 7. The display contrast level is stepped at one second intervals

through the indicated numeric level range of 0 to 15. The local display panel and if

connected, the remote display panel are checked. Both the backlighting and the contrast

levels are restored to their current settings on exit from the display. (Note: Contrast and

backlighting can be manually adjusted via the Set contrast/backlighting selection of the

Program Mode Menu.)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 63

# Inputs/Outputs

The Input/Outputs diagnostic display indicated below is shown. This display is used to

view the current live values of the selected input or output point.

Inputs/OutputsMeter input __ #pulses = nnnnnRTD input __ A/D value = hhhh4-20 mA input __ A/D value = hhhhDiscrete input __ state = nDiscrete output __ state = n


Inputs / Outputs Diagnostic

Figure 4 - 7

The 9 and 8 arrow keys are used to move the flashing underline cursor to the desired line.

The 0 to 9 numeric keys are used to enter any valid input or output number up to the

maximum number for that type of input or output. Press the ENTER key to continue.

The value of the selected input is displayed. The flashing cursor remains on the same line

and other inputs of the same type may be viewed. The input value corresponds to the

selected input point. The state of a control output can be changed by entering the control

output number, pressing the ENTER key, and then when the flashing cursor is positioned

at the state field, press either the 0 key (to turn the output OFF, or the 1 key to turn the

output ON, as applicable. The output may be repeatedly toggled at this time with the 0

key and the 1 key or may be left in the desired state by pressing the ENTER key with the

desired state displayed. (Note: #pulses is an accumulated pulse count, A/D value is a 4-

digit hexadecimal number, state is 0 or 1 as described above.)

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 64 ____________________________________________________ Operation

# DUART

Serial ports COM1 and COM2 are tested under program control by running the two

channels in local loopback mode. The address (0 to 255), selected by the DIP switch on

the module is displayed. A nnn% errors result of the test for each channel is displayed.

(Note: Channel A = COM1, Channel B = COM2.)

DUART 001 Ch. A Ch. BLocal loopbback 256/256 256/256External loopback 203/256 52/256baud rates PPPPPPPF FFFFFFFFdata formats PFP PPFinterupts PPP P--Press ALT+CLEAR to exit

DUART Ports Diagnostic

Figure 4 - 8

# Crash analysis

The RAM crash analysis in the same format as the Crash memory summary log, Section

4.5.3, is displayed. See the description of the Crash memory summary log for details.

# Show memory

Data memory for either CPU is displayed in 1 kbyte blocks. The display shows the

memory address with data in both hexadecimal and ASCII formats.

# Show transaction memory

Data memory for transactions is displayed. The display shows the memory address with

data in both hexadecimal and ASCII formats.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 65

4.5.3 Crash Memory Log

A Crash memory summary log indicates an unrecoverable error detected by the control program.

This feature is a general purpose detector / logger for critical hardware and software error

conditions. The main processor board or the RAM integrated circuit should be replaced to correct

the problem. The Crash memory summary log should be saved for use in main processor

troubleshooting.

If PC 704 Crash memory summary is set On and the data printer is available, a Crash memory

summary log is printed by the logging printer. The example below indicates the format of the log.

Crash Memory Summary

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Crash Memory Summary CPU #Stk ptr/prog ctr 47n3/2085

Int mask/int mask 1 004c/0063

WSR/task 0000/0002

Error code/task adr 0000/e742

The fields contained in the Crash memory summary log are described below.

# CPU # The # is either 1 (indicating CPU 1 problem) or 2 (indicating CPU 2

problem).

# Unit The unit address obtained from PC 661 DUART address, range is 0 to

255.

# < time> Date and time of the event.

# Stk ptr/prog ctr

The hexadecimal values of the stack pointer and the program counter.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

4 - 66 ____________________________________________________ Operation

# Int mask/int mask 1

The hexadecimal values of the interrupt mask and the interrupt mask 1.

# WSR/task The Window Select Register / multi-task task number.

# Error code/task adr

The hexadecimal identifier of the critical error code / the address of the

active task.

Section 5

Flow Meter Proving

General

Tank Prover Method

Master Meter Method

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Flow Meter Proving ___________________________________________ 5 - 1

This section contains information on flow meter proving using methods specified in API standards

and English measurement units. The general information applies to other standards and

measurement units as well. Meter proving is the procedure for determining a meter factor for a

rack flow meter. Calibration is the procedure for determining a volume of the meter prover and

is not covered in this manual.

Details are provided on manual meter proving by the prover tank method and the master meter

method. The pipe prover method is usually used for proofs of large capacity flow meters in

pipeline or tanker ship loading service and is not covered in this manual. Meter proving

determines the accuracy of the flow measurement and therefore the accuracy of quantity and cash

accounting for delivered products. It is strongly recommended that you read this section, all

local, regional, and country standards, and all company standards applicable to your installation

and meter proving, before proving a rack meter or a master meter.

Typical forms used during the meter proving procedure are provided at the end of this section.

These forms can be copied or used as a guide for development of forms for your organization.

Note

The flow meter proving procedures described in this section and the typical meter proof forms

(Figure 5 -2, Figure 5 -3) are primarily provided to describe the DanLoad 6000 program codes

that affect meter proving and flow measurement accuracy. The method of meter proving and

the typical form may require changes before use in your organization. Consult the flow

measurement accounting department of your organization before conducting flow meter proofs.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

5 - 2 ___________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving

A prover tank is a field standard measure which is designed and calibrated by a laboratory that

can provide calibration traceability to the Weights and Measures Office of the National Bureau of

Standards. The calibrated prover tank can be used in either or both of the following meter proof

methods.

# Used periodically to prove individual rack meters.

# Used periodically to prove a master meter. Then the master meter is used to prove the

individual rack meters.

The primary American Petroleum Institute standards applicable to meter proving are:

Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards (MPMS)

# Chapter 4 - Proving Systems

# Chapter 12 - Calculation of Petroleum Quantities

# Section 2 - Instructions for Calculating Liquid Petroleum Quantities

Measured by Turbine or Displacement Meters

(contains Tables A-1 and A-2 - Correction Factors for Steel)

# Chapter 11.1 - Volume Correction Factors

Table 6 - Reduction of Volume to 60 degrees Fahrenheit

Against API Gravity at 60 degrees Fahrenheit

Table 24 - Reduction of Volume to 60 degrees Fahrenheit

Against Specific Gravity 60/60 degrees Fahrenheit

These standards supersede API Standards 1101, 2531, 2533, and 2534 and are widely used in

the USA and several other countries. The volume reduction tables 6 and 24 are also designated:

ASTM D 1250, API Standard 2540, and IP 200.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Every flow meter is a unique device. The manufacturer fabricates each flow meter so that it meets

design specifications. However, differences within normal fabrication tolerances produce

apparently identical flow meters that generate slightly different pulses per volume unit (K-factor).

The nominal K-factor [average number of pulses per each volume unit (such as a gallon) that

are generated by a flow meter] is stamped on the flow meter nameplate. For example, by design

the Daniel 4-inch LR turbine meter should produce 23.0 pulses per each gallon measured. After

manufacture, each LR turbine meter is proved with water flow at the factory. This initial meter

proof of the new flow meter may produce an actual K-factor for that flow meter of 23.403 pulses

per gallon measured. This initial meter proving is normally the only time that the flow meter K-

factor is determined by a meter proof. After a meter has been installed on-site, additional meter

proofs may be used to determine meter factors. Over the lifetime of a meter, its meter factor may

change due to variations in flow rates, viscosities, wear, and other causes. However, the K-

factor will always remain the same. The DanLoad 6000 uses a mathematical combination of the

K-factor and the meter factor to adjust the volume accumulation totalizers to match the actual

volume that has flowed through the meter.

In addition to the type of flow meter and installation design, the product being measured,

temperature of the product being measured, the flow rate, and, to a lesser extent, the pressure

of the product being measured may also affect the accuracy of the flow measurement. (Note: The

pressure effect on the volume of low vapor pressure hydrocarbon liquids, such as gasoline,

diesel, kerosine, and fuel oil is usually negligible when these liquids are handled at low pressures

(less than 100 PSIG) and is ignored in many tanker vehicle loading installations.)

Flow meters can be proved as often as desired. Many organizations have regulations governing

the frequency of meter proofs. These regulations are often based on date, volume of flow through

the meter, and / or number of loading operations use the meter. If your organization does not

have such regulations, each meter should be proved periodically and the proof results compared

with previous proof results to determine if more frequent or less frequent proofs are required.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


The terminology used in this section is defined below and is based on the definitions in the API

standards.

Term Definition

Gross volume The indicated volume times the meter factor derived from a meter proving

of the flow meter at a specific flow rate. This is a volume measurement.

This volume is displayable as Dynamic Data Element - Mtr m grs load in

the DanLoad 6000 and is used to determine the volume measured by the

rack meter during meter proving.

Calculation: gross volume = indicated volume times meter factor

Gross standard volume

The gross volume corrected to standard temperature and pressure. This is

a quantity measurement.

TLMCalculation: Gross standard volume = gross volume times C

(correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid

PLMin the meter) times C (correction factor for the effect of

pressure on the liquid in the meter)

Indicated volume (also called meter registration) The change in the flow meter reading that

Occurs during a product flow measurement operation. This is a volume

measurement.

Calculation: indicated volume = end reading minus start reading

K-factor The pulses per volume unit, such as gallon, generated by a pulse output

(System factor) type flow meter. The K-factor is also called the system factor. The

nominal value is determined by flow meter design and factory water flow

calibration and is indicated on the flow meter nameplate. The K-factor is

a physical characteristic of the flow meter and is a fixed number.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Term Definition

Master meter A master meter is a turbine meter or positive displacement meter that has

been proved previously with a tank prover. The master meter is

temporarily connected in series with a rack meter to be proved so that all

flow passes through both meters. A volume of liquid is passed through

both meters and the volume measured by the master meter is considered to

be 'correct'. The difference between the volume measured by each meter

determines the meter factor for the rack meter. The API standard

recommends that a minimum volume of 10,000 volume unit increments are

accumulated during a meter proof and that the minimum duration of a meter

proof run be five minutes.

The DanLoad 6000 can display delivered quantities in hundredths of

volume units, such as vvv.vv gallons. A proof run of 100.00 volume units

may be sufficient to satisfy the 10,000 volume unit requirement. Meter

proof deliveries of 1500 to 2000 whole volume units are more common.

Meter factor A number used internally by the DanLoad 6000 in flow calculations to

correct the indicated volume (final flow meter registration minus initial

flow meter registration) to the observed gross volume (actual flow meter

throughput at operating conditions). The meter factor value is near 1.0000

and rounded to four decimal places.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


Term Definition

Pipe prover A pipe prover is a calibrated pipe section that contains a sphere made of an

elastomer material and a sphere detector switch located at each end of the

calibrated pipe section. The pipe prover has two basic configurations, bi-

directional or uni-directional. As the names imply, the sphere can pass in

either direction or only one direction, respectively. The sphere detector

switches are used to start and stop an external prover counter which can be

connected to a high resolution pulse output from the DanLoad 6000. A

meter proof is performed by directing all flow through a flow meter in

series with the pipe prover calibrated pipe section and accumulating the raw

pulses generated by the flow meter while the prover sphere moves from the

start pulse count gate switch and the stop pulse count gate switch. Since the

precise volume of the calibrated section of the pipe prover is known, the

flow meter pulse output corresponds to that precise volume, and each

volume unit can be calculated.

Quantity (Example: gross standard volume)

The resulting amount of product measured after compensation for

operational temperature and pressure, usually indicated in one of the

following units: gallons, barrels, liters, cubic meters.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Term Definition

Tank prover A tank prover is a fixed or portable graduated tank that is calibrated to

contain a precise known volume of liquid. The tank bottom and sides are

reinforced so that the weight of the liquid in the tank does not distort the

tank. The graduated sight gauge(s) permit determination of the exact

volume of liquid in the tank. The minimum capacity of the tank must be

equal to the volume that passes through the flow meter in one minute. The

recommended capacity of the tank is 1-1/2 to 2 times the volume that passes

through the flow meter in one minute. For example, if the maximum

operational flow rate of a flow meter is 600 GPM, the minimum prover

tank capacity is 600 gallons, and the recommended prover tank capacity

between 900 and 1200 gallons.

Volume (Example: indicated volume; gross volume)

The actual space occupied by the product measured, usually indicated in

one of the following units: gallons, barrels, liters, cubic meters.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


5.1 General Considerations

Program codes that affect the flow measurement accuracy of the DanLoad 6000 may be restricted

from modification by the Weights & Measures attributes of those program codes. If these program

codes are set to ON, the value of the program codes can only be changed when the Weights &

Measures switch is set OPEN. Therefore, before a flow meter can be proved, the front panel

Weights & Measures switch must be set OPEN (extended position).

A DanLoad 6000 can deliver up to four components and each component can be delivered at up

to four different flow rates. The lowest defined flow rate for a component is the component's 'low

flow rate'. The highest defined flow rate for a component is the component's 'high flow rate'

which is also called the 'normal flow rate'. Any other defined flow rates for a component are

called 'fall back flow rates' or 'intermediate flow rates'. Each of the component / flow rate

combinations has a unique meter factor for a total of sixteen possible meter factors. Installations

with less than four flow meters and less than four flow rates will have fewer meter factors.

The meter factors for each component must be determined and entered in the order shown below.

Component p meter factor 1 Lowest defined flow rate.

Component p meter factor 2 Next higher flow rate if more than one flow rate is defined.

Component p meter factor 3 Next higher flow rate if more than two flow rates are defined.

Component p meter factor 4 Highest flow rate if four flow rates are defined.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


The component number p is 1 to 4. The reason for this order is to prevent any inaccuracies at any

lower flow rate from affecting the accuracy of the meter factor for a higher flow rate. Because

meter proving is by delivered batch, startup and shutdown quantities delivered at low flow start

rate and low flow stop rate, are included in the total proof batch. Therefore, any volume

measurement errors occurring during low flow rate times will be compensated in the total proving

batch.

In some organizations it is acceptable to use only a low flow and high flow meter factor even when

one or two fall back flow rates are defined. In these cases, the rack meter is proved at the low

and high flow rate and the meter factor for the high flow rate is also entered as the meter factor

for one or two fall back flow rates.

During meter proving, various parameter values may need to be changed. All associated

parameters are not located in the same Setup Menu sub-group. To access a parameter when the

Setup Menu is active, enter the 3-digit program code. The selected parameter is then displayed.

Verify or change the value of the parameter as desired. Then press the EXIT (ALT + CLEAR)

key to re-display the Setup Menu and select the next parameter or continue.

Each meter proving run can only determine one meter factor for one component (flow meter) /

flow rate combination. Each component defined by the DanLoad 6000 configuration is associated

with a meter number by PC's [067, 070, 073, 076] Meter. Each of these meter numbers is

associated with a physical input to the DanLoad 6000 by PC's [052, 055, 058, 061] Meter

pulse board input. For example: Component number 1 may be associated with meter number 3

and meter 3 associated with meter pulse board input number 2.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


Recipes should be setup to define each single component for use in controlling the block valves

of a multi-component blending system during meter proving.

Example:

Select an undefined recipe number higher than the last defined operational recipe and set that

recipe to deliver 100 percent of component 1, set the next recipe to delivery 100 percent of

component 2. Setup from one to four recipes (one for each component) that permit selection and

proof delivery of each component without any blending. The setup could appear as follows.

Example meter proof recipes for a blender system:

Recipe 10:

535 Prove Gasoline

536 Component 1 % = 100

537 Component 2 % = 0



540 Sequence to load 1XXX

Recipe 11:

541 Prove Diesel


543 Component 2 % = 100



546 Sequence to load 2XXX

(Continue to define a third recipe for component 3 and a forth recipe for component 4 meter

proofs if required.)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


The gross loaded volume, with the current meter factor applied, that the DanLoad 6000

measures during the delivery operation must be displayable after a meter proof is completed. The

following data element codes are available for this purpose.

Data Code Default Program Code Description

103 Mtr 1 grs load 689 Dynamic Data Display - Element 10 (default)

104 Mtr 2 grs load ____ ______________________________

105 Mtr 3 grs load ____ ______________________________

106 Mtr 4 grs load ____ ______________________________

The table above indicates that only Mtr 1 grs load is displayable if the DanLoad 6000 is in the

default configuration. If two or more components are defined, the flow meter assignment for

each component must be determined. Once the flow meter / component relationship is

determined, the Mtr m grs load parameter must be made displayable as a Dynamic Data Display

element. This task is accomplished as follows.

Perform the following steps to activate display of the dynamic data codes required for meter proof

monitoring.

# Enter Setup Mode, select the program codes listed above for each defined component and

record the flow meter assignment.

# Decide which of the sixteen default dynamic data codes are not of interest for display at

your installation. Record the current program code assignment of these data display

locations (PC's 680 to 695).

# Select PC's from 680 to 688 or 690 to 695 (do not change PC 689 Dynamic data element

10 (Mtr 1 grs load) which is used to monitor the component delivery through flow meter

number 1).

# Enter the Dynamic Data Codes 104 Mtr 2 grs load, 105 Mtr 3 grs load, and 106 Mtr 4

grs load as required for each defined flow meter / component combination. Only program

codes for defined flow meter / component combinations are displayable.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


# The Dynamic Data Display can now display the Mtr m grs load parameter for each defined

flow meter / component combination. The value of the active Mtr m grs load parameter

is obtained and entered in the meter proof form during a meter proof.

Note: See Section 6 for a complete list of Dynamic Data Codes and see Appendix B for the

sixteen default assignments (PC's 680 through 695).

Meter Factor Calculation

The method described below for calculating a new meter factor for a DanLoad 6000 generally

follows the published API method with the following modifications.

# The API standard uses the flow meter registration which is the indicated volume without

the current meter factor applied. The DanLoad 6000 parameter Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx

is the gross volume with the current meter factor for the active component / flow rate

combination applied. The meter proof calculations described in this section provide an

adjustment number which is multiplied by the current meter factor to determine the value

of the new meter factor. (Note: The meter factor calculation must be performed properly

or large errors in flow measurement accounting can occur.)

# The API standard uses compensation for the effect of pressure on the on the liquid (factor

PLx PLxC ) which is rarely used at a load rack installation. To ignore C , enter 1.0000 in the

PLxequation. (Note: The handling of C must be determined by local regulations and the

policy of your organization and clients.)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


# The API standard uses compensation for the effect of temperature on the liquid (factor

TLx PLxC ) and compensation for the effect of pressure on the liquid (factor C ) for both the

master meter and the rack meter. Many organizations consider that the master meter and

the rack meter are operating at identical process conditions during meter proving batch

TLx PLxdeliveries. Therefore, C and C are ignored and entered as 1.0000 in the equations

TLx PLxfor both the master meter and the rack meter. (Note: The handling of C and C must

be determined by local regulations and the policy of your organization and clients.)

The relation between the API volume designations and prover tank, master meter, and rack meter

quantities are indicated in the following table.

API Volume Prover Tank Master Meter Rack Meter

indicated volume equal to:

indicated volume

which is equal to:

gross volume

equal to:

indicated volume

which is equal to:

registered volume

equal to:

indicated volume

which is equal to:

registered volume

gross volume equal to:

gross volume

which is equal to:

indicated volume

indicated volume x meter

factor

indicated volume x

meter factor

which is obtained from:

(Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx)

gross volume at standard

temperatureT SP T L P T L P T L Mgross volume x C x C gross volume x C gross volume x C

T SP T L Pgross standard volume gross volume x C x C gross volume at standard

P LPtemperature x C

gross volume at standard

P LMtemperature x C

Prover / Meter Volume Relationship

Figure 5 - 1

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


The table Prover / Meter Volume Relationship, Figure 5 - 1, shows relation of meter quantities

to the prover tank for information only. Note the following points.

# The prover tank is a fixed volume tank in which the volume is measured at the nominal

atmospheric pressure. Therefore, the following factors, which do not apply to the prover

tank, are ignored and considered to be equal to 1.0000.

# meter factor

PSP# C (Effect of pressure on the steel of the vessel.)

PLP# C (Effect of pressure on the volume of the liquid.)

This means that the volume delivered to the prover tank can be considered to be indicated

volume which is also equal to gross volume because a meter factor is not required to adjust

the prover tank volume. Only temperature correction factors can be applied to the liquid

volume delivered to the prover tank.

# The pressure correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the flow meter

PLx(C ) is usually ignored and considered to be equal to 1.0000 for rack operations.

# The Dynamic Data Display element Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx in the DanLoad 6000 is an

accumulator for gross volume with a resolution of hundreds of a volume unit, such as

gallons.

The meter proof methods described using a rack meter connected to a DanLoad 6000 use values

obtained from the Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx accumulator. The basic calculation sequence, without

temperature correction factors, is described below.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Meter proving calculation 1:

Calculate the volume error between the prover volume (prover tank or master meter) and the

rack meter measured volume.

rack meter volume error = corrected delivery volume - rack meter

corrected

gross volume

where:

rack meter volume error The difference in the volume delivered to or measured by the prover

and the rack meter corrected gross volume.

corrected delivery volume # prover tank: The volume, corrected for the effect of

temperature on the tank steel and the liquid, delivered to the

prover tank.

# master meter: The volume measured by the master meter,

corrected by the master meter meter-factor, the effect of

temperature on the liquid measured, and optionally the

effect of pressure on the liquid measured.

rack meter corrected gross volume

The volume obtained from the Dynamic Data Display element Mtr

m grs load, corrected for the effect of temperature on the liquid

measured and optionally the effect of pressure on the liquid

measured.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________



Calculate the percentage error between the prover volume (prover tank or master meter) and the

rack meter measured volume.

rack meter volume error

rack meter percent error = ---------------------------------


where:

rack meter percent error The percentage of error in the corrected volume delivery.

rack meter volume error The difference in the volume delivered to or measured by the prover

and the rack meter corrected gross volume (obtained from

calculation 1).





measured.

If this calculation produces a percentage error that is within the tolerances of the regulating

organizations and your organization, the current meter factor is considered to be acceptable and

no further action is required. The exact value must be determined by the governing regulations.

Example: A typical calculation might produce a result of 0.01 which is equal to one percent

error.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Calculate the adjustment to be applied to the current meter factor, if it has been determined that

the percentage of error (calculation 2) is not acceptable.

prover corrected gross volume

adjustment = ---------------------------------


where:

adjustment A mathematical factor that is multiplied by the current rack meter

factor to obtain the new meter factor, this number represents the

error in the current meter factor (THIS NUMBER IS NOT THE

NEW METER FACTOR).

prover corrected gross volume

# prover tank: The volume, corrected for the effect of

temperature on the tank steel and the liquid, delivered to the

prover tank.

# master meter: The volume measured by the master meter,

corrected by the master meter factor, the effect of

temperature on the liquid measured, and optionally the

effect of pressure on the liquid measured.





measured. (Note: This volume is the gross volume with the current

meter factor applied. The use of the gross volume in the calculation

is the reason that the new meter factor cannot be calculated by this

step.)

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________



Calculate the new meter factor which will be manually entered in PC ccc Comp p meter factor f

corresponding to the active PC ccc Comp p flow rate r.

new meter factor = adjustment x rack meter current meter-factor

where:

new meter factor The calculated meter factor that must be manually entered for PC

ccc Comp p meter factor f to correct the measurement error in

future flow measurement.

adjustment The mathematical adjustment factor obtained from calculation 3

above.

rack meter current meter-factor

The current meter factor for the rack meter, obtained from PC ccc

Comp p meter factor f before the meter proof sequence is started.

Three examples of meter factor calculations are provided below. The calculations show the

relation between the measured quantities and the meter factor adjustments required. To simplify

the examples, the temperature and pressure corrections are disregarded.

Assume that the volume accumulated Mtr m grs load is 1000.00 gallons and that the rack meter

current active meter factor is 1.0123 for the component / flow rate combination. Then the

indicated volume is equal to 987.85 gallons.

Equation:

1000.00 987.85 = ------------- 1.0123

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Example 1: Correct delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:

Parameter Value

corrected delivery volume 1000.00 gallons

Mtr m grs load 1000.00 gallons

RACK METER VOLUME ERROR 0 gallons

(1000.00 - 1000.00)

RACK METER PERCENT ERROR 0 percent

(0 / 1000.00)

ADJUSTMENT 1

(1000.00 / 1000.00)

RACK METER CURRENT METER-FACTOR 1.0123

NEW METER FACTOR 1.0123 (no change)

(1 x 1.0123)

In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter exactly equals the

volume delivered to the prover tank or measured through the master meter. Since the delivered

corrected gross volume is exactly equal to the rack meter corrected gross volume, the

current_meter_factor is correct. The new_meter_factor value is exactly equal to the

current_meter_factor value. Therefore, the current meter factor, 1.0123, should not be

changed.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


Example 2: One percent over delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:

Parameter Value



RACK METER VOLUME ERROR 10 gallons

(1010.00 - 1000.00)

RACK METER PERCENT ERROR 0.01 (1 percent over delivery)

(10 / 1000.00)

ADJUSTMENT 1.01

(1010.00 / 1000.00)


NEW METER FACTOR 1.0224

(1.01 x 1.0123)

In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter is less than the volume

delivered to the prover tank or measured through the master meter. Since the delivered corrected

gross volume is greater than the rack meter corrected gross volume, the current_meter_factor is

less than it should be. Therefore, the new_meter_factor (1.0224) should be manually entered

for the value of the active PC ccc Comp p meter factor f.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Example 3: One percent under delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:

Parameter Value



RACK METER VOLUME ERROR -10 gallons

(990.00 - 1000.00)

RACK METER PERCENT ERROR -0.01 (1 percent under delivery)

(-10 / 1000.00)

ADJUSTMENT 0.99

(990.00 / 1000.00)


NEW METER FACTOR 1.0022

(0.99 x 1.0123)

In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter is greater than the

volume delivered to the prover tank or measured through the master meter. Since the delivered

corrected gross volume is less than the rack meter corrected gross volume, the

current_meter_factor is greater than it should be. Therefore, the new_meter_factor (1.0022)

should be manually entered for the value of the active PC ccc Comp p meter factor f.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


5.1.1 Initial Setup

The examples above do not include temperature compensation calculations. However, during

actual meter proving, these calculations must be performed. Before starting meter proving,

obtain a copy of Table A-1 - Temperature Correction Factors for Mild Steel or Table A-2 -

Temperature Correction Factors for Stainless Steel from API MPMS Chapter 12 - Section 2 -

Instructions for Calculating Liquid Petroleum Quantities Measured by Turbine or Displacement

TSPMeters for use in calculating C . And obtain a copy of Table 6A, 6B, 6C, 24A, 24B, or 24C

TLP TLMfrom API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Volume Correction Factors for use in calculating C and C .

Perform the following preliminary steps:

# OPEN the Weights & Measures switch (release to extended position)

# Enter Program Mode (press PROGRAM (ALT + ENTER) key)

# Enter Passcode in response to prompt message

# Enter Setup Mode (with box cursor on Setup selection, press ENTER key)

# Access and change program codes as described below (refer to the tables located at the

end of this section for program code information)

# If the DanLoad 6000 is a multi-component blender, specify a meter proof recipe as

described above to select the desired component for proof. If the DanLoad 6000 delivers

only one component, recipe number 1, which specifies a one component to one flow

meter relationship, is selected automatically.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


# 169 Number of factors/component

Set to 1 to force continuous low flow rate for first meter proof (see additional information

below).

# 170 Meter factor method

Set to fixed so that meter factor interpolation based on flow rate is disabled.

# [171, 182, 193, 204] Nominal K-factor

Obtain actual meter K-factor from flow meter nameplate and round to nearest tenth, enter

result (example: nameplate K-factor is 23.403, enter 23.4).

# [172, 183, 194, 205] Master meter factor

Divide PC ccc Nominal K-factor by actual K-factor from nameplate and round to four

decimal places. [Example: 23.4 divided by 23.403 = 0.9999, enter result (0.9999)].

(Note: The ccc Master meter factor is used to establish a plus / minus two percent limit

for entries in the four PC's ccc Comp p flow rate r of the related component, this

parameter is not used in volume calculations.)

# If an existing preset system that uses an effective K-factor for each flow rate is replaced by

a DanLoad 6000, the DanLoad 6000 requires a nominal K-factor and meter factor for each

flow rate. Set PC [171, 182, 193, 294] Nominal K-factor as indicated above, enter PC

ccc Comp p meter factor f as PC ccc Nominal K-factor divided by the effective K-factor for

the flow rate and rounded to four decimal places.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


The following two parameter group entries are required for all defined components:

# [174, 185, 196, 207] Comp p flow rate 1

This parameter should be set to the desired low flow start / low flow stop flow rate that

will be used in actual loading of the indicated component p. The first flow meter proof

will always be at this flow rate.

# [175, 186, 197, 208] Comp p meter factor 1

This parameter is the actual meter factor that is used to calibrate the flow meter registration

when the flow is at the flow rate set in the corresponding PC ccc Comp p flow rate 1. This

number should have been recorded in an operational installation as the current meter

factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor.

The following two parameter group entries are required for all defined components in a two

stage (low flow / normal flow) loading system:

# [176, 187, 198, 209] Comp p flow rate 2

This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow or first fall back flow rate that

will be used in actual loading of the indicated component p.



when the flow is at the flow rate set in the corresponding ccc Comp p flow rate 2

parameter. This number should have been recorded in an operational installation as the

current meter factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor. If this is a new

installation or the rack meter has never been proved in this installation, enter the value of

PC [172, 183, 194, 205] Master meter factor corresponding to the component number.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


The following four parameter group entries are required for all defined components only in

loading systems that define three or four flow rates for loading:

# [178, 189, 200, 211] Comp p flow rate 3

This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow or second fall back flow rate

that will be used in actual loading of the indicated component p.





factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor. If this is a new installation or the

rack meter has never been proved in this installation, enter the value of PC [172, 183,

194, 205] Master meter factor corresponding to the component number.

# [180, 191, 202, 213] Comp p flow rate 4

This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow rate that will be used in actual

loading of the indicated component p.





factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor.

# As mentioned above, the meter factor for PC ccc Comp p factor 1 will always be

determined first. To assure continued flow at PC ccc Comp p flow rate 1 rate, set PC

169 Number of factors/component to 1.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


5.2 Tank Prover Method

Rack meters, or a master meter, are proved with a tank prover by loading a batch of one product

at one flow rate to the prover tank. The frequency of meter proofs of rack meters must be

determined by company policy or regional regulations. Rack meters should be proved on each

product and at the normal delivery flow rate for each product. The set of proofs of the rack

meters provide a list of meter factors related to each product / flow rate combination. The

corresponding meter factor is then entered into the DanLoad 6000 and is automatically active when

the related product / flow rate combination is active.

A meter proof is performed by the tank prover method in the following manner.

# A meter proof wetting run should be performed first to wet the prover tank and help

stabilize the temperature in the rack meter / prover tank circuit. The wetting run is a proof

run without recording data.

# A liquid batch that will fill the tank prover to a liquid level visible in the graduated section

is defined and delivered to a prover tank.

# Proof data is gathered and manual calculations are performed to determine the error

between the prover tank volume (corrected for temperature) and the and the flow meter

registration (corrected for temperature).

# The volume and percentage error are calculated. If necessary, a new meter factor is

calculated.

# The new meter factor, which should always be near 1.0000, is manually entered into the

DanLoad 6000 for the active PC ccc Comp p meter factor f, where ccc is one of the

following PC's: 175, 177, 179, 181, 186, 188, 190, 192, 197, 199, 201, 203,

208, 210, 212, or 214 dependent on the component number p (1 to 4) and the meter

factor number f (1 to 4).

# The prover tank can be drained and the steps listed above are repeated and the results

averaged, if desired.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


5.2.1 Tank Prover Meter-Proof RUN 1

For this example, assume that the loading system is a two component blender and that each

component is loaded at one of three flow rates [low flow start / stop, fall back, and normal

(high) flow]. Any other configuration, from a one component - one flow rate system to a four

component - four flow rate system is proved in a similar manner by proving each component

(flow meter) at each flow rate, in flow rate ascending order. The component order of proving

is not important.

# Make the system mechanically and electrically ready for delivery of a liquid batch to the

prover tank.

# Select the previously defined recipe for proving component 1 (recipe definitions are in the

PC's 480 to 660).

# Set PC 169 Number of factors/component, to 1 to assure that only the flow rate is used.

# Verify or set the low flow rate with PC 174.

# Exit the Setup Menu

# At the Loading Display, enter the preset volume as the volume of the prover tank.

# Initiate the batch delivery to the prover tank.

# Monitor the volume delivered in the dynamic data display. Press SELECT - 9 - 9 keys

to display item 10 (Mtr 1 grs load n.nn). This volume is the gross uncompensated

volume units delivered, adjusted by the current active meter factor, to hundredths of a

volume unit.

# After the delivery is terminated, determine the new meter factor by entering the data in

a copy of the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD form RUN

1 column.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________



At this point the new meter factor, PC 175 Comp 1 meter factor 1, is within tolerance and

accepted. The next higher flow rate, PC 176 Comp 1 flow rate 2, is used to determine the meter

factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 2 is 400 GPM, an fall back flow rate that is used

as a fall-back flow rate if the maximum flow rate cannot be maintained. Set 176 Comp 1 flow rate

2 to 400.

During the meter proof at the low flow rate, the low flow rate was forced active by setting PC

169 Number of factors/component to 1 so that the DanLoad 6000 activates the low flow rate only.

Set PC 169 Number of factors/component to 2 at this time to enable flow at the next higher flow

rate.

The meter proof for component 1 flow rate 2 is performed similar to the meter proof for

component 1 flow rate 1 except that the DanLoad 6000 is permitted to ramp up and ramp down

the flow rate with the flow control valve. The flow rate during start and stop times is determined

by the value of PC 174 Comp 1 flow rate 1.

Example:

If the flow rate is 200 GPM and the start / stop quantities are 50 gallons, the time at low flow is

approximately 15 seconds during startup and 15 seconds during shutdown. All of the program

codes that in any way affect the flow rates, quantities, or meter factors at lower flow rates must

be set to their normal operational values before conducting meter proofs at higher flow rates.

After the rack meter is proved at the highest flow rate for a component. The values of any of the

program codes that affect meter proofs for that component should not be changed. If it is

necessary to re-Prove a rack meter at a flow rate less than the highest flow rate, re-Prove at all

lower flow rates in flow rate ascending order.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




accepted. The next higher flow rate, PC 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3 is used to determine the meter

factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 3 is 600 GPM, the maximum (normal) loading

flow rate for component 1. Set PC 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3 to 600.


component 1 flow rate 2.

5.2.4 Tank Prover RUN 4 (if Required)

If the fourth flow rate for component 1 were defined, the meter proof at this flow rate would be

conducted in a similar manner as described above.

5.2.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2

Assume at this point that the meter factors for component 1 at flow rates 1, 2 , 3, and 4 (as

required) have been determined and entered into PC 175, PC 177, PC 179, and PC 181 (as

required). In order to perform the meter proof or proofs for component 2, component 1 must be

disabled and component 2 enabled. This is accomplished by selecting the previously defined

recipe for proving component 2 (recipe definitions are in the program code group 480 to 660).

The set of from one to four meter proofs, corresponding to flow rates, for component 2 can now

be conducted. Follow the steps described above for meter proof sequences.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


The fields contained in the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD, Figure

5 - 2, are described below.

Field Description

Station Name of station or terminal.

Date / Time Date and time of meter proof.

Meter Tag Process tag number of flow meter.

Meter S/N Serial number of flow meter.

Meter Mfg Manufacturer of flow meter.

Meter Model Model number of flow meter.

Meter Size Diameter of flow meter.

Product Product (component) used for meter proof.

API Gravity @ 60 F The API gravity of the product.o

From Tank No. Source tank identification.

To Prover Tank No. Destination tank identification (prover tank identification).

Initial Totalizer Reading Non-resetable totalizer reading before meter proof.

Prover Tank Volume Data

1 Flow rate The flow rate that is set in the PC ccc Comp p flow rate r

corresponding to the meter proof run. Actual flow rate can be

verified by accurately timing the period of delivery to the prover

tank then dividing the volume delivered by the time to deliver.

Example: 2010.36 gallons delivered in 3 minutes 56 seconds equals

564.7 gallons per minute.

2 Delivery to Prover Tank The gross volume delivered to the prover tank, obtained from

prover tank data and neck sight gauge graduation reading.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Field Description

3 Tank Temp (Avg) F The average temperature of the product in the prover tank, APIo

recommends average of temperature at top, middle, and bottom.

TSP4 C Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the prover tank

steel, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 12 - Section 2 - Table A-1

or Table A-2.

TLP5 C Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the

prover tank, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or

Table 24.

P6 CCF Combined correction factor for the prover tank, obtained by

TSP TLPmultiplying C times C .

7 Corrected Delivery Volume

The volume, corrected for temperature effects, of liquid in the

prover tank, obtained by multiplying Delivery to Tank (line 2)

Ptimes CCF (line 6).

Load Rack Meter Data

8 Mtr m grs load (Final) The accumulated gross volume units at the end of the rack meter

proof run, obtained from the Dynamic data display - Mtr 1 grs

load, Mtr 2 grs load, Mtr 3 grs load, or Mtr 4 grs load as

applicable. (Note: This value is uncompensated gross volume with

the current active meter factor applied.)

9 Mtr m grs load (Initial) The meter registration for gross volume before the meter proof run

is started, equal to 0 at start of delivery.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


Field Description

10 Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume

The gross volume accumulated during the meter proof run,

obtained by subtracting Mtr m grs load (Final) from Mtr m grs load

(Initial).

11 Rack Meter Temperature

The temperature of the product close to the upstream or downstream

side of the flow meter (usually upstream).

TLM12 C Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the

flow meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or

TLMTable 24. (Note: C is set to 1.0000 if the pulse input from the

flow meter is temperature compensated in the field, before input to

the DanLoad 6000.)

13 Rack Meter Pressure The pressure of the product close to the upstream or downstream


PLM14 C Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the flow

meter, usually set to 1.000 and not considered, refer to the API

MPMS for additional information.

M15 CCF Combined correction factor for the flow meter, obtained from

TLM PLMmultiplying C times C .

16 Rack Meter Corrected Gross Volume

The temperature (and optionally, pressure) compensated volume

accumulated by the rack meter during the meter proving, obtained

Mby multiplying Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume times CCF .

17 Rack Meter Volume Error

The difference between the corrected delivery volume to the prover

tank and the rack meter corrected gross volume.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Field Description

18 Rack Meter Percent Error

The percent of error in the rack meter accumulated volume

19 Adjustment a calculated number that is used to adjust the current active meter

factor.

20 Current Meter Factor The current active meter factor obtained from PC ccc Comp p meter

factor f corresponding to the component / flow rate combination

being proved. (Obtained from: PC 175, 177, 179, 181, 186,

188, 190, 192, 197, 199, 201, 203, 208, 210, 212, or 214.)

21 New Meter Factor The new_meter_factor is derived from the meter proof run,

obtained by multiplying the current meter factor by the adjustment.

Test personnel block Lines to document the personnel conducting and witnessing the

meter proof runs, form should be altered as required by your

company.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


5.3 Master Meter Method

A master meter is a flow meter that is used as a reference standard for volume measurement

comparison with rack meters. The volume measured by the master meter is determined by

proving the master meter with a tank prover. The frequency of meter proofs of the master meter

must be determined by company policy or regional regulations. As a minimum, the master meter

should be proved twice a year. If the master meter is proved in mid spring and mid fall, the

measurement accuracy of the master meter will be approximately adjusted for seasonal temperature

changes that affect the temperature of the products handled. The master meter must be proved on

each product and at the normal delivery flow rate for each product. The set of proofs of the

master meter provide a list of meter factors related to each product / flow rate combination. The

corresponding meter factor is then used in the calculation when proving a rack meter with the

same product / flow rate combination.

A meter proof is performed by the master meter method in the following manner.

# Set the loading system valves to the proper positions so that all flow through the rack meter

to be proved is routed in series with the master meter. Assure that no leakage or bypass

paths are present at either flow meter or interconnecting pipe.

# Connect an electronic prover counter to the raw pulse output of the master meter.

# A meter proof stabilizing run should be performed first to help stabilize the temperature

in the proof meter / master meter circuit. The stabilizing run is a proof run without data

recorded.

# A liquid batch that satisfies the minimum proof batch requirements stated in the definition

of Master Meter Proof at the beginning of this section is defined and delivered to a tank.

# Proof data is gathered and manual calculations are performed to determine the error

between the master meter volume [corrected for temperature (and optionally pressure)]

and the and the proof flow meter registration [corrected for temperature (and optionally

pressure)].

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


# A new meter factor is calculated by dividing the volume measured through the master

meter by the volume registered by the proof flow meter. The measured through the master

meter and the volume registered by the proof flow meter are compensated for the effect

of temperature on the liquid, and optionally compensated for the effect of pressure on the

liquid. If compensation calculation is performed for either the master meter or the proof

flow meter, a similar compensation calculation must be performed for the other flow

meter.

# Under delivery: If the flow meter registered delivery volume (Mtr m grs load)

during the proof run is greater than the volume measured by the master meter, the

meter factor value will be decreased to correct the flow meter measurement error.

# Over delivery: If the flow meter registered delivery volume (Mtr m grs load)

during the proof run is less than the volume measured by the master meter, the

meter factor value will be increased to correct the flow meter measurement error.

# The new meter factor, which should always be near 1.0000, is manually entered into the

DanLoad 6000 for the active PC ccc Comp p meter factor f, where ccc is one of the

following PC's: [175, 177, 179, 181, 186, 188, 190, 192, 197, 199, 201, 203,

208, 210, 212, or 214] dependent on the component number p (1 to 4) and the meter

factor number f (1 to 4).

# The prover counter is manually reset to zero and the steps listed above are repeated until

the corrected meter registration is within 0.02 percent of the corrected prover volume.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


5.3.1 Master Meter Meter-Proof RUN 1

For this example, assume that the loading system is a two component blender and that each

component is loaded at one of three flow rates [low flow start / stop, fall back, and normal

(high) flow]. Any other configuration, from a one component - one flow rate system to a four

component - four flow rate system is proved in a similar manner by proving each component

(flow meter) at each flow rate, in flow rate ascending order. The component order of proving

is not important.

# Make the system mechanically and electrically ready for delivery of a liquid batch through

the master meter by connecting the master meter in series with the rack meter by high

integrity block valves. All flow must pass through both the master meter and the rack

meter no bypass leakage is allowed.

# Connect the master meter to a flow totalizer capable of measuring and displaying indicated

volume units (without internal meter factor or temperature / pressure compensation) to

a resolution of one one-hundredth of a volume unit (such as gallons).

# Select the previously defined recipe for proving component 1 (recipe definitions are in the

PC 480 to 660).

# Set PC 169 Number of factors/component to 1 to assure that one the low flow rate is used.

# Verify or set the low flow rate with PC 174.

# Exit the Setup Menu

# At the Loading Display, enter the preset volume as the minimum proving volume

required.

# Initiate the batch delivery.

# Monitor the volume delivered in the dynamic data display. Press SELECT - 9 - 9 keys

to display item 10 (Mtr 1 grs load n.nn). This volume is the gross uncompensated

volume units delivered, adjusted by the current active meter factor, to hundredths of a

volume unit.

# After the delivery is terminated, determine the new meter factor by entering the data in

a copy of the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD form RUN

1 column.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000





factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 2 is 400 GPM, an fall back flow rate that is used

as a fall-back flow rate if the maximum flow rate cannot be maintained. Set PC 176 Comp 1 flow

rate 2 to 400.

Set PC 169 Number of factors/component to 2 at this time to enable flow at the next higher flow

rate. The meter proof for component 1 flow rate 2 is performed similar to the meter proof for

component 1 flow rate 1 except that the DanLoad 6000 is permitted to ramp up and ramp down

the flow rate with the flow control valve. The flow rate during start and stop times is determined

by the value of PC 174 Comp 1 flow rate 1.

Example:

If the flow rate is 200 GPM and the start / stop quantities are 50 gallons, the time at low flow is

approximately 15 seconds during startup and 15 seconds during shutdown. All of the program

codes that in any way affect the flow rates, quantities, or meter factors at lower flow rates must

be set to their normal operational values before conducting meter proofs at higher flow rates.

After the rack meter is proved at the highest flow rate for a component. The values of any of the

program codes that affect meter proofs for that component should not be changed. If it is

necessary to re-Prove a rack meter at a flow rate less than the highest flow rate, re-Prove at all

lower flow rates in flow rate ascending order.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________





factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 3 is 600 GPM, the maximum (normal) loading

flow rate for component 1. Set PC 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3, to 600.


component 1 flow rate 2.

5.3.4 Master Meter Meter-Proof RUN 4 (if Required)

If the fourth flow rate for component 1 were defined, the meter proof at this flow rate would be

conducted in a similar manner as described above.

5.3.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2

Assume at this point that the meter factors for component 1 at flow rates 1, 2 , 3, and 4 (as

required) have been determined and entered into PC 175, 177, 179, and 181 (as required).

In order to perform the meter proof or proofs for component 2, component 1 must be disabled

and component 2 enabled. This is accomplished by selecting the previously defined recipe for

proving component 2 (recipe definitions are in PC 480 to 660).

The set of from one to four meter proofs, corresponding to flow rates, for component 2 can now

be conducted. Follow the steps described above for meter proof sequences.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


The fields contained in the METER PROVING REPORT FOR MASTER METER METHOD,

Figure 5 - 3, are described below.

Field Description

Station Name of station or terminal.

Date / Time Date and time of meter proof.

Product Product (component) used for meter proof.

API Gravity @ 60 F The API gravity of the product.o

From Tank No. Source tank identification.

To Tank No. Destination tank / vehicle identification.

Initial Totalizer Reading Non-resetable totalizer reading before meter proof.

Master Meter Volume Data

1 Flow rate The flow rate that is set in the PC ccc Comp p flow rate r

corresponding to the meter proof run. Actual flow rate can be

verified by accurately timing the period of delivery then dividing the

volume delivered by the time to deliver. Example: 2010.36 gallons

delivered in 3 minutes 56 seconds equals 564.7 gallons per minute.

2 Master Meter Final Reading

The indicated volume at the end of a rack meter proving run,

obtained from a totalizer connected to the master meter.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


Field Description

3 Master Meter Initial Reading

The indicated volume at the start of a rack meter proving run,

obtained from a totalizer connected to the master meter.

4 Master Meter Indicated Volume

The indicated volume measured by the master meter during the

meter proving run. Master Meter Final Reading minus Master

Meter Initial Reading.

5 Master Meter Temperature, degrees F

The temperature of the product in the master meter during the meter

TLPproving run, used to derive C .

TLP6 C Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the

master meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or

Table 24.

7 Master Meter Pressure, PSIG

The pressure of the product in the master meter during the meter

PLPproving run, used to derive C .

PLP8 C Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the

master meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.2.

9 Master Meter Meter-Factor

The current active meter factor for the master meter obtained from

a tank prover meter proving of the master meter. The current

master meter factor should for the same product and flow rate that

is used in proving the rack meter. A table is provided at the end of

this section for recording master meter factors.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Field Description

P10 CCF Combined correction factor for the master meter, obtained by

TLP PLPmultiplying C times C times the master meter meter-factor.

11 Master Meter Corrected Gross Volume

The volume, corrected for temperature effect (and optionally

pressure effect), of liquid in measured by the master meter,

obtained by multiplying Master Meter Indicated Volume (line 4

Ptimes CCF (line 10).

Rack meter Data

12 Mtr m grs load (Final) The accumulated gross volume units at the end of the rack meter

proof run, obtained from the Dynamic data display - Mtr 1 grs

load, Mtr 2 grs load, Mtr 3 grs load, or Mtr 4 grs load as

applicable. (Note: This value is uncompensated gross volume with

the current active meter factor applied.)

13 Mtr m grs load (Initial)

The meter registration for gross volume before the meter proof run

is started. Equal to 0 at start of delivery.

14 Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume

The gross volume accumulated during the meter proof run,

obtained by subtracting Mtr m grs load (Final) from Mtr m grs load

(Initial).

15 Rack Meter Temperature

The temperature of the product close to the upstream or downstream


DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


Field Description

TLM16 C Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the

flow meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or

TLMTable 24. (Note: C is set to 1.0000 if the pulse input from the

flow meter is temperature compensated in the field, before input to

the DanLoad 6000.)

17 Rack Meter Pressure The pressure of the product close to the upstream or downstream


PLM18 C Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the rack

meter, usually set to 1.000 and not considered, refer to the API

MPMS for additional information.

M19 CCF Combined correction factor for the rack meter, obtained from

TLM PLMmultiplying C times C .

20 Rack Meter Corrected Gross Volume

The temperature (and optionally, pressure) compensated volume

accumulated by the rack meter during the meter proving, obtained

Mby multiplying Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume times CCF .

21 Rack Meter Volume Error

The difference between the Master Meter Corrected Volume and the

Rack Meter Corrected Gross Volume.

22 Rack Meter Percent Error

The percent of error in the rack meter accumulated volume.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Field Description

23 Adjustment A calculated number that is used to adjust the current active meter

factor.

24 Rack Meter Current Meter-Factor

The current active meter factor obtained from PC ccc Comp p meter

factor f corresponding to the component / flow rate combination

being proved. (Obtained from: PC 175, 177, 179, 181, 186,

188, 190, 192, 197, 199, 201, 203, 208, 210, 212, or 214)

25 New Rack Meter Factor

The new_meter_factor is derived from the meter proof run,

obtained by multiplying the current meter factor by the adjustment.

Test personnel block Lines to document the personnel conducting and witnessing the

meter proof runs, form should be altered as required by your

company.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


PC’s 169 to 214 are used to calibrate the DanLoad 6000 for each flow meter, component, flow

rate combination.

Code Parameter

Default

Attribute

Options /

Values

Default

Value

Value to Use During

Meter Proof

METER FACTORS

169 Number of factors/component W&M 1 to 4 2 temporarily set to 1

170 Meter factor method W&M Fixed

Linear

Fixed

COMPONENT 1 FACTORS

171 Nominal K-factor W&M 0.5 to 200.0 23.0 round meter nameplate K-

factor to nearest tenth

172 Master meter factor W&M 0.5000 to 2.0000 PC 171 / nameplate K-factor

COMPONENT 1 FACTOR 1

174 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 200 set to desired low flow rate

175 Meter factor 1 W&M see text


176 Flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 600 set to desired fall back or

high flow rate



178 Flow rate 3 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or

high flow rate




high flow rate


COMPONENT 2 FACTORS

182 Nominal K-factor W&M 0.5 to 200.0 round meter nameplate K-





high flow rate


_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Code Parameter Attribute Options Default Meter Proof



high flow rate




high flow rate




high flow rate


COMPONENT 3 FACTORS






high flow rate




high flow rate




high flow rate




high flow rate


DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________


Code Parameter Attribute Options Default Meter Proof

COMPONENT 4 FACTORS





207 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired high flow rate











METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD Report:

STATIO N M E TER TAG M E TER S/N D ATE TIM E

M ETER M FG M ETER M OD EL M ETER S IZE PRO DU CT API GR AVITY @ 60 FO

FR O M TAN K NO . TO PR O VER TAN K NO . IN IT IAL TO TALIZER R EAD IN G

PR O VER TAN K VO LU M E D ATA R U N 1 R U N 2 R U N 3 R U N 4

1 FLOW RATE

2 D ELIVER Y TO PR O VER TAN K

3 PRO VER TANK TEM PERATUR E (AVG ), DEG REES F

T S P4 C (TABLE A-1 / A-2)

T L P5 C (TABLE 6)

P6 C O M B IN ED C OR R EC TIO N FAC TO R CCF(L INE 4 X L INE 5)

7 C O R R EC TED D ELIVER Y VO LU M E

(L INE 2 X L INE 6)

R AC K M ETE R D ATA [DANLO AD 6000] R U N 1 R U N 2 R U N 3 R U N 4

8 MTR M G R S LO AD (FIN AL)

9 MTR M G R S LO AD (IN IT IAL)

10 R AC K M ETER M EASU R ED G R O SS VO LU M E

(L INE 8 - L INE 9)

11 R AC K M ETER TEM P ER ATU R E, DEG REES F

T L M12 C (TABLE 6)

13 R AC K M ETER PR ESSU R E, PSIG

P L M14 C (CH AP 11.2)

M15 C O M B IN ED C OR R EC TIO N FAC TO R CCF(L INE 12 X L INE 14)

16 R AC K M ETER C O R R EC TED G R O SS VO LU M E

(L INE 10 X L INE 15)

17 R AC K M ETER VO LU M E ER R O R (L INE 7 - L INE 16)

18 R AC K M ETER PER C EN T ER R O R (L INE 17 / L INE 16)

19 ADJUSTM ENT (L INE 7 / L INE 16)

20 RACK M ETER C UR REN T M ETER-FAC TO R

21 N EW M E TER FAC TO R (L INE 19 X L INE 20)

SIG N ATU R E D ATE R EPR ESEN TIN G

ENG INEER

W ITNESS

R EM AR K S

Figure 5 - 2 (Typical)

METER PROVING REPORT FOR MASTER METER METHOD Report:

STATIO N : FR O M TAN K NO : TO TAN K NO : DATE: TIM E:

PR O D UC T: API GR AVITY @ 60 F: IN IT IAL TO TALIZER R EAD IN G :O

M ASTER M ETER D ATA M FG : M OD EL: SER IAL N O: S IZE: K-FAC TO R :

M ASTER M ETER VO LU M E D ATA R U N 1 R U N 2 R U N 3 R U N 4 R U N 5 AVER AG E

1 FLOW RATE

2 M ASTER M ETER FIN AL R EAD IN G

3 M ASTER M ETER IN IT IAL R EAD IN G

4 M ASTER M ETER IN D IC ATED VO LU M E

(L INE 2 - L INE 3)

5 M ASTER M ETER TEM P ER ATU R E, DEG REES F

T L P6 C (TAB LE 6)

7 M ASTER M ETER PR ESSU R E, PSIG

P L P8 C (CH AP 11.2)

9 M ASTER M ETER M ETER-FAC TO R

P10 C O M B IN ED C OR R EC TIO N FAC TO R CCF(L INE 6 X L INE 8 X L INE 9)

11 M ASTER M ETER C O R R EC TED G R O SS VO LU M E


R AC K M ETE R VO LU M E D ATA [DANLO AD 6000] R U N 1 R U N 2 R U N 3 R U N 4 R U N 5 AVER AG E

12 MTR M G R S LO AD (FIN AL)

13 MTR M G R S LO AD (IN IT IAL)

14 R AC K M ETER M EASU R ED G R O SS VO LU M E

(L INE 12 - L INE 13)

15 R AC K M ETER TEM P ER ATU R E, DEG REES F

T L M16 C (TAB LE 6)

17 R AC K M ETER PR ESSU R E, PSIG

P L M18 C (CH AP 11.2)

M19 C O M B IN ED C OR R EC TIO N FAC TO R CCF(L INE 16 X L INE 18)

20 R AC K M ETER C O R R EC TED G R O SS VO LU M E


21 R AC K M ETER VO LU M E ER R O R (L INE 11 - L INE 20)

22 R AC K M ETER PER C EN T ER R O R (L INE 21 / L INE 20)

23 ADJUSTM ENT (L INE 11 / L INE 20)

24 RACK M ETER C UR REN T M ETER-FAC TO R

25 N EW R AC K M ETER FAC TO R (L INE 23 X L INE 24)

SIG N ATU R E D ATE R EPR ESEN TIN G

ENG INEER

W ITNESS

R EM AR K S

Figure 5 - 3 (Typical)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


This table contains meter factors for the master meter derived from tank prover proving of themaster meter on up to four different products at up to four different flow rates for each product.The master meter meter-factors are related to component / flow rate assignments within theDanLoad 6000 for reference during proving of rack meters.

MASTER METER:

Manufacturer / model: ___________________________________________________

Size: _________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _________________________________________________________

Nominal K-factor: ______________________________________________________

Product

(component)

Meter Factor

Date Master Meter Flow Rate Master Meter Meter-Factor

174 Comp 1 flow rate 1 175 Comp 1 meter factor 1
















DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________



Section 6

Program Codes

Program Code Attributes

Program Codes

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 1

This section contains information on Program Codes. ProgramCodes are parameters which define the operation of theDanLoad 6000 Preset. Each Program Code is a setup /configuration / database value that consists of the following fourparts: a three digit program code, program codedescription/name, program code value, and program codeattribute. Each program code number / name combinationidentifies a unique parameter that is either a setpoint or limitvalue or an option that defines some method or mode ofoperation. Data entry in a value / option field is accomplishedby prompting the user to enter a numeric value, enter an alpha-numeric string, or select an option from a short list of options(pick list).

Each program code is associated with a group of five programcode attributes that can be viewed and modified by the operator.Program code attributes can be toggled ON or OFF to providespecific security restrictions and status information for selectedprogram codes.

Program codes are displayed in the following format when theDanLoad 6000 is operating in the Program Mode.

ccc aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa vvv

where:

ccc

A three digit program code, this number is unique for eachparameter. Program codes range from 001 to 831 for Version2.00 of the DanLoad 6000 program. (Note: Several numbersin the series are not used.)

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

An alpha-numeric name of up to thirty-four characters thatspecifies the function of the program code. Some names areused several times when the parameter type is repeated forsimilar functions, such as different meters, components, oradditives. However, the three digit program code is alwaysunique.vvv ...

A value assigned to the parameter at setup time or modified inthe field. Note that the data type displayed and acceptable entryin this field is dependent on the program code variable type.These data types are:

# integer

Whole number without a fractional part or decimalseparator.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


# real number

A number consisting of a whole part, decimal separator,and fractional part.

# alpha-numeric string

A message consisting of letter and number characters.

# <selection>

A predefined option selected from a scroll able short listof options.

Section 3 - Setup Contains information on the procedures usedto enter data in the various types of data fields mentioned above.

<attributes>

Program codes can have up to five attributes that control someaspect of the program code or its interaction with DanLoad 6000functions. These attributes are described in Section 6.1

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.1 Program Code Attributes

Program code attributes are characteristics that are associatedwith each program code. There are a maximum of fiveprogram code attributes for any program code. Some programcode attributes are not applicable for some program codes.

Access to program code attributes is by selection of theProgram Code Attributes option located Program Mode Menu.It is assumed that the DanLoad 6000 is in the loading mode withthe Loading Display active at this time.

Access program code attributes:

# Press the PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER) key.# Enter 1 to 9 digit supervisor passcode in response to

Enter passcode _________ prompt.# Press the ENTER key.# The first display page of the Program Mode Menu is

displayed.# Press the 9 (down arrow) key repeatedly to select

(move the box cursor over the item) Program codeattributes (item five in the list).

# Press the ENTER key.

# Enter the three digit program code in response to the Enterprogram code prompt message. (Note: One or twopreceding zeros must be entered if the program code is lessthan 100.)

# Press the 9 (down arrow) key or the 8 (up arrow) key toselect (move the box outline cursor over the item) thedesired program code attribute.

# Press the SELECT key to toggle the Yes or No status of theprogram code.

Select different program code:

# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key.# Perform steps listed above under Access program code

attributes as desired.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Exit program code attribute modification mode:

# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns toProgram code attributes).

# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns toProgram Code Menu).

# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns toLoading Mode).

The options for program code attributes are described below.

Read only

Restrict modification, in Program Mode, of the value of theprogram code variable. The message, Read only, is displayedon the message line of the display if this attribute is set to Yesfor the corresponding selected program code. (Note: Someprogram codes can only be modified by internal logic orcalculations and are always Read only.)

# No

Disable this attribute for this program code.

# Yes

Enable this attribute for this program code.

Weights and measures

Restrict modification, in both the Loading Mode and theProgram Mode, of the value of the parameter value, unless theWeights and Measures switch located on the operator controlpanel is open (out position) and the user has Supervisoryprivilege set to Yes in the Security Parameters group. Themessage, Weights and measures, is displayed on the messageline of the display if this attribute is set to Yes for thecorresponding selected program code.

# No


# Yes


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Data logging

Automatically log new values of parameters if modified inProgram Mode. The changes are only logged if PC 702Program code value change log is set On.

# No


# Yes

Enable this attribute for this program code. This is thedefault value for all program codes at initial startuptime.

Value changed

The value of the program code variable was changed inProgram Mode. This program code attribute cannot be changedmanually. The program code attribute is set (Yes) internallyif the value was changed and can only be reset (No) by acommand from a Terminal Automation System.

# No

Program code has not been changed in the Program Mode.

# Yes

Program code has been changed in the Program Mode.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Transaction storage

Enable storage of the value of the program code variable in thetransaction storage memory area after each batch delivery iscompleted.

# No


# Yes


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.2 Parameter Groups

Parameters are grouped according to their logical functions.Parameters are accessed by the Setup Menu. Figure 6 - 1 is adiagram of the complete menu tree. Figure 6 - 2 contains anoverview of the parameter groups. Access to the parameters isallowed while in the Program Mode. Access to the ProgramMode from the Loading Mode is described below. It is assumedat this time that the DanLoad 6000 is in the Loading Mode witheither the Recipe Selection Menu, the Additive Selection Menu,or the Loading Display active at this time.

Enter Setup Mode:

# Press the PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER) key.# Enter 1 to 9 digit supervisor passcode in response to:

Enter passcode _________ prompt.# Press the ENTER key.# The first display page of the Program Mode Menu is

displayed.# The box cursor is at the first selection Setup.# Press the ENTER key.# The first display page of the Setup Menu is displayed.# The box cursor is at the first selection Setup.# Press the ENTER key.

# Press the 9 (down arrow) key or the 8 (up arrow) key toselect (move the box cursor over the item) the desiredparameter group from the list of twenty-one groups, dividedinto four display pages.

# Press the ENTER key.# The first display page of the selected parameters group is

displayed.# Press the 9 (down arrow) key or the 8 (up arrow) key to

select (move the box cursor over the item) the desiredparameter in the list. (Note: Parameter lists are dividedinto various display pages as required by the length of thelist. Parameters are not displayed for undefined meters,valves, components, or additives).

# Press the SELECT key to step through pick list options orpress the numeric keys to enter numeric data.

# Note: The displayed data for each program code is enteredfor the program code value when the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR)key is pressed to exit the program code group and the setupmode. Verify that data is correct before exiting a programcode group.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Exit Setup Mode:

# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns toSetup Menu).

# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns toProgram Code Menu).

# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (resets theDanLoad 6000 and returns to the Loading Mode).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Program Mode Menu

Alarm reset 6 Alarm Reset display

Setup 6 Setup Menu )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))), * Program code attributes 6 Program code attributes display * * Set date and time 6 Set date and time display * * Diagnostics 6 Diagnostics Menu )))))))))))))))))), * * * Set contrast/backlighting 6 Set contrast/backlighting display * * 9 9 EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) Diagnostics Menu Setup Menu Firmware versions Security parameters RAM tests Unit parameters Keypad Valve parameters Display Meter parameters Inputs/Outputs Component parameters DUART Delivery parameters ARCNET Digital Valve parameters Crash analysis Pulse per unit outputs Show memory Additive delivery params Show trans memory Factors Exit (ALT+CLEAR) Alarms I/O parameters Additive I/O parameters Component I/O parameters Temp/press/dens Recipes Data communications Dynamic data display Data logging Blending Add. pumps/block valves Exit (ALT+CLEAR)

Menu Tree - Figure 6 - 1

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Parameters Program Code Used For

Security parameters 001 to 024 operation security

Unit parameters 025 to 046 global parameters

Valve parameters 048, 049 flow control valves

Meter parameters 050 to 062 flow meters

Component parameters 065 to 077 liquid components

Delivery parameters 078 to 111 batch deliveries

Digital valve parameters 112 to 127 digital flow control valve

Pulse per unit outputs 128 to 134 volume pulses to external equipment

Additive delivery parameters 135 to 168 additive injection

Factors 169 to 218 flow meter factors

Alarms 219 to 268 actions and limits

I/O parameters 280 to 372 input / output signal assignments

Additive I/O parameters 380 to 397 additive injection signal assignments

Component I/O parameters 400 to 422 component block valve signal assignments

Temperature / pressure / density 426 to 479 quantity correction

Recipes 480 to 660 product / batch deliveries

Data communications 661 to 672 logging / terminal automation system

Dynamic data display 679 to 695 operator data view (programmable)

Data logging 696 to 704 reports to printer

Blending 710 to 799 product blending control

Additive pumps/block valves 800 to 831 additive pump and block valve control

Parameters List Overview - Figure 6 - 2

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


How to Use the Parameters ListThe parameters list on the following pages is in the same orderas, and divided into, the same groups the Setup Menu. Thetables indicate the relation of the various parameter sub-groupsto multiple functions or devices, such as flow meters, flowcontrol valves, components, and additives. Some parametersgroups are sub-divided into several tables for ease of reading.A description of each parameter or parameter type is locatedbelow the corresponding table. When a parameter applies to thegroup of parameters and the program code is unique, the actualprogram code number is indicated in the bold face type in thedescription header. When several parameters have the samefunction (name) but different program codes depending on theactual device or function relation, the program code is indicatedby the place holder ccc in the description header. Programcodes are indicated as PC in the text. Groups of similarprogram codes are enclosed in brackets with comma separatorsbetween the program codes (Example: PC [ccc, ccc, ccc]Name. The vertical columns in the tables indicate the differentsub-groups of parameters and the actual program code numbercan be obtained from the corresponding table. Only parametersfor actual devices or functions that have been specified aredisplayable. Example: If only one flow meter is specified byPC 050 Number of meters, the parameters related to flow meter1 (051 to 052) are displayable and parameters 054 to 062 forflow meters 2, 3, and 4 are not displayable.

Several parameters specify the number of active physicaldevices or functions. This type of parameter allows a 0 entry.In some cases, such as number of flow meters, number of flowcontrol valves, number of components, a 0 entry is not valid,there must be a minimum of one of these items defined in thesystem. In other cases, such as number of additives, a 0 entrydisables that device or function. A 0 entry for an input oroutput logical function disables that function.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Program Code Definitions (001 to 024) _____________________________________________Section 6 - 14

6.3 Security Parameters

FunctionRange / Option<Default / *> User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 User 6 User 7 User 8

Passcode 0 to 999999999<6000>

001 004 007 010 013 016 019 022

User ID 1 to 16 characters<DanLoad 6000>

002 005 008 011 014 017 020 023

Supervisor privilege Yes *No

003 006 009 012 015 018 021 024

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.3 Security Parameters (continued)

Security parameters contain data which defines access passcodesand access privileges for changing parameter values orselections. Security parameters do not affect operation in theLoading Mode which is active during batch deliveries. Up toeight users / operators, each with unique access privileges,can be defined. The DanLoad 6000 is shipped from the factorywith the security parameters for User 1 set to the followingdefault values / selections.

001 Passcode 6000

002 User ID DanLoad 6000

003 Supervisor privilege Yes

ccc Passcode

This parameter assigns a numeric value (one to nine digits) thatis used as a unique passcode for the user. Duplicate passcodes,except for zero (which is not a valid passcode), are notpermitted. A minimum of one passcode must be non-zero.

ccc User ID

This parameter assigns an alpha-numeric entry (one to sixteencharacters) that is used to identify the user / operator with ameaningful name. (Example: Operator # 1, John Jones, orsimilar)

ccc Supervisor privilege

This parameter enables or disables supervisor privilege for thecorresponding user.

# Yes

The corresponding user has supervisor privilege enabled whichallows:

# Access to program codes via the Setup menu selection in theProgram Mode.

# Access to Program code attributes in the Program Mode.# Changing any passcode entry.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.3 Security Parameters (continued)

# No

The corresponding user has supervisor privilege disabledor access to the restricted functions mentioned above isnot permitted.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Program Code Definitions (025 to 046) _____________________________________________ Section 6 - 18

6.4 Unit Parameters

FunctionRange / Option<Default / *> Program Code

Operating mode Auto

Manual *

Stand-alone

025

Unit type Seq. (auto)

Seq. (manual)

In-line

Off-rack

026

Valve type Std digital *

Std 2-stage

027

Language English *

English 2

Chinese

Thai

028

Units mnemonic Off

Bbl

Dek

Lit

Gal *

lbs

kgs

L

l

029

Note: The default option for Unit Type is dependent on options specified during initial setup.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)

Unit Parameters contain data which defines various generaloperating characteristics of the DanLoad 6000.

025 Operating mode

This parameter selects the operating mode of the DanLoad 6000for interaction with a terminal automation system. The datalogging feature operates identically in both the Manual andStand-alone modes. Data logging is not available in the Automode. The operating modes are:

# Auto

A terminal automation system maintains bi-directionalcommunications with the DanLoad 6000 and performsmonitoring and control of the batch delivery operations.If configured, PC 343 Auto/manual changeover isCLOSED to select this option.

# Manual

A terminal automation system can maintain bi-directionalcommunications with the DanLoad 6000 and performsmonitoring of the batch delivery operations. Controlfunctions issued from the terminal automation system are notaccepted by the DanLoad 6000. If configured, PC 343Auto/manual changeover is OPEN to select this option.

# Stand-alone

The DanLoad 6000 operates in an independent local mode.Communications with a terminal automation system is notimplemented.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



026 Unit type

This parameter selects the method of controlling batchdeliveries. The options are:

# Seq. (auto)

Sequential blending is performed. One to fourcomponents are delivered sequentially one at a time. Theblock valves are controlled automatically.

# Seq. (manual)

Sequential blending is performed. One to fourcomponents are delivered sequentially one at a time.The user / operator is prompted for block valve OPEN/ CLOSE control commands via messages displayed onthe message line.

# In-line

In-line proportional or in-line non-proportional blending isperformed. Two or more components are deliveredsimultaneously with each component flow measured by aseparate flow meter and controlled by a separate flowcontrol valve.

# Off-rack

A skid with two to four flow meters and flow control valvesperforms blending before the blend components reach toload spot. The blended composite liquid is then sent to theriser or risers for vehicle loading or returned to a storagetank.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



027 Valve type

This parameter selects the flow control valve type used in thesystem. All flow control valves in the system must be the sametype.

# Std digital

The flow control valve is a standard digital type. Flowcontrol is automatically adjusted to match a setpointvalue.

# Std 2-stage

The flow control valve is a standard 2-stage type. Thelow flow rate and high flow rate are preset by adjustingthe mechanical trip point of one or two stem switches.

028 Language

This parameter selects the language used for the LoadingDisplay and data logging.

# English

# English 2 (English with message numbers appended topermit use of printed code translation cardfor other languages.)

# Chinese Simplified script for China

# Thai Thai script

If the language selection is changed, then changes in the valueof PC 218 Product units mnemonic and PC 250, 252, 254, 256,260, 262, 264 Safety circuit messages should also beconsidered, so that the units mnemonics desplayed next to thelarge loaded quantity, and the safety circuit alarm messages,may be consistent with the selected language.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



029 Product units

This parameter selects the label used for quantity unitsin the batch summary data logs. Note that thisparameter does not affect the quantity unitaccumulations. The K-factor parameters in the Factorsgroup determine the quantity unit accumulations. Themnemonics shown in the loading display are selected viaPC 218 Product Units Mnemonic.

# Off

A quantity units label is not displayed or printed.

# Bbl

The quantity units label is Bbl (barrels).

# Dek

The quantity units label is Dek (dekaLiters).

# Lit

The quantity units label is Lit (liters).

# Gal

The quantity units label is Gal (gallons).

# lbs

The quantity units label is lbs (pounds).

# kgs

The quantity units label is kgs (kilograms).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# L

The quantity units label is L (liters) for ASTM,CIPM (from 1978), IOLM compliance.

# l

The quantity units label is l (liters) for CIPMcompliance.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Number of data item prompts 0 to 5 <0> 030

#1 Enter data item #1 Up to 32 characters<default messages highlighted in Function column>

031

#2 Enter data item #2 Up to 32 characters 032




Prompt time-out (secs) 0 to 9999 <60> 036

Check display Off *StartStart/Restart

037

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



030 Number of data prompts

This parameter sets the number of data prompts in the generalformat Enter data item #1__________, displayed in themessage line of the display panel. The data item prompts maybe displayed as ASCII characters (includes alphanumericalcharacters), script characters of the selected language, or asmixed ASCII and script characters. These prompts allow theoperator to enter from one to five numbers of up to eight digitseach number, before the first preset quantity is entered in theLoading Display. These variables are printed on the BatchSummary and Transaction Summary data logs. If the DanLoad6000 is in a terminal automation system network, the variablesare transmitted to the DanLoad 6000 from the terminalautomation system for accounting purposes. Data item entriesdo not affect the operation of the DanLoad 6000.

Configuring a script message:

The following information is relevent for three groups ofproduct codes. They may be configured to display in a desiredscript language using the script characters available in theDanLoad 6000.

PC’s 31-35 Data item promptsPC 218 Product unit mnemonicsPC’s 250, 252, 254, 256, 258, 260, 262, 264 Safety circuitmessages

Each script language has a set of script characters that areavailable for display on the DanLoad 6000. A script characterhas a character code via which it may be invoked. Thecharacter codes that invoke individual script characters areentered via the alphanumerical string entry.

A script message is formed by a series of character codes. Thescript message is always preceded by a "SCRIPTON" character(FF). The preceding "SCRIPTON" characters activates thebitmaps(script character) defined for the language. The seriesof characters following the "SCRIPTON" character selectsindividual bitmaps (script characters) corresponding to thecharacter code.

The bitmaps defined for the language is de-activated by a"SCRIPTOFF" character (FE). Characters that are preceded bya "SCRIPTOFF" character are displayed "as is".

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



With the use of the "SCRIPTON" and "SCRIPTOFF" escapesequence a message containing a mixture of script characters,and alphanumerical characters may be displayed on theDanLoad 6000 display.

Each script messsage must be preceeded by a SCRIPTON (FF)character and must end with a (FE) character. The charactercodes that invoke a script character in the selected languagewhen preceeded by a "SCRIPTON" (FF) character are shownin Figure 3-10 (Section 3).

031 #1 Enter data item #1

This parameter contains the message to be displayed for dataitem prompt # 1. The default message is Enter data item #1which should be modified to a more descriptive prompt duringsetup. Example: Enter order number:


This parameter contains the message to be displayed for dataitem prompt # 2. The default message is Enter data item #2which should be modified to a more descriptive prompt duringsetup. Example: Enter invoice number:


This parameter contains the message to be displayed for dataitem prompt # 3. The default message is Enter data item #3which should be modified to a more descriptive prompt duringsetup. Example: Enter driver number:


This parameter contains the message to be displayed for dataitem prompt # 4. The default message is Enter data item #4which should be modified to a more descriptive prompt duringsetup. Example: Enter trailer number:

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




This parameter contains the message to be displayed for dataitem prompt # 5. The default message is Enter data item #5which should be modified to a more descriptive prompt duringsetup. Example: Enter permit number:

036 Prompt time-out (secs)

This parameter sets the time period that a data prompt will bedisplayed, before re-displaying the ready display in idle mode.The ready display can be either the Recipe Selection Display,Additive Selection Display, or Loading Display, depending onthe configuration of the instrument. Prompt time-out is disabledin the Program Mode.

037 Check display

This parameter selects the method of verifying the operation ofthe display panel. The fields of the display panel that containnumeric digits are momentarily darkened then lightened toverify that all pixels that form the digits are

displayable. The appropriate “Preset”, “Loaded” and“Remaining” quantities are automatically re-displayed aftercompletion of the test. It is not possible to start or restart thebatch until the check is complete. This function is a diagnostictest and should normally be set Off.

# Off

Disable display panel check function.

# Start

When a batch delivery is initially started, perform thedisplay check prior to displaying the Press START whenready or STOP to cancel on the message line while in theLoading Mode.

# Start/Restart

This parameter selects the display check action when a batchdelivery is initially started or restarted. If enabled, thedisplay check is performed prior to displaying the PressSTART when ready or STOP to cancel on the message linewhile in the Loading Mode.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Date format mm/dd/yy *dd/mm/yyyy/mm/dd

038

Date separator / (slash) *. (dot)- (hyphen)

039

Decimal separator . (dot) *, (comma)

040

Display data rate 1200 bps2400 bps4800 bps9600 bps19200 bps28800 bps *

041

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



038 Date format

This parameter selects the format of the date for display, dateentry, and logging purposes. Selections are indicated in thetable. Displayed / printed ranges are: month - 01 to 12, day -01 to 31, year - 00 to 99.

# mm/dd/yy

# dd/mm/yy

# yy/mm/dd

039 Date separator

This parameter selects the character used to separate the month,day, and year components of the date.

# / <slash>

# . <dot>

# - <hyphen>

040 Decimal separator

This parameter selects the character used to separate the wholepart and fractional part of a real number.

# . <dot>

# , <comma>

041 Display data rate

This parameter selects the rate that data is transferred from theprocessor to the local and remote display panels. Data to / fromthe display panel / keypad is on a dedicated RS-485 serial link,this link is normally operated at 28800 bps. If data errors areobserved, the data speed may be reduced. Operation atreduced data speed should only be necessary in cases where aremote display is located a long distance from the local unit.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Transaction # 0 to 9999 042

Batch # 0 to 9999 043

Additive units cc *in3Gal

044

Round method TruncUp *Up/odd

045

Density/gravity scale 1 to 4 <4> 046

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



042 Transaction #

This parameter indicates the sequence number of the currentactive transaction if one is in progress. If a transaction is notcurrently in progress, this parameter indicates the sequencenumber of the last completed transaction.

043 Batch #

This parameter indicates the sequence number of the currentbatch loading operation if one is in progress. If a batch loadingoperation is not currently in progress, this parameter indicatesthe sequence number of the last completed batch loadingoperation.

044 Additive units

This parameter selects the label that identifies the engineeringunits for measuring the additive injection quantity.

# cc cubic centimeters

# in3 cubic inches

# Gal gallons

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



045 Round method

This parameter selects the method for rounding the displayedand printed batch quantities to whole numbers.

# Trunc

Discard (truncate) accumulated fractions (tenths) of aquantity unit.

# Up

IF fractional accumulation is GREATER THAN orEQUAL TO xxxxx.5, add 1 to the whole unitsaccumulation and discard the fractional accumulation.

# Up/odd

IF whole units accumulation is even AND IF fractional(tenths) accumulation is GREATER THAN xxxxx.5, add1 to the whole units accumulation. OR IF whole unitsaccumulation is odd AND IF fractional (tenths)accumulation is GREATER THAN or EQUAL TO xxxxx.5,add 1 to the whole units accumulation.

046 Density/gravity scale

This parameter defines the number of decimal places in thedensity or gravity display. Selections are 1 to 4 decimal places.

Value Format Typical Use

1 xxxx.x density2 xxx.xx API gravity4 x.xxxx relative density

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Program Code Definitions (048, 049) _______________________________________________ Section 6 - 34

6.5 Valve Parameters


Number of valves 1 to 4 <1> 048

Initial flow time (secs) 0 to 9.999 <0.200> 049

Valve Parameters select the configuration of the flow controlvalves.

048 Number of valves

This parameter sets the number of flow control valves in thesystem. A minimum of one flow control valve must be defined.

049 Initial flow time (secs)

This parameter selects the time delay before flow control actionbased on the PC [115, 119, 123, 127] Open method for eachcorresponding valve. The valve control signals (Solenoid 1 andSolenoid 2) remain in the static state as described for PC cccOpen method for this period of time during initial flow startup.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Program Code Definitions (048, 049) _______________________________________________ Section 6 - 35

CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.6 Meter Parameters

FunctionRange / Option<Default / *> Meter 1 Meter 2 Meter 3 Meter 4

Number of meters 1 to 4 <1> 050

Meter ID 1 to 5 characters <M1> 051 054 057 060

Meter pulse board input 1 to number ofpulse inputs

052 055 058 061

Valve to be controlled 1 to number of controlvalves

053 056 059 062

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.6 Meter Parameters (continued)

Meter Parameters contain data which defines from one to fourflow meters. The first parameter in the group, PC 050 Numberof meters, sets the total number of flow meters in the system.The remaining parameters are organized in groups of threeparameters related to each flow meter.

050 Number of meters

This parameter sets the total number of flow meters used in thesystem, a minimum of one flow meter must be defined.

ccc Meter ID

This parameter identifies the flow meter for display and loggingpurposes.

ccc Meter pulse board input

This parameter assigns the corresponding logical meter pulseinput to a physical meter pulse input on either one or two meterpulse input boards, depending on the physical configuration ofthe DanLoad 6000.

ccc Valve to be controlled

This parameter assigns a physical flow control valve (1 to 4)to be used to control the flow rate through the correspondingflow meter, two flow meters can share one flow control valveif the piping is designed for this operation.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.7 Component Parameters

FunctionRange / Option<Default / *> Component 1 Component 2 Component 3 Component 4

Number of components 1 to 4 <1> 065

Component ID 1 to 16 characters<Component #1>

066 069 072 075

Meter 1 to number ofmeters

067 070 073 076

Mass adjustment 0.000000 to999.999999<0.000000>

068 071 074 077

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.7 Component Parameters (continued)

Component Parameters contain data which defines from one tofour liquid components. The first parameter in the group,program code PC 065 Number of components, sets the totalnumber of components for the system. The remainingparameters are organized in groups of three parameters relatedto each component. The # sign in the component designationsbelow is replaced with the actual component number, 1 to 4,in the display line.

065 Number of components

This parameter sets the number of liquid components used in thesystem, a minimum of one component must be defined.

066 / 069 / 072 /075 Component ID

This parameter identifies the component for display and loggingpurposes (up to 16 characters).

067 / 070 / 073 / 076 Meter

This parameter identifies the number of the flow meter (1 to 4)used to measure this component. Zero disables the componentthus making it unavailable for loading.

068 / 071 / 074 / 077 Mass adjustment

This sets the component’s “mass computation” adjustment factor1, such that:

Mass = Net volume x (Density - Buoyancy) x 1

While the net volume is similar in magnitude to the grossvolume, the mass may be substantially different from either.Thus when preset/delivery is by mass (PC 80), it isrecommended that several small batches be loaded to ensure thatthe DanLoad 6000's configuration is correct before attemptingto preset a full compartmnet. Zero disables mass computation.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.8 Delivery Parameters

FunctionRange / Option<Default / *> Compnt 1 Compnt 2 Compnt 3 Compnt 4

Maximum preset qty 5 to 999999 078

Minimum preset qty 5 to 999999 079

Preset/delivery type Gross

Std

080

Delivery display type Gross

Std

081

Stop key action Low flow

Immediate

082

Fall back qty 0 to 99999 <1000> 083

Low flow start qty 0 to 99999 <50> 084 090 096 102

Low flow restart qty 0 to 99999 <20> 085 091 097 103

Low flow stop qty 0 to 99999 <50> 086 092 098 104

Line pack delay (secs) 0 to 999 <2> 087 093 099 105

Pump stop delay (secs) 0 to 999 088 094 100 106

Block valve delay (secs) 0 to 99 089 095 101 107

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.8 Delivery Parameters (continued)

Delivery Parameters contain data which defines the batchdelivery characteristics. The first six parameters in the group,PC 078, 079, 080, 081, 082, and 083 are global parametersthat are applicable to all batch deliveries. The remainingparameters are organized in groups of six parameters related toeach component. Delivery Parameters provide a unique profilefor fine tuning the delivery of each component.

078 Maximum preset qty

This parameter sets the maximum allowable quantity units thatcan be preset for a batch delivery (gross or standard dependingon the preset/delivery type). The value of this parameter isnormally set to the quantity of the largest compartment of theauthorized tanker vehicles. The value of this parameter must beequal to or greater than the value of PC 079 Minimum presetqty.

079 Minimum preset qty

This parameter sets the minimum allowable quantity units thatcan be preset for a batch delivery (gross or standard dependingon the preset/delivery type). The value of this parameter isdependent on the expected minimum delivery size and thecapability of the flow-meter/flow-control valve to execute adelivery cycle with the quantity set to this value. The value ofthis parameter must be equal to or greater than the value of PC078 Maximum preset qty.

It is possible to preset and deliver by gross quantity, but todisplay “Loaded” by gross or standard quantity. However, the“Remaining” quantity is always the preset quantity minus thedelivered quantity (gross or standard). This is controlled by thefollowing two program codes.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



080 Preset/delivery type

This parameter selects the quantity calculation method used forpreset, loaded, and remaining quantities. Ramp up to highflow rate is always based on gross flow rate. Ramp down tolow flow rate and flow control valve closure is based on theselection specified by this parameter.

# Gross

Delivered quantity based on gross quantity calculation.

# Std

Delivered quantity based on standard quantitycalculation.

081 Delivery display type

This parameter selects the quantity calculation used for displaypurposes.

# Gross

Display quantity based on gross quantity calculation.

# Std

Display quantity based on standard quantity calculation.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



082 Stop key action

This parameter selects the method used to suspend a batchdelivery operation after the STOP key is pressed. (Note: TheSTOP key function should not be used for an emergencyshutdown command because the power to the permissive circuitsis not removed by this function.)

# Low flow

Ramp to low flow rate before closing the flow controlvalve to stop all flow. This method of shutdownprevents hydraulic shock in the piping system. (Note:The ccc Low flow stop qty is not delivered during thismethod of shutdown.)

# Immediate

Close the component flow control valve immediately.This method of shutdown may cause hydraulic shock inthe piping system.

083 Fall back qty

This parameter sets the quantity to delivery at a fall back flowrate before the DanLoad 6000 attempts to ramp up flow rate tothe next higher flow rate.

ccc Low flow start qty

This parameter sets the quantity units to deliver before issuinga command to the flow control valve to increase the flow rate tothe high flow rate. The default value is 50 quantity units.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Low flow restart qty

This parameter sets the quantity units to deliver before issuinga command to the flow control valve to increase the flow rate tothe high flow rate after restarting a suspended batch deliveryand after the initial PC ccc Low flow start qty has beendelivered. The default value is 20 quantity units.

ccc Low flow stop qty

This parameter sets the quantity units to deliver at the low flowrate before all flow is stopped. The default value is 50 quantityunits. (Note: If this quantity is set to a very low value, theDanLoad 6000 may not be able to stabilize the flow rate duringdelivery of PC ccc Low flow stop qty. If this happens, thecontrol value closure quantity cannot be accurately computedand the preset target quantity will be missed.)

ccc Line pack delay (secs)

This parameter sets the time between starting the pump for thiscomponent and opening the flow control valve. The defaultvalue is 2 seconds.

ccc Pump stop delay (secs)

This parameter sets the time between closing the flow controlvalve and de-energizing the pump for this component.

ccc Block valve delay (secs)

This parameter sets the time between opening the componentblock valve to opening the component flow control valve duringstartup. The assigned control outputs for the flow control valveand the block valve are simultaneously set to close the valves(discrete outputs set OPEN) during shutdown.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Ramp clicks 0 to 999 <30> 108

Maintenance clicks 0 to 999 <30> 109

Additive pump stop (secs) 0 to 9999 <10> 110

Primary component 1 to 4 <1> 111

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



108 Ramp clicks

This parameter selects the maximum number of attempts (flowcontrol valve solenoid jogs) to increase flow rate to the nexthigher flow rate before halting attempts and maintaining currentor fall back flow rate.

109 Maintenance clicks

This parameter selects the maximum number of attempts (flowcontrol valve solenoid jogs) to maintain flow rate before haltingattempts and going to the next lower fall back flow rate.

110 Additive pump stop (secs)

This parameter selects the time delay between the load stop anddeenergizing the additive pump outputs (PC [800, 802, 804,806, 808, 810] Pump outputs).

111 Primary component

This parameter selects the primary component of a blend whichis used in determining a blend ratio error and / or for load lineflushing at the end of a delivery.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.9 Digital Valve Parameters

FunctionRange / Option<Default / *>

DigitalValve 1

DigitalValve 2

DigitalValve 3

DigitalValve 4

Low flow % error 2 to 10 <5> 112 116 120 124

High flow % error 2 to 10 <3> 113 117 121 125

Valve delay (secs) 0.000 to 9.999 <0.040> 114 118 122 126

Open method Normal *OpenedClosed

115 119 123 127

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.9 Digital Valve Parameters (continued)

Digital Valve Parameters contain data which defines the methodfor controlling the operation of digitally operated flow controlvalves. The parameters are organized in groups of fourparameters related to each digital flow control valve..

Digital Valve Parameters are not applicable to other types offlow control valves selected by PC 027 Valve type.

ccc Low flow % error

This parameter sets the percentage of difference in the actuallow flow rate and the programmed low flow rate (setpoint)allowed before a flow rate adjustment command is sent to theflow control valve. This parameter is the deadband orhysteresis and is only in effect when the low flow rate isestablished and not in effect when the flow rate is changing tothe low flow rate during startup or shutdown. The suggestedvalue is 5 percent.

ccc High flow % error

This parameter sets the percentage of difference in the actualhigh flow rate and the programmed high flow rate (setpoint)allowed before a flow rate adjustment command is sent to theflow control valve. This parameter is the deadband orhysteresis and is only in effect when the high flow rate isestablished and not in effect when the flow rate is increasing tothe high flow rate setpoint during startup. The suggested valueis 5 percent.

ccc Valve delay (secs)

This parameter sets the elapsed time from the calculated time tosent an OPEN or CLOSE command to the valve until thatcommand is actually sent to the value. The default value is0.040 seconds

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.9 Digital Valve Parameters (continued)

ccc Open method

This parameter sets the method for controlling the flow controlvalve during the time specified by PC 049 Initial flow time(secs). (Note: This feature is intended for use in multi-component blending systems. It's purpose is to allow acomponent with low pumping pressure to start flowing beforeother components with higher pumping pressure.

# Normal

Flow control valve solenoid 2 is energized during PC 049 Initialflow time (secs). (Note: The component flows during the initialflow time.)

# Opened

Flow control valve solenoid 1 and solenoid 2 are energizedduring PC 049 Initial flow time. (Note: The component flowsduring the initial flow time.)

# Closed

Flow control valve solenoid 1 and solenoid 2 are deenergizedduring PC 049 Initial flow time. (Note: The component doesnot flow during initial flow time.)

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs


Pulse Output 1

Pulse Output 2

Number of pulse per unit outputs 0 to 2 <0> 128

Control meters X (not used) <GGGG>G (gross)S (std)

129 132

Factor 0.1 to 10.0 <1.0> 130 133

Pulse width (ms) 10 to 500 <20> 131 134

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs (continued)

Pulse Per Unit Outputs contain data which defines the methodof processing momentary pulsed outputs for each measuredquantity unit. The first parameter in the group, PC 128Number of pulse per unit outputs, sets the number of pulse perunit outputs that are assigned. The remaining parameters areorganized in groups of three parameters related to each pulseper unit output. Each output can be setup to provide differentoutputs derived from the flow measured through different flowmeters and with different scaling.

128 Number of pulse per unit outputs

This parameter sets the total number of pulse per unit outputs.The default value is 0. (Note: If more than 2 pulse per unitoutputs is needed, the additive ratio outputs: PC [380, 383,386, 389, 392, 395] Ratio output with the corresponding PC[140, 145, 150, 155, 160, 165] Ratio qty set to 1.0 can beused for this purpose.)

ccc Control meters

This parameter selects the flow meter or combination of flowmeters and either the gross or standard quantity units used todrive this output. Access to internal accumulators for flowmeters is assigned by a one to four character string (onecharacter position for each flow meter). The selections for eachposition in the string are X, G, or S, the accumulators for theflow meters correspond to the following positions in the string1234.

# X

Disregard the accumulator for the flow meter.

# G

Use the gross quantity unit to pulse the output.

# S

Use the standard quantity unit to pulse this output.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs (continued)

# example: SXGN

The example shows four character positions whichindicates that four flow meters are defined. The numberof character positions in the string is automatically set tothe number of defined flow meters (PC 050 Number ofmeters). The 'SXGN' selections specify the followingquantity unit sum (combination) is used to drive theassigned discrete output.meter 1 standard + meter 3 gross + meter 4 standard,do not sum quantities from meter 2The default value is “GGGG”.

ccc Factor

This parameter sets the scale factor for the correspondingoutput. A factor of 1.0 causes the output to be pulsed for eachinternal accumulated product unit. A factor of 0.1 causes theoutput to pulse for each one-tenth of an internal accumulatedproduct unit. A factor of 10.0 causes the output to pulse onetime for each ten internal accumulated quantity units.

ccc Pulse width (ms)

This parameter sets the duration of output ON pulse in tenmillisecond increments. Any values between 10 to 87 (10 msto 87 ms) may be configured. The default pulse width is 20milliseconds with a guaranteed minimum OFF time.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters

FunctionRange / Option<Default / *> Addtv 1 Addtv 2 Addtv 3 Addtv 4 Addtv 5 Addtv 6

Number of additives 0 to 6 <0> 135

Selection method External *

Prompt

Inputs

136

Totalizing method Out *

Out/Sgl

Out/Dbl

Out/Hshk

In/Sgl

In/Dbl

In/Hshk

In

137

Clean line qty 0 to 9999 <0> 138

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters (continued)


Additive control meters X (not used) <XXXX>

G (gross)

S (std)

139 144 149 154 159 164

Ratio qty 1.0 to 999.9 <40.0> 140 145 150 155 160 165

Offset volume 0.0 to 999.9 141 146 151 156 161 166

Totalizing volume 0.0 to 999.99 142 147 152 157 162 167

Available No *

Yes

143 148 153 158 163 168

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Additive Delivery Parameters contain data which definesautomatic control injection of up to six additives into thedelivered product stream. The first four parameters in thegroup, PC 135, 136, 137, and 138, define values andselections that are applicable to all additive deliveries. Theremaining parameters are organized in groups of fiveparameters related to each additive.

135 Number of additives

This parameter sets the number of additives to be injected.

136 Selection method

This parameter selects the method for selecting additives whilein the stand-alone or manual modes. (Note: Additives areselected by the Terminal Automation System while in theautomatic mode.)

# External

The ratio outputs for all additives enabled by parameter 135Number of additives are toggled.

# Prompt

The local operator is prompted, via the Additive selectiondisplay at the start of each transaction, to select theadditives to be injected.

# Inputs

The ratio outputs for each additive enabled by PC 135Number of additives are toggled based on the state of anexternal switch or relay contact per each configuredadditive.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



137 Totalizing method

This parameter selects the method used for volume accumulationof each additive. each additive volume is accumulated in anAdd x total totalizer that is accessible in the Dynamic DataDisplay. The two parts of this parameter are:

# Out / In Increment the additive totalizer on theRatio output (Out) or increment theadditive totalizer on the Feedback input(In).

# Sgl / Dbl / HshkSelects the method for handling Feedbackinputs from the additive injector

# Out

The Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batchloading. The additive ratio counter is ignored. Add oneadditive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers foreach of PC ccc Ratio output cycles. PC ccc Feedback inputsignals are not monitored. This method of additive volumetotalizing also applies to the Out/Sgl, Out/Dbl, and Out/Hshkoptions described below.

# In

The Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batchloading. The additive ratio counter is ignored. Add oneadditive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers foreach of PC ccc Feedback input cycles. PC ccc Ratio outputsignals are not monitored. This method also applies to theIn/Sgl, In/dbl, and In/Hshk options. described below.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# Out/Sgl or In/Sgl

The Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch loading. The additive ratio counter set to zero at the start of the batchloading. One PC ccc Feedback input is expected after the PC ccc Ratio output is energized. Add one additive volume to the Add xtotal and Add x batch totalizers for each ccc Ratio output (Out/Sgl) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Sgl).

+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON VO* * VO* * VO* *

R+* * R+* * R+* * 7 Ratio Output * * * * * *

* * * * * *

)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF

+)), +)), +)), 7 ON VI* * VI* * VI* *

R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback Input * * * * * *

* * * * * *

))))))- .))))))))))))- .))))))))))))- .))))))))))Q 7 OFF

Single Pulse per Ratio Cycle

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# Out/Dbl or In/Dbl

The Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch loading. The additive ratio counter set to zero at the start of the batch

loading. One ccc Feedback input pulse is expected after PC ccc Ratio output is energized and one PC ccc Feedback input is expected

after the ccc Ratio output is deenergized. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for each PC ccc Ratio

output (Out/Dbl) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Dbl).

+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON VO* * VO* * VO* *

R+* * R+* * R+* * 7 Ratio Output * * * * * *

* * * * * *

)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF

+)), +)), +)), +)), +)), +)), 7 ON VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* *

R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback * * * * * * * * * * * * Input

* * * * * * * * * * * *

))))))- .))))- .))))- .))))- .))))- .))))- .))))Q 7 OFF

Double Pulse per Ratio Cycle

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# Out/Hshk or In/Hshk

An Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch loading. An additive ratio counter set to zero at the start of the batch

loading. An additive injection timer is set when PC ccc Ratio output is energized. One ccc Feedback input pulse is expected after the

PC ccc Ratio output is energized. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for each PC ccc Ratio output

(Out/Hshk) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Hshk).

+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON VO* * VO* * VO* *

R+* * R+* * R+* * 7 Ratio Output T0* * T0* * T0* *

* * * * * *

)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF

+))))), +)))))), +)))))), 7 ON VI* * VI* * VI* *

R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback * * * * * * Input

* * * * * *

)))))))- .)))))))))- .))))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF

Handshake Ratio Output and Feedback Input

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



138 Clean line qty

This parameter sets to quantity (gross or standard depending onthe configured preset/delivery type PC 80) of product or blendto be loaded at the end of a batch loading, without additiveinjection. The feature eliminates the additive from the piping toprevent next batch contamination with current batch additives.

ccc Additive control meters

This parameter selects the flow meters that are used by summingthe quantity delivered through the meters to determine thequantity of additive to inject into the flow stream. Flow metersare designated by relative character positions in a one to four-character alpha string (one character position for each flowmeter).

# X

This flow meter not required.

# G

Use the gross quantity unit for additive quantity calculation.

# S

Use the standard quantity unit for additive injectioncalculation.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# example: SXGN

The example shows four character positions whichindicates that four flow meters are defined. The numberof character positions in the string is automatically set tothe number of defined flow meters (PC 050 Number ofmeters). The 'SXGN' selections specify the followingquantity unit sum (combination) is used to drive theassigned additive injection output.meter 1 standard + meter 3 gross + meter 4 standard,do not sum quantity from meter 2

ccc Ratio qty

This parameter sets the ratio of component(s) delivered to thequantity of additive injected (quantity units of componentdelivered for each additive ratio output cycle). The defaultvalue is 40.0

ccc Offset volume

This parameter sets the volume units of component(s) to deliverat the start of a batch delivery before initiating additiveinjection.

ccc Totalizing volume

This parameter sets the volume unit of additive injected for eachinjection cycle.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Available

This parameter selects the availability of the additive. Theselection can be used to temporarily disable injection of thisadditive for selected batch deliveries.

# No

This additive is not available (the additive cannot be selected inthe Additive Selection Display).

# Yes

This additive is available (the additive can be selected in theAdditive Selection Display).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.12 Factors


Number of factors/components 1 to 4 <2> 169

Meter factor method Fixed *Linear

170

Nominal K-factor 0.5 to 550.0 <23.0> 171 182 193 204

Master meter factor 0.5000 to 2.0000 172 183 194 205

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.12 Factors <continued)

Factors contain data which defines the flow meter calibrationcharacteristics for up to four components at up to four differentflow rates for each component. The first two parameters in thegroup, PC 169 and PC 170, apply to the calculation of allfactors, the remaining parameters are organized in groups ofthree parameters related to each defined component and groupsof two parameters related to each defined flow rate for thatcomponent.

169 Number of factors/component

This parameter sets the number of meter factors, determined atdifferent flow rates, available for one flow meter andcomponent combination. The lowest flow rate, for low flowstartup and shutdown, must be entered first (Component #factor 1), the highest flow rate must be entered last(Component # factor 4). Meter factors for fall back flow ratescan be entered for Component # factor 2 and Component #factor 3. (Note: Four factors are assumed in the example. Ifonly two factors are determined, the factor for the lowest flowrate is entered for Component # factor 1 and the factor for thehighest flow rate is entered for Component # factor 2.)

170 Meter factor method

This parameter selects the method used to determine the meterfactors used in the flow calculation.

# Fixed

The meter factor that was determined a flow rate that is closestto the current flow rate is used. Fixed is normally selected fordigital flow control valves in single component or sequentialblending loading operations.

# Linear

The meter factor is calculated by an interpolation process thatuses the two meter factors determined at the next highest flowrate and the next lowest flow rate from the current flow rate.A ratio between the two flow rates and the corresponding twometer factors is determined. The current meter factor iscalculated assuming that the meter factor value increments arelinear between the two proved meter factors and based on thecurrent flow rate and the ratio. Linear is normally selected for2-stage flow control valves or in-line blending loadingoperations.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.12 Factors (continued)

ccc Nominal K-factor

This parameter sets the nominal pulses per unit of productreceived from the flow meter. The K-factor is also referred toas the system factor and is usually printed on the flow meternameplate. The default value is 23.0 which is the nominalpulses per gallon for a Daniel 4-inch diameter LR turbine meter.This entry should always be set to match the K-factor of theactual flow meter.

ccc Master meter factor

This parameter sets the number used internally to verify theprobability of a valid meter factor entry. All meter factors forthis component must be within the ± percent (set by PC 215Master MF %) of this value or the meter factor entry isconsidered to be out of range. Example: assume PC 215 equals2.00 (2 %) if this entry is 1.0000, acceptable meter factors forany of the corresponding PC ccc Component # meter factor #entries is 0.9800 to 1.0200

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Flow rate 1 0 to 99999 <200> 174 185 196 207

Meter factor 1 per PC 215 / PC 216 175 186 197 208

Flow rate 2 0 to 99999 <600> 176 187 198 209


Flow rate 3 0 to 99999 178 189 200 211


Flow rate 4 0 to 99999 180 191 202 213


Master MF % 0.00 to 99.99 <2.00> 215 215 215 215

Adjustment MF % 0.00 to 99.99 <0.25> 216 216 216 216

Product units mnemonic up to six characters

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Flow rate 1

This parameter sets the value in quantity units per time unit atwhich the meter factor for the low flow rate is established.Engineering units for flow rates are determined by the K-factorscaling (PC ccc Nominal K-factor) for the component. Theunits entered for this parameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, BPH.

ccc Meter factor 1

This parameter sets the meter factor that is used for thecorresponding flow rate indicated in the previous parameter.

ccc Flow rate 2

This parameter sets the value in quantity units per time unit atwhich the meter factor for the high flow rate, or anintermediate flow rate, is established. Engineering units forflow rates are determined by the K-factor scaling (PC cccNominal K-factor) for the component. The units entered forthis parameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, BPH.

ccc Meter factor 2


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Flow rate 3

This parameter sets the value in quantity units per time unit atwhich the meter factor for the high flow rate, or anintermediate flow rate, is established. Engineering units forflow rates are determined by the K-factor scaling (PC cccNominal K-factor) for the component. The units entered forthis parameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, BPH.

ccc Meter factor 3


ccc Flow rate 4

(Weights and measures attribute default) this parameter sets thevalue in quantity units per time unit at which the meter factorfor the high flow rate is established, engineering units for flowrates are determined by the K-factor scaling (PC ccc NominalK-factor) for the component, the units entered for thisparameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, BPH.

ccc Meter factor 4

(Weights and measures attribute default) this parameter sets themeter factor that is used for the corresponding flow rateindicated in the previous parameter

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



215 Master MF %

This parameter sets the percentage bandwidth for limit checksof the individual Meter factor f referenced to the PC [172, 183,194, 205] Master meter factor. The default value is 2.00which limits any PC ccc Meter factor f entry to ± 2 percent ofthe corresponding PC ccc Master meter factor for thecomponent (meter).

216 Adjustment MF %

This parameter sets the allowable percentage difference betweenany two adjacent meter factors, adjacent meter factors are:[PC ccc Meter factor 1 andPC ccc Meter factor 2]

[PC ccc Meter factor 2 andPC ccc Meter factor 1 andPC ccc Meter factor 3]

[PC ccc Meter factor 3 andPC ccc Meter factor 2 andPC ccc Meter factor 4]

[PC ccc Meter factor 4 andPC ccc Meter factor 3]

The default value is 0.25 percent.

218 Product units mnemonic

Up to six characters used to display alphanumeric characters,script characters, or a mixture of script and alphanumericcharacters on display columns next to the large numbersshowing the “Loaded” quantity.

Refer to PC 028 Language and notes on configuring a scriptmessage prior to the description of PC 031 #1 Enter data item#1 for more information concerning language selection and useof scripts.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.13 Alarms

The response to each alarm is controlled by the setting of the Alarm Action corresponding to that alarm. The four possible alarm actionsare described below. The alarm actions for several alarms are limited to less than four selections. Alarm action for several alarmsis fixed and not selectable. The allowable alarm action selections for each alarm are listed for each alarm parameter.

Alarm Action Description Reset

Primary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shut and the delivery is suspended.

Delivery cannot resume until the alarm is cleared.

Red LED indicators on primary and secondary operator displays are ON.

Alarm discrete output, PC 287 Alarm control output is maintained closed (if defined).


Keypad in Program Mode.

Alarm reset discrete input, PC

344 Primary alarm reset (if defined).

Terminal automation system.

Secondary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shut and the delivery is suspended.

Delivery cannot resume until the alarm is cleared or the Secondary alarm reset time has

elapsed.

Red LED indicators on primary and secondary operator displays are flashing.

Alarm discrete output, PC 287 Alarm control output is pulsed (if defined).


Correct cause of alarm

Automatically reset after time value in

PC 220 Secondary alarm reset (secs)

has elapsed.

Info An event message is displayed on the message line of the display panel for ten seconds. Automatically reset after ten seconds

have elapsed.

Off Disable monitoring of this alarm.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.13 Alarms (continued)


Safety circuit message Specific *General

219

Secondary alarm reset (secs) 0 to 9999 <300> 220

Low flow alarm action OffInfoPrimary *

221

Minimum flow rate 0 to 99999 <100> 222

Low flow time (secs) 5 to 999 <10> 223

High flow alarm action OffInfoPrimary *

224

Maximum flow rate 0 to 99999 <660> 225

High flow time (secs) 5 to 999 <10> 226

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Alarms Parameters contain data which defines the conditionsthat generate alarms and the method that the DanLoad 6000responds to alarms. Multiple alarms can be processedsimultaneously. Alarms are processed in the chronologicalorder that they are detected. The first parameter, PC 220Secondary alarm reset (secs), is applicable to all alarms thathave the alarm action set to Secondary. All other alarmparameters are related to specific alarm actions or limits.

The response to any alarm is handled by a specific alarm action.There are four possible alarm actions for any alarm. However,most alarms actions are restricted to less than four selections.In some cases, the alarm action is permanently set at one optionand cannot be modified. Alarm action selections are located inrelation to associated alarm parameters in the following alarmtables. Selectable alarm actions are indicated in the form:<alarm condition> alarm action.

219 Safety circuit message

This parameter defines the default safety circuit message thatwill be displayed on a safety circuit fault. The alarm messagesfor safety circuits 1 through 8 are user configurable in the script“Language” selected via PC 028 Language.

# Specific

Specific default safety circuit messages that tell the operatorwhat the problem may be, i.e. “Ground detector open”.

# General

General default safety circuit messages, i.e. “Safety circuit1 failure”.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



The default "English" language "Specific" safety circuitmessages for safety circuits 1 through 8 are:

#1 Ground detector open#2 Overspill detector open#3 Permissive power failure#4 Additive injection failure#5 Arm down side1#6 Arm down side 2#7 Walkway down side 1#8 Walkway down side 2

The default "English" language "General" safety circuit alarmmessages for safety circuits 1 through 8 are:

#1 Safety circuit 1 failure#2 Safety circuit 2 failure#3 Safety circuit 3 failure#4 Safety circuit 4 failure #5 Safety circuit 5 failure#6 Safety circuit 6 failure#7 Safety circuit 7 failure#8 Safety circuit 8 failure

The default "English 2" language "Specific" safety circuitmessages for safety circuits 1 through 8 are:

#1 15 Ground detector open#2 16 Overspill detector open#3 21 Permissive power failure#4 25 Additive injection failure#5 Arm down side 1#6 Arm down side 2#7 Walkway down side 1#8 Walkway down side 2

The default "English 2" language "General" circuit messagesfor safety circuits 1 through 8 are:

#1 15 Safety circuit 1 failure#2 16 Safety circuit 2 failure#3 21 Safety circuit 3 failure#4 25 Safety circuit 4 failure#5 Safety circuit 5 failure#6 Safety circuit 6 failure#7 Safety circuit 7 failure#8 Safety circuit 8 failure

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



The default "Thai" language "Specific" or "General" safetycircuit messages for circuits 1 through 8 are:

#1 Ground detector open#2 Overspill detector open#3 Permissive power failure#4 Additive injection failure#5 Arm down side1#6 Arm down side 2#7 Walkway down side 1#8 Walkway down side 2

The default hex control key string for the "Chinese" language"Specific" safety circuit messages for safety circuits 1 through8 are:

#1 \xFF\xA2\xA3\x5F\xA5\xFE (Ground detector open)#2 \XFF\xA6\xA7\xA8\xA9\XFE (Overspill detector open)#3 \XFF\xA0\xAB\xAC\xAD\x91\x92\XFE (Permissive power failure)#4 \XFF\x5D\x23\x5E\XAC\XAD\x91\x92\XFE (Additive injection failure)#5 \XFF\x82\x83\xAE\xA2\xA3\x5F\xA5\XFE (Ground detector side 1)#6 \XFF\x82\x84\xAE\xA2\xA3\x5F\xA5\XFE (Ground detector side 2)#7 \XFF\x82\x83\XAE\xAF\xB0\x8C\xB2\xB1\XFE (Swing arm switch side 1)#8 \XFF\x82\x83\XAE\xAF\xB0\x8C\xB2\xB1\XFE (Swing arm switch side 2)

The default hex control key string for the "Chinese" language"General" safety circuit alarm messages are:

#1 \xFF\x82\x83\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 1 failure)#2 \xFF\x82\x84\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 2 failure)#3 \xFF\x82\x85\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 3 failure)#4 \xFF\x82\x86\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 4 failure) #5 \xFF\x82\x87\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 5 failure)#6 \xFF\x82\x88\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 6 failure)#7 \xFF\x82\xD4\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 7 failure)#8 \xFF\x82\xD5\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 8 failure)

220 Secondary alarm reset (secs)

This parameter sets the elapsed time to allow a secondary alarmto be active before it is cleared automatically. The default valueis 300 seconds.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



221 Low flow alarm action

This parameter selects the response to a low flow condition. Thedefault selection is Primary.

222 Minimum flow rate

This parameter sets the value of the minimum flow ratepermitted for the time period set in PC 223 Low flow time (secs)before the low flow alarm is set. The default entry is 100quantity units per time unit (this value is dependent of K-factorscaling for the flow meter).

223 Low flow time (secs)

This parameter sets the maximum time allowed to elapse at orless than the flow rate specified by PC 222 Minimum flow ratebefore the low flow alarm is set.

224 High flow alarm action

This parameter selects the response action to a high flowcondition. The default selection is Primary.

225 Maximum flow rate

This parameter sets the value of the maximum flow ratepermitted for the time period set in PC 224 High flow time(secs) before the low flow alarm is set. The default entry is 660quantity units per time unit (this value is dependent of K-factorscaling for the flow meter). (Note: Set this value slightlygreater than the highest expected flow rate. This setting valueenables the DanLoad 6000 to detect loss of control of a flowcontrol valve and alarm the condition.)

226 High flow time (secs)

This parameter sets the maximum time allowed to elapse at orgreater than the flow rate specified by PC 225 Maximum flowrate before the high flow alarm is set.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Overrun limit qty 0.0 to 99.9 <2.0> 227

Underflow alarm action Off *Primary

228

Underflow limit qty 0.0 to 99.9 <5.0> 229

No flow alarm action OffInfoPrimary *

230

No flow t-o (secs) 1 to 99 <5> 231

Unauthorized flow limit qty 0.1 to 99.9 <10> 232

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



227 Overrun limit qty

This parameter sets the allowable quantity, in excess of thepreset quantity, to be delivered before the Unable to close valvemeter # alarm is set.

228 Underflow alarm action

This parameter selects the response to an underflow condition.The default selection is Off.

229 Underflow limit qty

This parameter sets the allowable quantity, less than the presetquantity, to be delivered before the Valve closed early meter #alarm is issued.

230 No flow t-o alarm action

This parameter selects the response to a no flow condition. Thedefault selection is Primary.

231 No flow t-o (secs)

This parameter sets the elapsed time to allow for no flow pulseinput to be detected after opening the flow control valve. Thedefault value is 5 seconds. (Note: This delay can be set to 1 or2 seconds if detection of a meter pulse input failure or othercause of the no flow condition must be detected immediately.)

232 Unauthorized flow limit qty

This parameter sets the allowable quantity units to be recordedas unauthorized flow before the Unauthorized flow exceeds limitmeter # primary alarm is issued. The default value is 10quantity units.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Error limit (pulses) 0 to 255 <0> 233

Reset count (pulses) 0 to 65535 <10000> 234

The pulse security function provides verification of meter pulse inputs per API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter5 - Metering, Section 5 - Fidelity and Security of Flow Measurement Pulsed-Data Transmission Systems and IP 252, Part XIII - Fidelityand Security of Measurement-Data Transmission Systems. This function can only be implemented if there are two meter pulse traininputs from a single flow meter. The dual meter pulse inputs must be 90 degrees electrically out of phase. Turbine meters capableof implementing this function must have two pick-up coils, 90 degrees electrically out of phase, and two preamplifiers. Positivedisplacement meters must have dual pulse transmitters.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



233 Error limit (pulses)

This parameter sets the limit of pulse comparison errors that canbe accumulated before a Pulse security error meter # alarm isissued. This parameter is only used for meter pulse inputverification of dual pulse input trains from a single flow meter.The default value of 0 disables the pulse security function. Thepulse security function is enabled by setting this parameter to avalue other than 0. A suggested value for this parameter is 20errors. (Note: this parameter must be set to 0 if the pulsesecurity function is not used.)

This is an 8-bit hardware down counter, which can be set at anytime by software and generates an interrupt when zero isreached, i.e. the error limit has been exceeded. Pulse securityper IP 252 level “B” is implemented in hardware via “pulsesecurity PAL’s” on the meter pulse board.

234 Reset count (pulses)

This parameter is used for pulse security level “B” and sets thevalue of raw pulses accumulated during pulse error checkingbefore resetting the accumulator to zero. This value defines awindow of accumulated raw pulses that is used to determine ifPC 233 Error limit (pulses) value is exceeded. A zero entryindicates to reset the error count only at the start of each batchdelivery. A value greater than zero indicates that theaccumulated error count will be cleared each time theaccumulated raw pulses equal the entry. This field is not usedif the value of PC 233 Error limit (pulses) is set to zero.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Data logging alarm action Info *Primary

235

Comms fail alarm action InfoPrimary *

236

Comms fail t-o (secs) 1 to 300 <10> 237

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



235 Data logging alarm action

This parameter selects the response to a data logging memoryfull condition. This condition is usually caused by failure toprint data logs due to the logging printer (device) being off-line, out of paper, or some other disabling condition. Thedefault selection is Info.

236 Comms fail alarm action

This parameter selects the response to a communications failureon either serial data channel 1 or channel 2. If the selection isset to Off, communications alarms are ignored. If the selectionis Primary, the primary alarm Comms failure channel X isactivated if there is no communications with the automationsystem sensed within the time limit set by PC 237 Comms failt-o (secs).

237 Comms fail t-o (secs)

This parameter is set to the elapsed time allowed for notreceiving communications from a terminal automation systembefore issuing a Comms failure channel X alarm, if PC236 Comms fail alarm action is set to Primary.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Temp fail alarm action Off

Info

Primary *

238

Minimum temperature -99.9 to 999.9 <-40.0> 239

Maximum temperature -99.9 to 999.9 <110.0> 240

Density fail alarm action Info

Primary *

241

Minimum density/gravity 242

Maximum density/gravity 243

Minimum pressure 0.0 to 9999.9 <0.0> 244

Maximum pressure 0.0 to 9999.9 <0.00> 245

Additive error limit 1 to 99 <3> 246

Feedback time 0 to 9999 247

Block valve time (secs) 0 to 99 <10> 248

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



238 Temp fail alarm action

This parameter sets the temperature input to use and selects theresponse to a process RTD temperature input out of rangecondition.

# Off

Use backup temperature from PC [434, 437, 440, 443]Backup temperature entry.

# Info

Use live temperature if in limits of PC 239 Minimumtemperature and PC 240 Maximum temperature else use PCccc Backup temperature.

# Primary

Use live temperature only and halt loading if live temperatureis out of limit set by PC 239 Minimum temperature and PC 240Maximum temperature.

239 Minimum temperature

This parameter sets the minimum allowable process temperatureinput from an RTD before the Temperature failure meter #alarm is issued. The temperature units are specified by PC 427Temperature units (either degrees Fahrenheit or degreesCelsius). The default value is -40.0 degrees.

240 Maximum temperature

This parameter sets the maximum allowable process temperatureinput from an RTD before the Temperature failure meter #alarm is issued. The temperature units are specified by PC 427Temperature units (either degrees Fahrenheit or degreesCelsius). The default value is +110.0 degrees.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



241 Density fail alarm action

This parameter selects the response to a process density inputout of range condition. If the selection is set to Info, the PCccc Backup density/gravity (Temperature/pressure/densityparameters group) value for this component is used incalculations. The default selection is Primary.

242 Minimum density/gravity

This parameter sets the minimum allowable process densityinput from a densitometer before the Density failure component# alarm is issued. The density units are dependent on theselection of PC ccc Temperature option corresponding to thecomponent. The decimal point location in this field isdependent on the setting in PC 046 Density/gravity scale.

243 Maximum density/gravity

This parameter sets the maximum allowable process densityinput from a densitometer before the Density failure component# alarm is issued. The density units are dependent on theselection in PC ccc Temperature option corresponding to thecomponent. The decimal point location in this field isdependent on the setting in PC 046 Density/gravity scale.

244 Minimum pressure

This parameter sets the minimum allowable process pressureinput from a pressure transmitter before the Pressure failuremeter # alarm is issued.

245 Maximum pressure

This parameter sets the maximum allowable process pressureinput from a pressure transmitter before the Pressure failuremeter # alarm is issued.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



246 Additive error limit

This parameter sets the allowable error count, missingor spurious additive feedback pulses, before theAdditive # failure alarm is issued. The default value is3.

247 Feedback time

This parameter sets the maximum time in seconds thatan additive feedback input (handshake feedback method)can be energized before an Additive a failure alarm isactivated.

248 Block valve delay (secs)

This parameter sets the time period allowed for anycomponent block valve to close. The default value is 10seconds.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Circuit 1 alarm action Secondary *Primary

249

#1 <message> 1 to 34 charactersGround detector open

250

Circuit 2 alarm action Secondary Primary *

251

#2 <message> 1 to 34 charactersOverspill detector open

252


253

#3 <message> 1 to 34 charactersPermissive power failure

254

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Safety Circuit Alarms

Alarm PC's 249 to 268 define the operation of eightconfigurable input safety circuits (permissive circuits). Thefirst four safety circuits are independent from the side of theloading island witch is active for the current delivery. Theremaining four safety circuits are configurable to be either sideindependent or dedicated to side 1 or dedicated to side 2.

The eight discrete permissive inputs for the safety circuits areassigned with PC's 345 to 352.

Refer to PC 028 Language and notes on configuring a scriptmessage prior to the description of PC 031 #1 Enter data item#1 for more information concerning language selection and useof scripts.

249 Circuit 1 alarm action

This parameter selects the response to an OPEN state for thediscrete input assigned to this function by PC 345 Safety circuit1.

250 #1 <Ground detector open>

This parameter contains the alarm message assigned to thissafety circuit. The default message is indicated above.



252 #2 <Overspill detector open>


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000





254 #3 <Permissive power failure>

This parameter contains the alarm message assigned to thissafety circuit, the default message is indicated above.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000





255

#4 <message> 1 to 34 charactersAdditive injection failure

256


257

#5 <message> 1 to 34 charactersArm down side 1

258


259

#6 <message> 1 to 34 charactersArm down side 2

260

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000





256 #4 <Additive injection failure>




258 #5 <Arm down side 1>




260 #6 <Arm down side 2>


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



FunctionRange / Option

<Default / *> Program Code


261

#7 <message> 1 to 34 charactersWalkway down side 1

262


263

#8 <message> 1 to 34 charactersWalkway down side 2

264

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000





262 #7 <Walkway down side 1>




264 #8 <Walkway down side 2>


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Circuit 5 type 0 to 2 <1> 265




265 Circuit 5 type

This parameter sets the side assignment for safety circuitnumber 5.

# 0 = side independent

# 1 = enabled only if loading at side 1


Side enabling is controlled by the swing arm position inputs.

266 Circuit 6 type






______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



267 Circuit 7 type






268 Circuit 8 type






______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Program Code Definitions (280 to 372) ____________________________________________ Section 6 - 102

6.14 I / O Parameters

Function Range / Option Program Code

Slot 1 board EmptyDC I/OAC I/O2-Ch. Analog Input8-Ch. Analog Input2-Ch. Meter PulseEnhanced I/O

280

Slot 2 board <same as above> 281






______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.14 I / O Parameters (continued)

I/O Parameters contain data which defines the type of processinput / output signal card that is inserted in each card cage slot.Physical I / O points are assigned logical functions by logical I/ O points.

ccc Slot # board

This parameter selects the type of board located in slot J#. TheJ number for the input / output board connector is the same asthe # in the parameter name.

# Empty

No card present.

# DC I/O

DC Voltage discrete input / output board.

# AC I/O

AC Voltage discrete input / output board.

# 2-Ch. Analog Input / 8-Ch. Analog Input

2-channel analog input board.

OR

8-channel analog input board.

# 2-Ch. Meter Pulse

Flow meter pulse input board.

# Enhanced I/O

Enhanced injection input / output board.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Function Range / Option<Default / *>

Program Code

Alarm control output 0 to number of discrete outputs <1> 287

287 Alarm control output

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for thegeneral alarm control output logical function. This output ispulsed ON (CLOSED) when a Secondary alarm is active and issteady ON (CLOSED) when a Primary alarm is active. (Note:It is recommended that if this output is required, to reassign itto logical output 4.)

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Function Range / Option<Default / *>

Compnt 1

Compnt 2

Compnt 3

Compnt 4

Pump control output 0 to number of discrete outputs <8> 288 289 290 291

ccc Pump control output

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for theproduct pump control output logical function. This output isnormally OFF and is maintained ON to run a product pumpmotor.

Recommended discrete output assignments:

Component PC Discrete Output

1 288 32 289 73 290 114 291 15

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



FunctionRange / Option<Default / *> Valve 1 Valve 2 Valve 3 Valve 4

Solenoid 1 (upstream) 0 to number of discrete outputs <7> 292 297 302 307

Solenoid 2 (downstream) 0 to number of discrete outputs <6> 293 298 303 308

Recommended discrete output assignments:

Logical Function PC Discrete Output

Valve 1 - Solenoid 1 292 1Valve 1 - Solenoid 2 293 2Valve 2 - Solenoid 1 297 5Valve 2 - Solenoid 2 298 6Valve 3 - Solenoid 1 302 9Valve 3 - Solenoid 2 303 10Valve 4 - Solenoid 1 307 13Valve 4 - Solenoid 2 308 14

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Solenoid 1 (upstream)

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for thecorresponding solenoid 1 logical function. This output is usedto control the digitial flow control valve. Zero indicates “notused”.

ccc Solenoid 2 (downstream)

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for thecorresponding solenoid 2 logical function. This output is usedto control the digital flow control valve. Zero indicates “notused”.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Side detect method Sgl w/o sw.Sgl 1 sw. (SW2)Sgl 1 sw. (SW1)Dbl 1 sw. (SW2)Dbl 1 sw. (SW1)Dbl 2 sw.

312

Pulse per unit output 1 0 to number of discrete outputs <9> 313

Pulse per unit output 2 0 to number of discrete outputs <10> 314

Trip 1 output 0 to number of discrete outputs 315



______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



312 Side detect method

This parameter selects the method of detecting one of threepossible positions of the product loading swing arm, based oninputs from one or two swing arm position switches. Swingarm switch input is dedicated to two physical discrete contactclosure inputs, accessible at the three connector terminal boardon the main processor board [SWING1 is swing arm input 1which is the rightward terminal on the main processor board][SWING2 is swing arm input 2 which is the leftward terminalon the main processor board] [COMMON is the commonconnection for both inputs and in the center terminal on themain processor board]. (Note: The connections are labeled onthe aluminum board retainer plate.)

# Sgl w/o sw.

Single side without swing arm switch. Side 1 forcedactive at all times.

# Sgl 1 sw. (SW2)

Single side with one swing arm switch.SW2 CLOSED = side 1, SW2 OPEN = parked).

# Sgl 1 sw. (SW1)

Single side with one swing arm switch.SW1 CLOSED = side 1, SW1 OPEN = parked.

# Dbl 1 sw. (SW2)

Double side with one swing arm switch.SW2 CLOSED = side 1, SW2 OPEN = side 2;(SW1 must be OPEN).

# Dbl 1 sw. (SW1)

Double side with one swing arm switch.SW1 CLOSED = side 1, SW1 OPEN = side 2;(SW2 must be OPEN).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)

# Dbl 2 sw.

Double side with two swing arm switches,SW2 CLOSED and SW1 OPEN = side 1;SW2 OPEN and SW1 CLOSED = side 2;SW2 OPEN and SW1 OPEN = parked.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for thepulse per unit output 1 logical function. The drive logic for thisoutput is setup by PC 128 Number of pulse per unit outputs,129 Control meters, 130 Factor, 131 Pulse width (ms).


This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for thepulse per unit output 2 logical function. The drive logic for thisoutput is setup by PC 128 Number of pulse per unit outputs,132 Control meters, 133 Factor, 134 Pulse width (ms).

315 Trip 1 output

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for thetrip 1 output logical function. Output is ON during low flowstartup (indicates low flow startup phase to external device).

316 Trip 2 output

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for thetrip 2 output logical function. Output is ON during low flowstartup and high flow (indicates low flow startup and high flowphases to external device).

317 Trip 3 output

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for thetrip 2 output logical function. Output is ON from start ofdelivery to final trip (OFF at same time as Solenoid 1 instandard digital valve application) (indicates delivery phase toexternal device).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



FunctionRange / Option<Default / *> Meter1 Meter 2 Meter 3 Meter 4

Meter m temp input 0 to number ofRTD inputs

318 324 330 336

Meter m offset (Ohms) -20.00 to +20.00 319 325 331 337

Meter m pres input 0 to number of 4 to 20 mAdcinputs

320 326 332 338

Meter m dens input 0 to number of 4 to 20 mAdcinputs

321 327 333 339

ccc Meter m temp input

This parameter assigns a physical RTD process temperatureinput, corresponding to a flow meter, to the RTD input logicalfunction.

ccc Meter m offset (Ohms)

This parameter sets the resistance compensation for wiringbetween the RTD and the DanLoad 6000 RTD input terminals.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Meter m pres input

This parameter assigns the physical 4 to 20 mAdc input,corresponding to a flow meter, to the meter pressure logicalfunction.

ccc Meter m dens input

This parameter assigns the physical 4 to 20 mAdc input,corresponding to a flow meter, to the meter density logicalfunction.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Off-rack start/end 0 to number of discrete inputs 342

Auto/manual change-over 0 to number of discrete inputs 343

Primary alarm reset 0 to number of discrete inputs <3> 344

342 Off-rack start/end

This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input which isused to signal the DanLoad 6000 to start and stop an off-rackblending (or single product batch, dependent on recipe)loading operation.

343 Auto/manual change-over

This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for theauto/manual mode change-over logical function. This inputselects the Auto Mode or Manual Mode of operation (inputCLOSED = Auto Mode, input OPEN = Manual Mode). Thefunction is used to enable manual operation of the DanLoad6000 in case of a failure of the terminal automation system.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



344 Primary alarm reset

This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for theprimary alarm reset logical function. Normal state = OPEN,a momentary CLOSE of the input circuit resets oldest activeprimary alarm. Another momentary CLOSE of the input circuitresets the next oldest active primary alarm. all primary alarmscan be reset in this manner.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Safety circuit 1 0 to number of discrete inputs 345


Safety circuit 3 0 to number of discrete inputs <2> 347

Safety circuit 4 0 to number of discrete inputs <1> 348





RTD inputs Std 3850 *

Hi 3850

Low 3850

Std 3902

Hi 3902

Low 3902

353

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



345 Safety circuit 1

This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for thesafety circuit 1 logical function. Logical control of this safetycircuit is performed by PC's 249 and 250.






This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for thesafety circuit 4 logical function. Logical control of this safetycircuit is performed by PC's 255 and 256. An additionalfunction of this parameter is to enable the six recipe selectioninputs PC [361, 362, 363, 364, 365, 366] Recipe x input.To enable this feature, set PC 348 Safety circuit 4 to 0 andassign PC [361, 362, 363, 364, 365, 366] Recipe x input todiscrete inputs as required by the installation configuration.


This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for thesafety circuit 5 logical function. Logical control of this safetycircuit is performed by PC's 257, 258, and 265.



______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000







353 RTD inputs

This parameter defines the range of the RTD temperature inputslocated on the 2-channel and 8-channel analog input boards.Selections are:

# Std 3850

RTD inputs are -40 C to 110 C, " = 0.003850o o

# Hi 3850

RTD inputs are 50 C to 200 C, " = 0.003850o o

# Low 3850

RTD inputs are -200 C to -50 C, " = 0.003850o o

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# Std 3902

RTD inputs are -40 C to 110 C, " = 0.003902o o

# Hi 3902

RTD inputs are 50 C to 200 C, " = 0.003902o o

# Low 3902

RTD inputs are -200 C to -50 C, " = 0.003902o o

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Primary LCD type UnknownStandishOptrex *Old Optrex

355

Primary LCD minimum light 0 to 1023 <455> 356

Primary LCD maximum light 0 to 1023 <405> 357

Secondary LCD type UnknownStandishOptrex *Old Optrex

358

Secondary LCD minimum light 0 to 1023 <455> 359

Secondary LCD maximum light 0 to 1023 <405> 360

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc <Primary | Secondary> LCD type

This parameter selects the type of LCD (Liquid CrystalDisplay), based on manufacturer, used in the local DanLoad6000. When the LCD type is known, this information is usedto “auto-adjust” the LCD’s contrast for internal temperaturevariations and also enables the display alarm feature, i.e.keypad/display disconnected or internal temperature too high.There is no need to detect an internal temperature too-lowcondition. The default value is “Optrex”. A few earlyDanLoad 6000's had “Old Optrex” LCD’s marked “Y-LY” onthe back of Optrex’s LCD board (not on Daniel’s display boardto which Optrex’s display board is attached). Most DanLoad6000's shipped between 1993 and April 1996 have “Optrex”LCD’s, usually marked “YJ-LY” on the back of Optrex’s LCDboard, though a few of the earlier “Optrex” LCD’s had thesame mark as the “Old Optrex” LCD’s. Newer DanLoad6000's have “Standish” LCD’s. Select one fo the following:

# Unknown

Automatic contrast adjustment, automatic backlightingadjustment and display failure alarm are disabled.

# Standish

Standish LCD (maximum internal temperature = 70 C) witho

the temperature sensor located just below the top edge of thedisplay.

# Optrex

Optrex “extended range” LCD (maximum internaltemperature = 70 C) with the temperature sensor locatedo

just below the top edge of the display.

# Old Optrex

Optrex “standard range” LCD (maximum internaltemperature = 60 C).o

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc <Primary | Secondary> LCD minimum light

This parameter sets the relative level of ambient light used to setthe backlighting of the display to maximum brightness.

# 0 to 1023

A relative number related to the level of ambient light (defaultis 455).

ccc <Primary | Secondary> LCD maximum light

This parameter sets the relative level of ambient light used to setthe backlighting of the display to minimum brightness(backlighting off).

# 0 to 1023

A relative number related to the level of ambient light (defaultis 405).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Recipe 1 input 0 to number of discrete inputs 361






Recipe 1 output 0 to number of discrete outputs 367






______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Recipe r input

This parameter selects the physical discrete input that is used toactivate the corresponding recipe. This feature permits manualswitch or relay selection of one of six recipes from a remotesource (input CLOSE = recipe selected; input OPEN = recipenot selected).

The six recipe selection inputs are internally multiplexed intoPC 348 Safety circuit 4 input. Therefore, PC 348 Safety circuit4 must be set to 0 to enable the 1 to 6 recipe selection inputs.(Note: If PC 348 Safety circuit 4 is assigned to any input, therecipe selection feature is disabled.)

ccc Recipe r output

This parameter selects a physical discrete output that isenergized during an active batch load. The correspondingoutput is energized at batch start or restart (before the pumpdelay) and deenergized at batch end.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.15 Additive I / O Parameters


Ratio output 0 to numberdiscrete outputs

380 383 386 389 392 395

Feedback input 0 to numberdiscrete inputs

381 384 387 390 393 396

Selection input 0 to numberdiscrete inputs

382 385 388 391 394 397

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.15 Additive I / O Parameters (continued)

Additive I/O Parameters contain data which defines control ofautomatic injection of one to six additives.

ccc Ratio output

This parameter assigns a discrete control output for the additiveinjector drive logical function. The output is used to actuate anadditive injector. Zero indicates “not used”.

ccc Feedback input

This parameter assigns a discrete status input for the injectionfeedback (validation) logical function. The input is used toverify that the additive injection mechanism was actuated by thePC ccc Ratio output.

ccc Selection input

This parameter assigns a discrete status input for the additiveselection logical function. The input is used to enable anadditive for injection from a remote device.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Program Code Definitions (400 through 422) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 128

6.16 Component I / O Parameters


Block valve output 0 to number discrete outputs

400 402 404 406

Block valve input 0 to number discrete inputs

401 403 405 407

Component I/O Parameters contain data which definesautomatic control of component block valves. Block valvecontrol discrete outputs can be assigned for single componentsor combinations of two, three, or four components.

ccc Block valve output

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for thecorresponding component block valve output logical function.

ccc Block valve input

This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for thecorresponding block valve input logical function.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.16 Component I / O Parameters (continued)


Combination 1 1XXX 0 to number discrete outputs 408

Combination 2 X2XX 0 to number discrete outputs 409

Combination 3 12XX 0 to number discrete outputs 410

Combination 4 XX3X 0 to number discrete outputs 411

Combination 5 1X3X 0 to number discrete outputs 412

Combination 6 X23X 0 to number discrete outputs 413

Combination 7 123X 0 to number discrete outputs 414

Combination 8 XXX4 0 to number discrete outputs 415

Combination 9 1XX4 0 to number discrete outputs 416

Combination 10 X2X4 0 to number discrete outputs 417

Combination 11 12X4 0 to number discrete outputs 418

Combination 12 XX34 0 to number discrete outputs 419

Combination 13 1X34 0 to number discrete outputs 420

Combination 14 X234 0 to number discrete outputs 421

Combination 15 1234 0 to number discrete outputs 422

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



408 Combination 1 1XXX

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[component 1 only]

409 Combination 2 X2XX


410 Combination 3 12XX

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 1 and 2]

411 Combination 4 XX3X


412 Combination 5 1X3X

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe)[components 1 and 3]

413 Combination 6 X23X


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



414 Combination 7 123X

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 1, 2, and 3]

415 Combination 8 XXX4


416 Combination 9 1XX4


417 Combination 10 X2X4


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



418 Combination 11 12X4


419 Combination 12 XX34


420 Combination 13 1X34


421 Combination 14 X234


422 Combination 15 1234

This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output to ablock valve, block valves, or other device. This output isCLOSED when the indicated components are being blended(selected by the active recipe).[components 1, 2, 3, and 4]

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density Parameters

Function

Range / Option

<Default / *> Compnt 1 Compnt 2 Compnt 3 Compnt 4

Buoyancy 0.0000 to 9.9999 <0> 426

Temperature units C (Celsius)

F (Fahrenheit)

427

Density units lb/ft3

kg/m3

g/cm3

428

Pressure units psi

Pa

in. H2O

in. Hg

bar

mbar

429

Reference temperature -99.9 to 999.9 <15.0> 430

Sample qty 0 to 9999 <100> 431

Temperature option Off

Linear

API 6A

API 6B

API 6C

API 24A

API 24B

API 54A

API 54B

API 54C

N/A 1-5

China

432 435 438 441

Alpha 0.0002700 to 0.0016740

<0.0005100>

433 436 439 442

Backup temperature -99.9 to 999.9 <15.0> 434 437 440 443

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density(continued)

Temperature / Pressure / Density Parameters contain data thatdefines the calculation methods used to compute the values of

tlC (correction for the effect of temperature of the liquid) and

plC (correction for the effect of pressure of the liquid).

426 Buoyancy

This program code sets the density adjustment for buoyancy inair. The position of the “floating decimal point” depends on thedensity/gravity scale (PC 046).

427 Temperature units (Note: Applicable only if the ccc Temperature option is set toOff or Linear. Selection of an API table automatically selectsthe temperature units.) This parameter selects the temperatureunits to be used in calculations, displays, and logs.

# C Celsius

# F Fahrenheit

428 Density units

This parameter selects the density units to be used incalculations, displays, and logs.

# lb/ft3 pounds per cubic foot

# kg/m3 kilograms per cubic meter

# g/cm3 grams per cubic centimeter

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



429 Pressure units

This parameter selects the pressure unit to be used incalculations, displays, and logs.

# psi pounds per square inch

# Pa Pascals

# in. H2O inches water column

# in. Hg inches mercury

# bar bar

# mbar millibar

430 Reference temperature

This is the reference temperature (T) for the “linear equation”,

tl“6C” and “54C” C options (PC 432, etc.). This program codealso controls temperature correction to a non-standard reference

tltemperature. When a C option (PC 432, etc. per component)with a standard reference temperature, e.g. 60.0 F for APIo

Table 6A, is selected, the reference temperature (PC 430) isautomatically modified to the standard reference temperature.Entering a reference temperature other than the standardreference temperature causes temperature correction to the non-standard reference temperature to be performed.

431 Sample qty

This parameter sets the quantity based temperature samplingfrequency used during a batch delivery. The processtemperature is sampled at the start of a batch delivery andthereafter each time the number of quantity units indicated bythis parameter have been accumulated.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Temperature option

This parameter selects the method of temperature compensationof the process liquid.

# Off

Disable temperature compensation. If the meter pulseinput is not temperature compensated at the flow meter,the DanLoad 6000 calculations produce API grossquantity which is the indicated quantity (meterregistration) times the meter factor. Note that the

tltemperature correction option (C ) is 1.0, i.e. standardquantity = gross quantity.

# Linear

The following linear equation is used to calculatetemperature compensation.

TL TC = 1 - ((t - T) * " )

where:

TLC = Correction for the effect of temperature on aliquid.

t = Observed temperature from an RTD input orthe fixed entry in PC ccc Backuptemperature.

T = Reference temperature from PCccc Reference temperature.

T" = Coefficient of thermal expansion for theliquid at base temperature, from PCccc Alpha.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# API Temperature Compensation Tables:

# API 6A

Generalized crude oils, correction of quantity to60 degrees Fahrenheit against API gravity at 60degrees Fahrenheit. The table inputs are APIgravity at 60 degrees Fahrenheit obtained live orfrom PC ccc Backup density/gravity and theoperating temperature obtained from the RTDinput or from PC ccc Backup temperature,ranges for the table are:

API Gravity Temp. deg. F.

0 to 40 0 to 30040 to 50 0 to 25050 to 100 0 to 200

# API 6B

Generalized products, correction of quantity to 60degrees Fahrenheit against API gravity at 60 degreesFahrenheit. The table inputs are API gravity at 60degrees Fahrenheit obtained live or from PC cccBackup density/gravity and the operating temperatureobtained from the RTD input or from PC ccc Backuptemperature, ranges for the table are:API Gravity Temp. deg. F.

0 to 40 0 to 30040 to 50 0 to 25050 to 85 0 to 200

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# API 6C

Individual and special applications, correction ofquantity to 60 degrees Fahrenheit against a thermalexpansion coefficient at 60 degrees Fahrenheit. Thetable inputs are thermal expansion coefficient at 60degrees Fahrenheit obtained from PC ccc Alpha and theoperating temperature obtained from the RTD input orfrom PC ccc Backup temperature, ranges for the tableare:

Alpha * 10 Temp. deg. F. 6

270 to 510 0 to 300510 to 530 0 to 250530 to 930 0 to 200

The equation used to calculate API table 6C indicated below.It is independent of a group or substance and can be used withany valid thermal expansion factor.

TL T TC = EXP[-" * )t (1 + 0.8" * )t)]

where:

TLC = Correction for the effect of temperature on a liquid.

T" = Coefficient of thermal expansion for the liquid atbase temperature, from PC ccc Alpha.

)t = t - Tt = Observed temperature from an RTD input or the

fixed entry in PC ccc Backup temperature.T = Reference temperature from the PC

ccc Reference temperature.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# API 24A

Generalized crude oils, correction of quantity to 60degrees Fahrenheit against relative density 60/60 degreesFahrenheit. The table inputs are relative density 60/60degrees Fahrenheit obtained live or from PC ccc Backupdensity/gravity and the operating temperature obtainedfrom the RTD input or from PC ccc Backuptemperature, ranges for the table are:

Relative Density Temp.(deg. F)

0.8250 to 1.0760 0 to 3000.7795 to 0.8250 0 to 2500.6110 to 0.7795 0 to 200

# API 24B

Generalized products, correction of quantity to 60 degreesFahrenheit against relative density 60/60 degreesFahrenheit. The table inputs are relative density 60/60degrees Fahrenheit obtained live or from PC ccc Backupdensity/gravity and the operating temperature obtained fromthe RTD input or from PC ccc Backup temperature, rangesfor the table are:

Relative Density Temp.(deg. F)

0.8250 to 1.0760 0 to 3000.7795 to 0.8250 0 to 2500.6535 to 0.7795 0 to 200

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# API 54A

Generalized crude oils, correction of quantity to 15degrees Celsius against density at 15 degrees Celsius.The table inputs are density at 15 degrees Celsiusobtained live or from PC ccc Backup density/gravity andthe operating temperature obtained from the RTD inputor from PC ccc Backup temperature, ranges for thetable are:

Density (kg/m3) Temp. deg. C.

610 to 778 -18 to +95778 to 824 -18 to +125824 to 1075 -18 to +150

# API 54B

Generalized products, correction of quantity to 15 degreesCelsius against density at 15 degrees Celsius. The tableinputs are density at 15 degrees Celsius obtained live orfrom PC ccc Backup density/gravity and the operatingtemperature obtained from the RTD input or from PC cccBackup temperature, ranges for the table are:

Density (kg/m3) Temp. deg. C.

653 to 778 -18 to +95778 to 824 -18 to +125824 to 1075 -18 to +150

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# API 54C

Individual and special applications, correction ofquantity to 15 degrees Celsius against a thermalexpansion coefficient at 15 degrees Celsius. The tableinputs are thermal expansion coefficient at 15 degreesCelsius obtained from PC ccc Alpha and the operatingtemperature obtained from the RTD input or from PCccc Backup temperature, ranges for the table are:

Alpha * 10 Temp. deg. C. 6

486 to 918 -18 to +150918 to 954 -18 to +125954 to 1674 -18 to +95

The equation used to calculate API table 54C is indicated below.It is independent of a group or substance and can be used withany valid thermal expansion factor.

TL T TC = EXP[-" * )t (1 + 0.8" * )t)]

where:

TLC = Correction for the effect of temperature on a liquid.

T" = Coefficient of thermal expansion for the liquid atbase temperature, from PC ccc Alpha.

)t = t - Tt = Observed temperature from an RTD input or the

fixed entry in PC ccc Backup temperature.T = Reference temperature from PC

ccc Reference.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# N/A 1 to N/A 5

Temperature correction is not applicable. These optionshave the same effect as setting to “OFF”.

# China

This setting is similar to “Linear” Ctl method, but usinga look-up table for the coefficient of the thermal

20expansion (" ) based on component density at 20 C pero

China Xinxing project.

cc Alpha

TThis parameter sets the coefficient of thermal expansion ((" )used by the linear equation or the API tables 6C or 54C. Thedefault value is 0.0005100

ccc Backup temperature

This parameter sets the fixed temperature value to use for thecorresponding component in case of a failure of the livetemperature input from the RTD. The default value is 15.0.The temperature units for this parameter are determined by theselection of PC 427 Temperature units.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Pressure option Off

Const

11.2.1

11.2.2

11.2.1M

11.2.2M

444 447 450 453

F-factor 0 to 999999999 445 448 451 454

Vapor pressure 0.0 to 9999.9 446 449 452 455

Density/gravity option Off *

On

456 458 460 462

Backup density/gravity 0.00 to 100.00

for API 6A, 6B, 6C

0.6110 to 1.0760

for API 24A, 24B

610.5 to 1075.0

for API 54A, 54B, 54C

610.5 to 1075.0

for IP 60A, IP 60B

457 459 461 463

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Pressure option

PC ccc Pressure option selects the method of pressurecompensation. The following selections are available.

# Off

Disable pressure compensation.

# Const

The following linear equation is used to calculatepressure compensation.

1

PL C = --------------------------------- [1 - (operating pressure -

equilibrium pressure) F-factor]

where:

PLC = Correction for the effect of pressureon a liquid.

operatingpressure = The pressure obtained from a

pressure transmitter.equilibriumpressure = The equilibrium vapor pressure

obtained from PC ccc Vapor pressure.

F-factor = The compressibility factor for theliquid obtained from PC ccc F-factor.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# API Pressure Compensation Tables:

# 11.2.1Hydrocarbon liquids, correction of quantity to 0 poundsper square inch against API gravity at 60 degreesFahrenheit. The table inputs are API gravity at 60degrees Fahrenheit obtained live or from PC cccBackup density/gravity and the F-factor obtained fromPC ccc F-factor and the operating pressure obtainedfrom a pressure transmitter, ranges for the table are:

API Gravity Temp.(deg.F) Pressure (PSI)

0 to 90 -20 to +200 0 to 1500

# 11.2.2

Light hydrocarbon liquids, correction of quantity to0 pounds per square inch against relative density60/60 degrees Fahrenheit. The table inputs arerelative density at 60/60 degrees Fahrenheit obtainedlive or from PC ccc Backup density/gravity and theF-factor obtained from PC ccc F-factor and theoperating pressure obtained from a pressuretransmitter, ranges for the table are:

Rel.Density Temp.(dg.F) Press(PSI)

0.350 to 0.637 -50 to +140 0 to 2200

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



# 11.2.1M

Hydrocarbon liquids, correction of quantity to 0kiloPascals against absolute density at 15 degreesCelsius. The table inputs are absolute density at 15degrees Celsius obtained live or from PC ccc Backupdensity/gravity and the F-factor obtained from PC cccF-factor and the operating pressure obtained from apressure transmitter, ranges for the table are:Abs.Dns.(kg/m3) Temp.(deg.C) Press(kPa)

638 to 1074 -30 to +90 0 to 10300

# 11.2.2M

Light hydrocarbon liquids, correction of quantity to0 kiloPascals against absolute density at 15 degreesCelsius. The table inputs are absolute density at 15degrees Celsius obtained live or from PC ccc Backupdensity/gravity and the F-factor obtained from PCccc F-factor and the operating pressure obtainedfrom a pressure transmitter, ranges for the table are:

Abs.Dns(kg/m3) Temp.(deg.C) Press(kPa)

350 to 637 -46 to +60 0 to 15200

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc F-factor

This parameter sets the constant F-factor used in pressurecompensation calculations (CPL).

ccc Vapor pressure

This parameter sets the equilibrium vapor pressure (pressure atwhich the liquid changes to a gas at operating temperature) forthe corresponding component.

ccc Density/gravity option

This parameter selects the status of using density inputs in theflow calculations.

# Off

# On

ccc Backup density/gravity

This parameter sets the value of the density (or gravity) to usedin calculations when a live analog input is not available. Entriesin this field are validated in the following manner:

Temperature Option Valid Entry

6A, 6B, 6C 0.00 to 100.00 API gravity

24A, 24B 0.6110 to 1.0760 relativedensity

Off, Linear, 610.5 to 1075.0 kg/m354A, 54B, 54C

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Function

Range / Option

<Default / *> Meter 1 Meter 2 Meter 3 Meter 4

Pressure @4 mA 0 to 9999.9

<0.0>

464 468 472 476

Pressure @20 mA 0 to 9999.9

<0.0>

465 469 473 477

Density @4 mA 466 470 474 478

Density @20 mA 467 471 475 479

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Pressure @4 mA

Zero scale for pressure input from transmitter. Engineering unitspecified by PC 429 Pressure units.

ccc Pressure @20 mA

Full scale for pressure input from transmitter. Engineeringunits specified by PC 429 Pressure units.

ccc Density @4 mA

Zero scale for density input from transmitter. Engineering unitsspecified by PC 428 Density units.

ccc Density @20 mA

Full scale for density input from transmitter. Engineering unitsspecified by PC 428 Density units.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.18 Recipes


Recipe Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Number of recipes 0 to 30 <1> 480

Name 1 to 16 chars <Recipe #1>

481 487 493 499 505 511 517 523 529 535

Component 1 % 0 to 100 <100> 482 488 494 500 506 512 518 524 530 536

Component 2 % 0 to 100 483 489 495 501 507 513 519 525 531 537

Component 3 % 0 to 100 484 490 496 502 508 514 520 526 532 538

Component 4 % 0 to 100 485 491 497 503 509 515 521 527 533 539

Sequence to load nnnn 486 492 498 504 510 516 522 528 534 540

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.18 Recipes (continued)


Recipe Number 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Name 1 to 16 chars 541 547 553 559 565 571 577 583 589 595

Component 1 % 0 to 100 542 548 554 560 566 572 578 584 590 596

Component 2 % 0 to 100 543 549 555 561 567 573 579 585 591 597

Component 3 % 0 to 100 544 550 556 562 568 574 580 586 592 598

Component 4 % 0 to 100 545 551 557 563 569 575 581 587 593 599


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Recipe Number 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Name 1 to 16 chars 601 607 613 619 625 631 637 643 649 655

Component 1 % 0 to 100 602 608 614 620 626 632 638 644 650 656

Component 2 % 0 to 100 603 609 615 621 627 633 639 645 651 657

Component 3 % 0 to 100 604 610 616 622 628 634 640 646 652 658

Component 4 % 0 to 100 605 611 617 623 629 635 641 647 653 659


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Recipe Parameters contain data which defines the percentage ofeach of one to four components that can be blended into acomposite liquid for deliveries. Single components are assignedrecipe names so that the component can be referred to by acommon name (example: gasoline in place of component 2).In the case of a single component delivery, PC ccc Component# % value for that component is 100 percent.

480 Number of recipes

This parameter sets the total number of recipes. At least onerecipe must be defined.

ccc Name

This parameter contains the name used in displays and logs toidentify the recipe.

ccc Component 1 %

This parameter sets the percentage of this component used in thedelivered blend.

ccc Component 2 %


ccc Component 3 %


ccc Component 4 %


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Sequence to load

(Note: Applicable to sequential blending only.) This parameterselects the sequence to deliver the components. The sum of therecipe selected component percentages must equal 100 percent.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.19 Data Communications

FunctionRange / Option<Default / *> Ch. A Ch. B Multi-drop Network

DUART address 0 to 255 <0> 661

Network address 0 to 255 <0> 662

COM# Mode Not used *Modbus RTUASCIIData logging

663 668

COM# Data Rate 300 bps600 bps1200 bps2400 bps4800 bps9600 bps19200 bps38400 bps

664 669

COM# Word Size 5 bits6 bits7 bits8 bits

665 670

COM# Stop Bits 1 bit1-1/2 bits2 bits

666 671

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


COM# Parity NoneOddEven

667 672

6.19 Data Communications (continued)

Data Communications Parameters contain data which definesoperating parameters for the one or two serial ports and thenetwork port. Serial ports can be used for communications witha Terminal Automation System, host computer, and datalogging printer or device. The network port can be used forcommunications with a Terminal Automation System or otherhost computer.

661 DUART address

This parameter sets the address used by a terminal automationsystem or other host computer for bi-directional datacommunications with the DanLoad 6000. This parameter is setby a DIP switch located on the DUART module.

Each DanLoad 6000 on an RS-485 multi-drop datacommunications link must have a unique address.

662 Network address

This parameter sets the address used by a network master for bi-directional data communications with the DanLoad 6000. Theparameter is set by a DIP switch located on the networkmodule.

Each DanLoad 6000 in a network communications link musthave a unique address.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



663 Mode

This parameter selects the protocol used for datacommunications with an external device, such as a data printer,a terminal automation system, or other host computer.

# Not used

This port is not assigned.

# Modbus RTU

Modicon Modbus RTU (binary) protocol.

# ASCII

DanLoad 6000 ASCII protocol.

# Data logging

Send data logs to this port, can be connected to an

alpha-numeric data printer or other data logging device.

ccc Data rate

This parameter selects the bits per second data rate used by thisport.

ccc Word size

This parameter selects the data word length in bits.

ccc Stop bits

This parameter selects of the number of stop bits used in serialdata transmission.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Parity

This parameter selects the parity checking method.

# None

Parity checking in not performed.

# Odd

Odd parity checking is performed.

# Even

Even parity checking is performed.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.20 Dynamic Data Display

Function Range / Option Program Code

Enabled No

Yes *

679

Element 1 data code 3 digit data display code 680
















______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.20 Dynamic Data Display (continued)

Dynamic Data Display Parameters contain data which definesfrom one to sixteen operating parameters that can be viewed atany time while the DanLoad 6000 is operating in the loadingmode. The viewable data elements are displayed in four groupswith four elements in each group. The dynamic data variablesthat can be assigned to each element (viewable record) areselected by entry of a one to three digit identifying number(Dynamic Data Display Data Code). These Data Codes arelisted in Section 6.20.1.

680 Element 1 data code

This parameter enables or disables the dynamic data display.

# No The dynamic data display is disabled.

# Yes The dynamic data display can be invoked bypressing the “SELECT” key in the loadingscreen.


This parameter selects display of a specified data variable at thepage 1, line 1 position in the Dynamic Data Display.







______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



















______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes

Up to sixteen of the Dynamic Data Display Data Codes listedbelow can be selected for inclusion in the Dynamic DataDisplay. The label and the current value of these variables canbe displayed in a window, superimposed in the center area ofthe Loading Display. Up to four windows, each windowcontaining four dynamic data elements can be defined. Thedynamic data is displayable while in the Loading Mode bypressing the SELECT key. The 9 and 8 arrow keys are usedto change the display pages. The CLEAR key removes theDynamic Data Display window from the Loading Display.

Code Display Data Function

Batch Data

001 Arm position swing arm position indicator002 Grs batch qty gross batch quantity003 Std batch qty standard batch quantity

Flow Meter 1 Data

004 Mtr 1 grs total gross transaction quantity005 Mtr 1 std total standard transaction quantity006 Mtr 1 grs batch gross batch quantity007 Mtr 1 std batch standard batch quantity008 Mtr 1 flw rate instantaneous flow rate009 Mtr 1 ave flw rate average flow rate010 Mtr 1 max flw rate maximum flow rate this batch011 Mtr 1 factor meter factor012 Mtr 1 pls cnt pulse count total


013 Mtr 1 pls flrt1 pulse count at low flow rate014 Mtr 1 pls flrt2 pulse count at flow rate 2015 Mtr 1 pls flrt3 pulse count at flow rate 3016 Mtr 1 pls flrt4 pulse count at flow rate 4017 Mtr 1 grs nauth unauthorized gross quantity018 Mtr 1 std nauth unauthorized standard quantity019 Mtr 1 grs start start gross quantity020 Mtr 1 std start start standard quantity

Flow Meter 2 Data

021 Mtr 2 grs total gross transaction quantity022 Mtr 2 std total standard transaction quantity023 Mtr 2 grs batch gross batch quantity024 Mtr 2 std batch standard batch quantity025 Mtr 2 flw rate instantaneous flow rate026 Mtr 2 ave flw rate average flow rate027 Mtr 2 max flw rate maximum flow rate this batch028 Mtr 2 factor meter factor029 Mtr 2 pls cnt pulse count total030 Mtr 2 pls flrt1 pulse count at low flow rate031 Mtr 2 pls flrt2 pulse count at flow rate 2032 Mtr 2 pls flrt3 pulse count at flow rate 3033 Mtr 2 pls flrt4 pulse count at flow rate 4034 Mtr 2 grs nauth unauthorized gross quantity035 Mtr 2 std nauth unauthorized standard quantity036 Mtr 2 grs start start gross quantity037 Mtr 2 std start start standard quantity

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes(continued)


Flow Meter 3 Data



Flow Meter 4 Data


Component 1 Data

072 Cmp 1 grs batch component gross quantity, batch073 Cmp 1 std batch component standard quantity, batch074 Cmp 1 curr temp component current temperature075 Cmp 1 ave temp component batch average temp076 Cmp 1 ave vlv cls comp. average FCV closure time077 Cmp 1 batch % component # % from recipe

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Component 2 Data


Component 3 Data


Component 4 Data



Additive Injection Data (Batch) 096 Add 1 total accumulated additive volume097 Add 2 total accumulated additive volume098 Add 3 total accumulated additive volume099 Add 4 total accumulated additive volume100 Add 5 total accumulated additive volume101 Add 6 total accumulated additive volume

Delivery Quantity Data

102 Preset qty Preset entry in Loading Display103 Mtr 1 grs load accumulated total (n.nn)104 Mtr 2 grs load accumulated total (n.nn)105 Mtr 3 grs load accumulated total (n.nn)106 Mtr 4 grs load accumulated total (n.nn)

Pressure and Density Data

107 Cmp 1 ave dens average density, component 1108 Cmp 1 ave pres average pressure, component 1109 Cmp 2 ave dens average density, component 2110 Cmp 2 ave pres average pressure, component 2111 Cmp 3 ave dens average density, component 3112 Cmp 3 ave pres average pressure, component 3113 Cmp 4 ave dens average density, component 4114 Cmp 4 ave pres average pressure, component 4

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Additive Data for Batch

115 Add 1 batch additive 1 volume this/last batch116 Add 2 batch additive 2 volume this/last batch117 Add 3 batch additive 3 volume this/last batch118 Add 4 batch additive 4 volume this/last batch119 Add 5 batch additive 5 volume this/last batch120 Add 6 batch additive 6 volume this/last batch

Total Flow Rate

121 Flow rate load flow rate


Component Blend Ratio

122 Cmp 1 % comp 1 % for blend ratio adj123 Cmp 2 % comp 2 % for blend ratio adj124 Cmp 3 % comp 3 % for blend ratio adj125 Cmp 4 % comp 4 % for blend ratio adj

Quantity Correction Factor for Load

126 Mtr 1 Ctl meter 1127 Mtr 2 Ctl meter 2128 Mtr 3 Ctl meter 3129 Mtr 4 Ctl meter 4

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.21 Data Logging


Batch summary Off *

On

696

Transaction summary Off *

On

697

Alarm log Off *

On

698

Power fail log Off *

On

699

Program mode entry/exit Off *

On

700

W&M switch opened/closed Off *

On

701

Program value change log Off *

On

702

Meter proving run log Off *

On

703

Crash memory summary Off *

On

704

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.21 Data Logging (continued)

Data Logging Parameters are used to enable or disable the datalogging function for nine groups of related data (reports) andindividual events.

696 Batch summary

This parameter enables or disables logging of batch summarydata.

# Off

Disable logging of batch summary data.

# On

Enable logging of batch summary data.

697 Transaction summary

This parameter enables or disables logging of transactionsummary data.

# Off

Disable logging of transaction summary data.

# On

Enable logging of transaction summary data.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



698 Alarm log

This parameter enables or disables logging of alarms.

# Off

Disable logging of alarms.

# On

Enable logging of alarms.

699 Power fail log

This parameter enables or disables logging of power fail.

# Off

Disable logging of power fail.

# On

Enable logging of power fail data.

700 Program mode entry/exit

This parameter enables or disables logging of program modeentry / exit events data.

# Off

Disable logging of program mode entry / exit events.

# On

Enable logging of program mode entry / exit events.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



701 W&M switch opened/closed

This parameter enables or disables logging of Weights andMeasures switch open / close events.

# Off

Disable logging of Weights and Measures switch open /close events.

# On

Enable logging of Weights and Measures switch open /close events.

702 Program value change log

This parameter is enables or disables logging of program codevalue change event.

# Off

Disable logging of Program Code value change event.

# On

Enable logging of Program Code value change event.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



703 Master proving run log

This parameter is enables or disables logging of masterproving run log.

# Off

Disable logging of master proving run log.

# On

Enable logging of master proving run log.

704 Crash memory summary

This parameter is enables or disables logging of Crash memorysummary data.

# Off

Disable logging of Crash memory summary data.

# On

Enable logging of Crash memory summary data.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Program Code Definitions (710 to 799) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 176

6.22 Blending


Rate reduction 0 to 9999 <100> 712

Low flow start qty 0 to 99999 <50> 713

Clean line qty 0 to 9999 <0> 714

Low prop fac 1 to 4 <1> 715

Correct after qty 0 to 9999 <100> 716

Alarm after qty 0 to 9999 <200> 717

Adjustment qty 0 to 9999 <50> 718

Comp % display Gross *Std

719

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.22 Blending (continued)

Blending Parameters, PC's 710 to 770 are used to define themethod of handling a product blending process. Variousparameters in this group interact with other parameters,dependent on the type of blending process defined by PC 026Unit type. Details on configuration of each type of blendingoperation are contained in Section 3 - Setup.

712 Rate reduction

This parameter defines the flow rate reduction [high (normal)flow rate minus PC 712 Rate reduction] that is used if the highflow rate cannot be maintained.

713 Low flow start qty

This parameter defines the quantity to load at the low flow ratebefore increasing the flow rate to high (normal) flow rate.

714 Clean line qty

This parameter defines the quantity of the primary componentto load at the end of the batch delivery to purge the blend fromthe loading lines.

715 Low prop fac

This parameter defines the flow rate at which to delivercomponents that are low percentage quantities in comparison tothe primary component of the blend.

716 Correct after qty

This parameter defines the quantity of the blend to deliverbefore blend adjustment begins.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



717 Alarm after qty

This parameter defines the quantity of the blend to deliverbefore enabling the checking and action of the blend ratio alarmfunction that generates the message: Unable to maintain blend.

718 Adjustment qty

This parameter defines the blend quantity to consider whenadjusting the flow, via flow control valves, to maintain theblend ratio.

719 Comp % display

This parameter defines the quantity basis (gross or standard) onwhich the batch component percentages are computed fordisplay.

# Gross

# Std

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000




Blend error method Grspctbatch *StdpctbatchGrsqtydiffStdqtydiffGrspctsmplStdpctsmplFlrtsmpl

722

Max dev % 0 to 999 <2> 723

Blend tol % 0 to 999 <5> 724

Max dev qty 0 to 9999 <20> 725

Blend tol qty 0 to 9999 <40> 726

Blend sample qty 0 to 9999 <10> 727

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



722 Blend error method

This parameter defines the method for computing blend ratioadjustments and sensing blend ratio error conditions.

# Grspctbatch

Gross quantity percentages of each blend component are used inbatch delivery calculations.

# Stdpctbatch

Standard quantity percentages of each blend component are usedin the batch delivery calculations.

# Grsqtydiff

Gross quantity difference between each blend component areused in the batch delivery calculations.

# Stdqtydiff

Standard quantity difference between each blend component are

used in the batch delivery calculations.

# Grspctsmpl

Samples of the gross quantity percentages of each blendcomponent are used in the batch delivery calculations.

# Stdpctsmpl

Samples of the standard quantity percentages of each blendcomponent are used in the batch delivery calculations.

# Flrtsmpl

The sampled flow rates of each blend component are used in thebatch delivery calculations.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



723 Max dev %

This parameter defines the maximum percentage deviation forthe blend and is used in adjusting the ratio of each componentof the blend.

724 Blend tol %

This parameter defines the maximum percentage toleranceallowed for the blend before generating an Unable to maintainblend alarm.

725 Max dev qty

This parameter defines the maximum quantity deviation for theblend and is used in adjusting the ratio of each component of theblend.

726 Blend tol qty

This parameter defines the maximum quantity tolerance allowedfor the blend before generating an Unable to maintain blendalarm.

727 Blend sample qty

This parameter defines the blend quantity to deliver betweencalculations of blend ratio by percentage and quantity methods.If the blend error method is selected as “Grspctsmpl”,“stdpctsmpl” or “Flrtsmpl”, the recommended value for blendsample qty is 30 or higher.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Function

Range / Option

<Default / *> Meter 1 Meter 2 Meter 3 Meter 4

Flow adj fac 0.00 to 9.99

<1.00>

728 734 740 746

Ratio adj fac 0.00 to 9.99

<1.00>

729 735 741 747

Function

Range / Option

<Default / *> Compt 1 Compt 2 Compt 3 Compt 4

Stop rate 0 to 99999

<120>

752 758 764 770

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



ccc Flow adj fac

This parameter defines a factor for each flow meter used in theblend. The factor provides fine tuning of individual flow ratesfor blend ratio adjustment.

ccc Ratio adj fac

This parameter defines a factor for each component of theblend. The factor provides fine tuning for individualcomponents for blend ratio adjustment.

ccc Stop rate

This parameter defines the low flow rate for each component ofthe blend to use during delivery of the stop quantity at the endof the delivery. The total blend flow rate is the sum of the cccStop rate for each component of the blend.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



FunctionRange / Option<Default / *> R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11-20 R21-30

Low flowrate

0 to 99999 <200>

776 778 780 782 784 786 788 790 792 794 796 798

High flowrate

0 to 99999 <600>

777 779 781 783 785 787 789 791 793 795 797 799

ccc Low flow rate

This parameter defines the low flow rate setpoint for the batchrecipe loading profile. Recipes 1 through 10 each haveindependent low flow rate setpoints. Recipes 11 through 20share one low flow rate setpoint. Recipes 21 through 30 shareone low flow rate setpoint.

ccc High flow rate

This parameter defines the high flow rate setpoint for the batchrecipe loading profile. Recipes 1 through 10 each haveindependent high flow rate setpoints. Recipes 11 through 20share one common high flow rate setpoint. Recipes 21 through30 share one common high flow rate setpoint.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Program Code Definitions (800 to 831) _____________________________________________________ 6 - 188

6.23 Additive Pumps / Block Valves

FunctionRange / Option<Default / *> Add 1 Add 2 Add 3 Add 4 Add 5 Add 6

Pump output 0 to number ofdiscrete outputs

800 806 812 818 824 830

Block valve output 0 to number ofdiscrete outputs

801 807 813 819 825 831

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


6.23 Additive Pumps / Block Valves (continued)

This group of parameters is used to assign the discrete controloutputs which control additive injector pumps and additive lineblock valves. Assigned and active additive pumps and controlvalves are opened when the batch load is started. Additives arethen injected under control of PC ccc Ratio output for eachadditive. An additive block valve is closed after the last PC cccRatio output for the batch delivery is completed. An additivepump is stopped at the time the batch delivery is stopped.

ccc Pump output

This parameter assigns a physical discrete output for controllingRUN / STOP of an additive injector pump.

ccc Block valve output

This parameter assigns a physical discrete output for controllingOPEN / CLOSE of an additive line block valve.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000



Appendix A

Installation Worksheets

Input / Output Signal

Configuration

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 1

This appendix contains worksheets to be used for documenting input / output signal assignments.

These worksheets can be used to define the relation between the physical input / output signal

channels and the logical channels (functions) of the DanLoad 6000. The worksheets also contain

information that can be used in generating wire lists and / or wiring diagrams for the installation.

An overview of the contents of the worksheets is provided below.

# Worksheet 1

General overview of the system and guide to other worksheets.

# Worksheet 2

Overview of the input / output signal capability of several standard input / output board

configurations. This worksheet aids in determining the required input / output signal

board complement after completing the other worksheets.

# Worksheets 3 through 7b

Contain terminal wiring information for all process signal boards that can be installed in

slots J1 through J7. The Board Channel is determined by the electrical design of the

board. The Assigned Channel is determined automatically by the DanLoad 6000 and is

solely dependent on the board complement of the instrument and the location of each

board. These physical channels are assigned to logical channels and documented using

worksheets 12 through 16.

# Worksheets 8 through 11

Contain terminal wiring information for the DC power supply, swing arm and DUART.

These worksheets are provided for system wiring documentation only, the terminal /

channel assignments cannot be changed.

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

2 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A

# Worksheets 12 through 16

Contain information on the assignable logical channels (functions), the physical input /

output channels indicated in Worksheets 3 through 7 are assigned to logical channels

(functions) which are identified by program codes. The numbers indicated in the columns

indicate the identifying number of the corresponding flow meter, component, flow control

valve, or additive (these numbers are not signal count numbers as is the case in the

physical signal termination worksheets, 3 through 7).

# Physical input channels are assignable to the following logical input channels

# Four flow meter pulse

# Four RTD process temperature

# Four 4 to 20 mAdc process pressure or density

# Forty-three assignable status functions

# Two non-assignable swing arm status (on main processor board)

# Physical output channels are assignable to the following logical output

channels

# Forty-three assignable control functions

# Two non-assignable optically isolated raw pulse outputs (two for each

meter pulse board)

Note: The number of logical channels (functions) that can be assigned to physical

discrete input and output channels is greater than the number of available physical discrete

channels. Some logical discrete input and output functions are mutually exclusive and

cannot be configured simultaneously.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 3

A set of worksheets for each DanLoad 6000 (unit) should be photocopied. Multiple copies of

Worksheets 3 through 7b, one copy for each installed board, should be made. The unit number

assigned to each DanLoad 6000 is derived as described below. If the DanLoad 6000 will

communicate with a data logging device or terminal automation system, each instrument must

be assigned a unit number. This assignment is accomplished by DIP switches located on both the

DUART and local area network modules. The range of the unit number is 1 to 255. A multi-

drop network implemented with the RS-485 port (DUART) has an electrical limit of 32 units to

one RS-485 master port. However, the unit numbers of these 32 units can be any unique number

within the range of 1 to 255. If both the DUART and local area network modules are installed,

it is advisable to use the same unit number for both modules to simplify delivery accounting data.

If neither communications module is installed, it is advisable to use the same number range, 1

to 255, to a assign unit number for each DanLoad 6000. This will avoid the need to renumber

the units if data logging and / or terminal automation system communications are added in the

future.

The worksheets should be used to document the configuration of each DanLoad 6000 during the

initial setup procedure. Channel number series within the DanLoad 6000 are identified by header

messages that indicate the series type or application. An example is the header message: Discrete

outputs. When entering channel data into the worksheets, add the following tag identifications

to the channel numbers to clearly identify each channel.

Tag-Channel Number Channel Type

FT-# Meter pulse input (# range is 1 to 4)

TE-# RTD input (# range is 1 to 4)

XT-# 4 to 20 mAdc analog input (# range is 1 to 4)

ACI-# Discrete Vac input (# range is 1 to maximum number of discrete

AC inputs located on all AC I/O and Enhanced AC I/O boards)

ACO-# Discrete Vac output (# range is 1 to maximum number of discrete

AC outputs located on all AC I/O and Enhanced AC I/O boards)

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

4 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A

Tag-Channel Number Channel Type

DCI-# Discrete Vdc input (# range is 1 to maximum number of discrete

DC inputs located on all DC I/O and Enhanced AC I/O boards)

DCO-# Discrete Vdc output (# range is 1 to maximum number of discrete

DC outputs located on all DC I/O and Meter pulse boards)

Data should be entered in the worksheets in the following manner.

# The number of physical devices present and the number of components and additives

should be entered into Worksheet 1. This worksheet provides an overview of the system

configuration.

# Enter the primary information such as number of flow meter pulse inputs, number of

swing arm inputs, and serial communications into Worksheet 2. This worksheet indicates

common and recommended input / output signal board configurations. The current board

complement and board location in the DanLoad 6000 can be entered at this time.

# The initial setup procedure should be performed at this time. Section 3 provides

information on the initial setup procedure. After the initial setup procedure has been

performed, the assigned physical hardware channel for each input / output channel can

be determined in the following manner. While operating in the Program Mode, press the

ALT+ 0 key to display the physical hardware configuration of the instrument. The first

display page shows the type of boards installed in slots J1 through J7. This board

complement should be entered in Worksheet 2. Scroll through the I/O assignment display

pages using the 9 and 8 arrow keys. Manually enter the assigned hardware channels

indicated in the leftward column of the display pages into the Assigned Channel column

of the corresponding Worksheets 3 through 7b. Also enter the DanLoad 6000 Unit number

and the physical slot, Jn number where the board is located. The number and type of

these assigned hardware channels determine the fixed input / output signal capability of

the individual DanLoad 6000.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 5

# Enter the power supply wiring information into Worksheet 8.

# Enter the swing arm wiring information into Worksheet 9. Enter a descriptive

identification of the loading side, such as north, west, etc.

# Enter the wiring information for the DUART, Worksheet 10, and the local area network,

Worksheet 11, if available at this time.

# The final step is to record or re-assign the physical hardware channels which are assigned

to the logical channels (functions) indicated in Worksheets 12 through 16. These

worksheets contain lists of all logical channels (functions) that can be assigned to

physical input or output channels. The two limitations for physical channel to logical

channel assignment are that the physical hardware to handle the channel must be present

and the physical input or output channel cannot have been previously assigned to some

other logical channel (function). Physical input / output channel assignments are made,

while in Program Mode, by using the 9 or 8 arrow key to place the box cursor over a

physical channel number (rightward column) corresponding to a logical channel

(function) displayed to the left of the physical channel number. The currently assigned

physical channel identification number, obtained from Worksheets 3 through 7b, is then

verified or changed. Press the ENTER key to accept the assignment or the CLEAR key

to reject the assignment and re-enter a number. If the entry is a valid assignment, the box

cursor automatically steps to the next parameter in the group. If the hardware is not

installed to support this physical channel or the number of supported physical channels is

exceeded, the message Point does not exist is displayed on the message line. If the

physical channel has previously been assigned to another logical channel (function), the

message Point already used is displayed on the message line. A previously assigned

physical channel can be re-assigned as follows. Locate the parameter where the physical

channel is assigned. Set the physical channel selection for that parameter to 0 (zero) to

cancel the assignment. Re-select the logical channel (function) that previously would not

accept the assignment and enter the physical channel number to make the assignment. If

necessary, re-select the logical channel (function) that was set to 0 (zero) in the step

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

6 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A

above and make a new assignment to a desired unused physical channel.

The logical channels listed in Worksheets 12 through 16 are identified by program codes and

names. The functions of these logical channels are described below.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 7

A.1 Flow Meter Logical Input Signals (Worksheet 12)

# ccc Meter pulse board input

Assigns a physical meter pulse input to this logical channel. A minimum of one

flow meter input must be assigned. Worksheet 3 indicates the available flow meter

input physical channels.

# ccc Meter # temp input

Assigns a physical RTD input to this logical channel. Worksheet 7a / 7b indicates

the available RTD input physical channels.

# ccc Meter # pres input

Assigns a physical 4 to 20 mAdc input to this logical channel. Worksheets 7a / 7b

indicate the available analog input physical channels.

# ccc Meter # dens input

Assigns a physical 4 to 20 mAdc input to this logical channel. Worksheets 7a / 7b

indicate the available analog input physical channels.

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

8 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A

A.2 Component Logical Input / Output Signals (Worksheet 13)

# ccc Pump control output

Assigns a physical discrete control output for a component pump control logical

function. The output is normally OPEN (pump off) and CLOSED to run the

pump motor. In many cases, one output can be used to energize two, three, or

four component pump contactors. This configuration conserves discrete outputs

when the pump logic is such that multiple component pumps are always energized

simultaneously.

# ccc Block valve output

Assigns a physical discrete control output for component block valve control

logical function. The output is normally OPEN (block valve closed) and

CLOSED to open the block valve.

# ccc Block valve input

Assigns a physical discrete status input for component block valve logical function.

Input is CLOSED when block valve is closed and OPEN when block valve is open.

This input explicitly informs the DanLoad 6000 that the component block valve is

open at the start of a batch delivery and closed at the end of a batch delivery. If

the input is not used, a failure to open block valve is indicated by a no flow alarm.

A failure to close block valve may be indicated by unauthorized flow alarm.

However, if the flow control valve is tight sealing, a failure to close block valve

is not detectable without status to this input.

# ccc Combination # nnnn

Assigns a physical discrete control output that is CLOSED when a combination of

components is selected for delivery. All fifteen possible combinations of four

components enabled and disabled are defined. These outputs conserve multiple

discrete outputs by performing internal logic of logical ANDing the four ccc Block

valve outputs, program codes 400, 402, 404, and 406.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 9

A.3 Flow Control Valve Logical I/O Signals (Worksheet 14)

(Flow control valve circuit logic is described in Section 3. A minimum of one flow

control valve must be defined.)

# ccc Solenoid 1 (upstream)

Assigns a physical discrete control output for the upstream (normally open) pilot

on a digital flow control valve

# ccc Solenoid 2 (downstream)

Assigns a physical discrete control output for the upstream (normally closed) pilot

on a digital flow control valve)

# ccc Stem switch 1 (N.O.)

Assigns a physical discrete status input for the low flow shutdown (normally open)

microswitch on a two stage flow control valve

# ccc Stem switch 2 (N.C.)

Assigns a physical discrete status input for the low flow startup (normally closed)

microswitch on a two stage flow control valve

# ccc Close input

Assigns a physical discrete status input for closing the flow control valve during

a delivery. If assigned, the input circuit must remain CLOSED during a delivery.

If the input is OPENED, the flow control valve will be set fully closed. One

common application in delivery of LPG is from a normally closed low pressure

switch. An OPEN switch indicates that the downstream pressure is insufficient to

prevent product flashing at the flow meter. The delivery is suspended, to protect

the flow meter, when the switch OPENS.

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

10 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A

A.4 Additive Injection Logical I/O Signals (Worksheet 15)

# ccc Ratio output

Assigns a physical discrete control output to drive an additive injection device.

# ccc Feedback input

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an injection sensing device, such as

a flow switch, located on an additive injection system.

# ccc Selection input

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an external switch or relay for

enabling injection of an additive.

# ccc Pump output

Assigns a physical discrete control output for RUN / STOP control of an additive

pump.

# ccc Block valve output

Assigns a physical discrete control output for OPEN / CLOSE control of an

additive block valve.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 11

A.5 Miscellaneous Logical I/O Signals (Worksheet 16)

# 342 Off-rack start/end

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an external switch or relay that

signals the DanLoad 6000 to start or end an off-rack blending operation. A

CLOSED input circuit indicates to start a batch / blend operation. An OPEN input

circuit indicates to end the active batch / blend operation.

# 343 Auto/manual change-over

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an external switch or relay that

controls the operating mode of the DanLoad 6000. This input is designed to be

driven by a watchdog timer or similar type of circuit in a terminal automation

system. A CLOSED input circuit indicates that the terminal automation system is

functioning properly and places the DanLoad 6000 in the Auto mode. An OPEN

input circuit indicates that the terminal automation system is off-line and places the

DanLoad 6000 in the Manual mode. The Manual mode enables local control of

the batch delivery operation from the DanLoad 6000 operator control panel.

# 344 Primary alarm reset

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an external switch or relay contact

that resets an active primary alarm. This input permits resetting primary alarms

so that a batch delivery can be resumed after the alarm conditions have been

cleared. A momentary contact CLOSURE of this input resets the oldest active

alarm in a similar manner as a primary alarm is manually reset while in Manual

mode or Stand-alone mode. Each momentary contact CLOSURE of this input

circuit resets the next oldest primary alarm.

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

12 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A

A.5 Miscellaneous Logical I/O Signals (Worksheet 16) (continued)

# ccc Safety circuit #

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an external switch contact or relay

contact that activates the corresponding alarm according to the configuration of the

corresponding alarm definition parameters, program codes 249 through 268. A

CLOSED input circuit indicates that the external device is in the normal or safe

state. An OPEN input circuit indicates that the external device is in an abnormal

or unsafe state.

# Swing arm side #

The swing arm status inputs, either one or two dry contact closures are not

assignable. These inputs are always wired to the 3-terminal board located on the

main processor board. Processing of the one or two swing arm status inputs is

determined by the selection of PC 312 Side detect method. a CLOSED input

circuit indicates that the swing arm is positioned at the corresponding side. An

OPEN input circuit indicates that the swing arm is in the parked position.

# 287 Alarm control output

Assigns a physical discrete control output that indicates the alarm status of the

DanLoad 6000. The output circuit is normally OPEN and is pulsed CLOSED

when a Secondary Alarm is active and is steady CLOSED when a Primary Alarm

is active.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 13

# 31n Pulse per unit output #

Assigns a physical discrete control output that provides a pulse per quantity unit

output according the control PC' s ccc Pulse per unit output, program codes 128

to 134. These output circuits are designed to drive an external quantity

accumulating device, such as a totalizer, certain types of ticket printers, data

acquisition system, etc. The output circuit is normally OPEN and is pulsed

CLOSED for each programmed quantity unit measured by one to four flow meters.

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

14 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A

A.5 Miscellaneous Logical I/O Signals (Worksheet 16) (continued)

# 315 Trip 1 output

Assigns a physical discrete control output that provides an indication of the

delivery phase to external equipment. The output circuit is normally OPEN and

is CLOSED during low flow startup time.

# 316 Trip 2 output



is CLOSED during low flow startup time and high flow time.

# 317 Trip 3 output



is CLOSED from start of batch delivery to end of batch delivery.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 15

Device / FunctionNumberRequired Worksheet

Components (1 to 4) 4, 5, 6, 13

Blending (Yes / No) 13

Flow meters (1 to 4) 3, 12

Flow control valves (1 to 4) (digital / 2-stage)

4, 5, 6, 14

Block valves (1 to 4) 4, 5, 6, 13

Swing arm switches (1 or 2) 9, 16

Pump (1 to 4) 4, 5, 6, 13

Quantity compensation temperature pressure density

7, 12

Meter proving tank prover master meter

4, 5, 6, 12

Additive injection (1 to 6) 4, 5, 6, 15

Safety circuits (permissives) 4, 5, 6, 16

Miscellaneous inputs 4, 5, 6, 16

Miscellaneous outputs 4, 5, 6, 16

Data communications logging terminal automation system

2 RS-485 or:1 RS-485/1 RS-232and / or: 1 LAN

System ConfigurationUnit:________

Worksheet 1

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

16 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A

I/O Board

Capacity Required

Input Output Input Output

main processor 2 RS-485 or: 1 RS-485/1 RS-232 and / or: 1 LAN

2 DC(swing arm)

N/A N/A

one meter pulse(slot J5)

2 pulse 2 pulse2 DC

two meter pulse(slots J5 and J6)

4 pulse 4 pulse4 DC

one analog (2-channel)(slot J7)

1 RTD1 4-20mAdc

N/A N/A

one analog (8-channel)(slot J7)

4 RTD4 4-20mAdc

N/A N/A

one AC I/O(slot J1)

2 DC/AC 8 AC

two AC I/O(slots J1 and J2)

4 DC/AC 16 AC

one enhanced AC I/O(slot J1)

6 DC/AC 6 AC

two enhanced I/O(slot J1 and J2)

12 DC/AC 12 AC

one AC I/O / one additive I/O(slots J1 and J2)

8 DC/AC 14 AC

one DC I/O(slot J3)

6 DC/AC 4 DC

two DC I/O(slots J3 and J4)

12 DC/AC 8 DC

Physical I/O SignalUnit:_______

Worksheet 2

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 17

Function TBBoardChannel

AssignedChannel

Meter 1 preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc) 1

Meter 1 pulse input 2 1 or 3

Meter 1 preamp common 3

Meter 2 preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc) 4

Meter 2 pulse input 5 2 or 4

Meter 2 preamp common 6

Meter 1 pulse output + 7 1 or 3

Meter 1 pulse output - 8 1 or 3

Meter 2 pulse output + 9 2 or 4

Meter 2 pulse output - 10 2 or 4

Control 1 switched + Vdc 11 1

Control 1 return - Vdc 12



P / S common

P / S common

Meter Pulse Board WiringUnit:_________ / Slot: J5 / J6

Worksheet 3

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

18 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A


AssignedChannel

Status 2 switched Vdc/Vac 1 2

Status 2 common 2


Status 1 common 4

Control 8 supply Vac 5

Control 8 switched Vac 6 8















AC I/O Board WiringUnit:_______ / Slot: J1 / J2

Worksheet 4

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 19


AssignedChannel


Status 5/6 common 2



Status 3/4 common 5



Status 1/2 common 8



Control 5/6 supply Vac 11








Enhanced AC I/O Board WiringUnit:________ / Slot: J1 / J2

Worksheet 5

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

20 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A


AssignedChannel

Status 6 supply Vdc 1

Status 6 switched Vdc 2 6



















DC I/O Board WiringUnit:_______ / Slot: J3 / J4

Worksheet 6

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 21


AssignedChannel

Transmitter 1 power (24 Vdc) 1

Transmitter 1 input 2 1

Transmitter power common 3

+ Vsource 4

RTD 1 + 5 2

RTD 1 - 6 2

RTD current source 7

2-Channel Analog Input Board WiringUnit:__________ / Slot: J7

Worksheet 7a

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

22 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A


AssignedChannel

Transmitter 1/2 power (24 Vdc) 1



Transmitter 3/4 power (24 Vdc) 4



Transmitter power common 7

+ Vsource 8

RTD 1 + 9 5

RTD 1 - 10 5

RTD loop tie point 11

RTD 2 + 12 6

RTD 2 - 13 6


RTD 3 + 15 7

RTD 3 - 16 7


RTD 4 + 18 8

RTD 4 - 19 8

RTD current source 20

8-Channel Analog Input Board WiringUnit:__________ / Slot: J7

Worksheet 7b

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 23

Function TB Source /Destination

Vac power hot TB1-1

Vac safety ground TB1-2

Vac neutral (230 Vac hot) TB1-3

Space heater Vac hot (supply) TB1-4

Space heater Vac neutral TB1-5

Vac permissive power input TB2-1

Vac permissive power neutral TB2-2

Vac permissive power output (fused) TB2-3

Power Supply WiringUnit:_______

Worksheet 8

Function TBPhysicalChannel

ActualSide

Swing arm side 1 1 1 (SW1)(right)

Swing arm common 2 (center)

Swing arm side 2 3 2 (SW2)(left)

Swing Arm Input WiringMain Processor Board

Unit:_________

Worksheet 9

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

24 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A

Function TB Destination

Channel 1, RS-485 Rx+ 1

Channel 1, RS-485 Rx- 2

Channel 1, RS-485 Tx+ 3

Channel 1, RS-485 Tx- 4

Channel 2, RS-485 Rx+orChannel 2, RS-232 RxD

5

Channel 2, RS-485 Rx-orChannel 2, RS-232 CTS (clear to send)

6

Channel 2, RS-485 Tx+orChannel 2, RS-232 TxD

7

Channel 2, RS-485 Tx- 8

Channel 2, RS-232 RTS (request to send) 9

Channel 2, RS-232 common 10

DUART Module WiringUnit:_______

Worksheet 10

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 25

Function TB Destination

RS-485 Rx+ / Tx+ 1

common 2

RS-485 Rx- / Tx- 3

or:

Coax

LAN Module Wiring (Typical)Unit:_______

Worksheet 11 (discontinued for v 1.20)

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

26 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A

Logical Input Function

Input Type

PulseRTD /4-20 mAdc Discrete

AssignedChannel

FLOW INPUTS





TEMPERATURE INPUTS

318 Meter 1 temp input 1




PRESSURE INPUTS

320 Meter 1 pres input 1




DENSITY INPUTS

321 Meter 1 dens input 1




Flow Meter Logical Input SignalsUnit:________

Worksheet 12

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 27

Logical I/O Function

Discrete Type

ComponentAssignedChannelInput Output

288 Pump control output 1




400 Block valve output 1

401 Block valve input 1







408 Combination 1 1XXX 1

409 Combination 2 X2XX 2

410 Combination 3 12XX 1,2

411 Combination 4 XX3X 3

412 Combination 5 1X3X 1,3

413 Combination 6 X23X 2,3

414 Combination 7 123X 1,2,3

415 Combination 8 XXX4 4

416 Combination 9 1XX4 1,4

417 Combination 10 X2X4 2,4

418 Combination 11 12X4 1,2,4

419 Combination 12 XX34 3,4

420 Combination 13 1X34 1,3,4

421 Combination 14 X234 2,3,4

422 Combination 15 1234 1,2,3,4

Component Logical I/O SignalsUnit:_______

Worksheet 13

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

28 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A


Discrete Type

Valve AssignedChannel

Input Output

292 Solenoid 1 (upstream) 1

293 Solenoid 2 (downstream) 1







Flow Control Valve Logical I/O SignalsUnit:_______

Worksheet 14

Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 29


Discrete Type

InjectorAssignedChannelInput Output

380 Ratio output 1

800 Pump output 1


381 Feedback input 1

382 Selection input 1

383 Ratio output 2

806 Pump output 2




386 Ratio output 3

812 Pump output 3




389 Ratio output 4

818 Pump output 4




392 Ratio output 5

824 Pump output 5




395 Ratio output 6

830 Pump output 6




Additive Injection Logical I/O SignalsUnit:_______

Worksheet 15

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

30 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A


Discrete Type

Input OutputAssignedChannel

ALARM / STATUS INPUTS

342 Off-rack start/end /

343 Auto/manual change-over /

344 Primary alarm reset /

345 Safety circuit 1 /








--- Swing arm side 1 /

--- Swing arm side 2 /

ALARM / EVENT OUTPUTS

287 Alarm control output /

313 Pulse per unit output 1 /

314 Pulse per unit output 2 /

315 Trip 1 output /

316 Trip 2 output /

317 Trip 3 output /

Miscellaneous Logical I/O SignalsUnit:_______

Worksheet 16

Appendix B

Program Code Defaults

Program Code List

Software Versions

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 1

This appendix contains a reference list of all program codes and the default state of the program

codes. Program codes for meters, valves, components, and additives are not displayed for

undefined devices or items. (Example: If only one flow meter is defined, the program codes for

flow meters 2, 3, and 4 are not displayed.) The Current column in the table is provided for

manual entry of the current setup status for each program code. The message < version #> in

this column indicates that the respective program code is not fully implemented in some versions

of the DanLoad 6000. Refer to Section B.2 of this appendix for additional information. It is

recommended to make copies of the table and to enter current setup data each DanLoad 6000 or

group of similar DanLoad 6000' s. This data can be used as an aid in re-configuration after loss

of setup data due to replacement of the main processor board or other system failure.

Some abbreviations used in the table are listed blow.

Abbreviation Description

nn a-n chars A user definable alpha-numeric string of up to nn characters can be entered

for this parameter.

DI Discrete status input (switch contact input).

DO Discrete control output (relay driver output).

AI 4 to 20 mAdc analog input for pressure or density

RTD resistive temperature device input.

See Section 6 for complete descriptions of all parameters.

Sub-section B.2 contains a list of program codes that are not fully implemented in all versions

of the DanLoad 6000. Please review this list before performing the setup procedure or changing

any program code value or option.

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

2 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B

B.1 Program Code Default Value Assignments

The Setup Menu groups are indicated on separate rows in the Parameter column. Display pages

of each group are also indicated in the Parameter column. Display pages are indicated as <Page

n> when a group is divided into several pages with the same header name. The number <n>

is the sequential page number.

Several program codes have either the Weights and Measures or the Read-only attribute set TRUE

in the default state. These program codes / attributes are indicated in the Attributes column of the

table.

Attribute Description

W&M Weights and Measures The value of this program code can affect the flow

measurement accuracy or security of the DanLoad 6000. The value or

option of this program code can only be changed if the Weights and

Measures switch OFF (in the extended position) before the Setup Mode

is entered.

R Read-only The value of this program code can only be read. The value or

option cannot be manually changed from the front panel.

All program codes are listed in the following table. However, only those program codes that

have been enabled for the application will be displayed. (Example: Assume only one flow meter

is enabled by PC 050 Number of meters equal to 1. Then PC's 051, 052, and 053 for flow meter

one are displayed and PC's 054 through 062 for flow meters two, three, and four are not

displayed.)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 3

Code Parameter Attribute Options Default Current

USER 1

001 Passcode 0 to 999999999 6000

002 User ID up to 16 a-n chars DanLoad 6000

003 Supervisor privilege No

Yes

Yes

USER 2

004 Passcode 0 to 999999999

005 User ID up to 16 a-n chars


Yes

USER 3

007 Passcode 0 to 999999999



Yes

USER 4

010 Passcode 0 to 999999999



Yes

USER 5

013 Passcode 0 to 999999999



Yes

USER 6

016 Passcode 0 to 999999999



Yes

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

4 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


USER 7

0019 Passcode 0 to 999999999



Yes

USER 8

022 Passcode 0 to 999999999



Yes

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 5


UNIT PARAMETERS <PAGE 1>

025 Operating mode Auto

Manual

Stand-alone

026 Unit type W&M Seq.(auto)

Seq.(manual)

In-line

Off-rack

Seq.(auto)

027 Valve type W&M Std digital

Std 2-stage

Std digital

028 Language English

English 2

Chinese

Thai

English

029 Products units Off

Bbl

Dek

Lit

Gal

lbs

kgs

L

l

Gal


030 Number of data item prompts 0 to 5 0

031 #1 Enter data item #1 up to 32 chars





DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

6 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B



036 Prompt time-out (secs) 0 to 9999 60

037 Check display W&M Off

Start

Start/restart

Off

038 Date format mm/dd/yy

dd/mm/yy

yy/mm/dd

mm/dd/yy

039 Date separator / (slash)

. (dot)

/ (slash)

040 Decimal separator . (dot)

, (comma)

. (dot)

041 Display data rate 1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

28800

28800


042 Transaction # ReadOnly 0 to 9999 9999

043 Batch # ReadOnly 0 to 9999 9999

044 Additive units cc

in3

Gal

cc

045 Round method Trunc

Up

Up/odd

Up

046 Density/gravity scale 1 to 4 4

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 7


VALVE PARAMETERS

048 Number of valves 1 to 4 1

049 Initial flow time (secs) 0 to 9.999 0.200


METER PARAMETERS

050 Number of meters 1 to 4 1

METER 1 PARAMETERS

051 Meter ID up to 5 a-n chars M1

052 Meter pulse board input 0 to # of mtrs 1

053 Valve to be controlled 1 to # of vlvs 1

METER 2 PARAMETERS




METER 3 PARAMETERS




METER 4 PARAMETERS




DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

8 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


COMPONENT PARAMETERS

065 Number of components 1 to 4 1

COMPONENT 1

066 Component ID up to 16 a-n chars Comp 1

067 Meter 1 to # mtrs 1

068 Mass adjustment 0.000000 to

999.999999

0.000000

COMPONENT 2




999.999999

0.000000

COMPONENT 3




999.999999

0.000000

COMPONENT 4




999.999999

0.000000

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 9


DELIVERY PARAMETERS

078 Maximum preset qty 5 to 999999 3000

079 Minimum preset qty 5 to 999999 50

080 Preset/delivery type W&M Gross

Std

Gross

081 Delivery display type W&M Gross

Std

Gross

082 Stop key action Low flow

Immediate

Low flow

083 Fall back qty 0 to 99999 1000

COMP 1 DELIVERY PARAMETERS

084 Low flow start qty 0 to 99999 50

085 Low flow restart qty 0 to 99999 20

086 Low flow stop qty 0 to 99999 50

087 Line pack delay (secs) 0 to 999 2

088 Pump stop delay (secs) 0 to 999 30

089 Block valve delay (secs) 0 to 99 0








DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

10 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
















DELIVERY PARAMETERS (continued)

108 Ramp clicks 0 to 999 30

109 Maintenance clicks 0 to 999 30

110 Additive pump stop (secs) 0 to 9999 10

111 Primary component 1 to 4 1

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 11


DIGITAL VALVE 1 PARAMETERS

112 Low flow % error W&M 2 to 10 5

113 High flow % error W&M 2 to 10 2

114 Valve delay (secs) 0.000 to 9.999 0.040

115 Open method Normal

Opened

Closed

Normal






Opened

Closed

Normal






Opened

Closed

Normal






Opened

Closed

Normal

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

12 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


PULSE PER UNIT OUTPUTS

128 Number of pulse per unit outputs W&M 0 to 2 2

PULSE PER UNIT OUTPUT 1

129 Control meters W&M X, G, or S for

each meter

GGGG

130 Factor W&M 0.1 to 10.0 1.0

131 Pulse width (ms) W&M 10 to 87 ms 20

PULSE PER UNIT OUTPUT 2

132 Control meters W&M X, G, or S for

each meter

GGGG

133 Factor W&M 0.1 to 10.0 1.0

134 Pulse width (ms) W&M 10 to 87 ms 20

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 13


ADDITIVE PARAMETERS

135 Number of additives 0 to 6 0

136 Selection method External

Prompt

Inputs

External

137 Totalizing method Out

Out/Sgl

Out/Dbl

Out/Hshk

In/Sgl

In/Dbl

In/Hshk

In

Out

138 Clean line qty 0 to 9999 0

ADDITIVE 1 PARAMETERS

139 Additive control meters X, G, or S

for each mtr

XXXX

140 Ratio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0

141 Offset volume 0.0 to 999.9 0.0

142 Totalizing volume 0.00 to 999.99 0.00

143 Available No

Yes

No



for each mtr

XXXX

145 Ratio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0



148 Available No

Yes

No



for each mtr

XXXX

150 Ratio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0



153 Available No

Yes

No

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

14 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B




for each mtr

XXXX

155 Ratio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0



158 Available No

Yes

No



for each mtr

XXXX

160 Ratio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0



163 Available No

Yes

No



for each mtr

XXXX

165 Ratio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0



168 Available No

Yes

No

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 15


METER FACTORS

169 Number of factors/component W&M 1 to 4 2

170 Meter factor method W&M Fixed

Linear

Fixed

COMPONENT 1 FACTORS

171 Nominal K-factor W&M 0.5 to 200.0 23.0

172 Master meter factor W&M 0.5000 to 2.0000 1.0000


174 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 200

175 Meter factor 1 W&M 1.0000


176 Flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 600



178 Flow rate 3 W&M 0 to 99999





COMPONENT 2 FACTORS




185 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 200


DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

16 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B



187 Flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 600








COMPONENT 3 FACTORS




196 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 200



198 Flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 600








_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 17


COMPONENT 4 FACTORS




207 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 200



209 Flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 600








MF VALIDATION

215 Master MF % W&M 0.00 to 99.99 2.00

216 Adjacent MF % W&M 0.00 to 99.99 0.25

218 Product units mnemonic up to 6 a-n chars

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

18 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


ALARM PARAMETERS <PAGE 1>

219 Safety circuit message Specific

General

Specific

220 Secondary alarm reset (secs) 0 to 9999 300


221 Low flow alarm action Off

Info

Primary

Primary

222 Minimum flow rate 0 to 99999 100

223 Low flow time (secs) 5 to 999 10

224 High flow alarm action Off

Info

Primary

Primary

225 Maximum flow rate 0 to 99999 660

226 High flow time (secs) 5 to 999 10


227 Overrun limit qty 0.0 to 99.9 2.0

228 Underflow alarm action Off

Primary

Off

229 Underflow limit qty 0.0 to 99.9 5.0

230 No flow t-o alarm action Off

Info

Primary

Primary

231 No flow t-o time (secs) 1 to 99 5

232 Unauthorized flow limit qty 0.1 to 99.9 10


233 Error limit (pulses) W&M 0 to 255 0

234 Reset count (pulses) W&M 0 to 65535 10000

235 Data logging alarm action Info

Primary

Info

236 Comms fail alarm action Info

Primary

Primary

237 Comms fail t-o (secs) 1 to 300 10

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 19



238 Temp fail alarm action Info

Primary

Primary

239 Minimum temperature -99.9 to +999.9 -40.0

240 Maximum temperature -99.9 to +999.9 +110.0

241 Density fail alarm action Info

Primary

Primary

242 Minimum density/gravity 0.0000

243 Maximum density/gravity 0.0000


244 Minimum pressure 0.0 to 9999.9 0.0

245 Maximum pressure 0.0 to 9999.9 0.00

246 Additive error limit 1 to 99 3

247 Feedback time 0 to 9999 10

248 Block valve time (secs) 0 to 99 10



Primary

Secondary

250 #1 Ground detector open 34 a-n char < message


Primary

Secondary

252 #2 Overspill detector open 34 a-n char < message



Primary

Secondary

254 #3 Permissive power failure 34 a-n char < message


Primary

Secondary

256 #4 Additive injection failure 34 a-n char < message

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

20 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B




Primary

Secondary

258 #5 Arm down side 1 34 a-n char < message


Primary

Secondary

260 #6 Arm down side 2 34 a-n char < message



Primary

Secondary

262 #7 Walkway down side 1 34 a-n char < message


Primary

Secondary

264 #8 Walkway down side 2 34 a-n char < message


265 Circuit 5 type 0 to 2 1




_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 21


I/O PARAMETERS <PAGE 1>

280 Slot 1 board Empty

DC I/O

AC I/O

Enhanced I/O

2-Ch. Meter Pulse

2-Ch. Analog

8-Ch. Analog

can be:

AC I/O

or

Add I/O


DC I/O

AC I/O

Enhanced I/O

2-Ch. Meter Pulse

2-Ch. Analog

8-Ch. Analog

can be:

AC I/O

or

Add I/O

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

22 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B




DC I/O

AC I/O

Enhanced I/O

2-Ch. Meter Pulse

2-Ch. Analog

8-Ch. Analog

can be:

DC I/O


DC I/O

AC I/O

Enhanced I/O

2-Ch. Meter Pulse

2-Ch. Analog

8-Ch. Analog

can be:

DC I/O


DC I/O

AC I/O

Enhanced I/O

2-Ch. Meter Pulse

2-Ch. Analog

8-Ch. Analog

can be:

2-Ch. Meter

Pulse


DC I/O

AC I/O

Enhanced I/O

2-Ch. Meter Pulse

2-Ch. Analog

8-Ch. Analog

can be:

2-Ch. Meter

Pulse


DC I/O

AC I/O

Enhanced I/O

2-Ch. Meter Pulse

2-Ch. Analog

8-Ch. Analog

can be:

x-Ch Analog


287 Alarm control output 0 to max DO's 1

COMPONENT 1 I/O

288 Pump control output 0 to max DO's 8

COMPONENT 2 I/O


COMPONENT 3 I/O


COMPONENT 4 I/O


_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 23


VALVE 1 I/O

292 Solenoid 1 (upstream) 0 to max DO's 7

293 Solenoid 2 (downstream) 0 to max DO's 6

VALVE 2 I/O



VALVE 3 I/O



VALVE 4 I/O



DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

24 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B



312 Side detect method Sgl w/o sw.

Sgl 1 sw. (SW 2)

Sgl 1 sw. (SW 1)

Dbl 1 sw. (SW 2)

Dbl 1 sw. (SW 1)

Dbl 2 sw.

Sgl w/o sw.

313 Pulse per unit output 1 W&M 0 to max DO's 9

314 Pulse per unit output 2 W&M 0 to max DO's 10

315 Trip 1 output 0 to max DO's 0




318 Meter 1 temp input W&M 0 to max RTD

input

1

319 Meter 1 offset (Ohms) W&M -20.00 to +20.00 0.00

320 Meter 1 pres input 0 to max AI's 0

321 Meter 1 dens input 0 to max AI's 0



input

2






input

3






input

4




_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 25



342 Off-rack start/end 0 to max DI's 0

343 Auto/manual change-over 0 to max DI's 0

344 Primary alarm reset 0 to max DI's 3


345 Safety circuit 1 0 to max DI's 0










353 RTD inputs Std 3850

Hi 3850

Low 3850

Std 3902

Hi 3902

Low 3902

Std 3850


355 Primary LCD type Unknown

Standish

Optrex

Old Optrex

Optrex

356 Primary LCD minimum light 0 to 1023 455

357 Primary LCD maximum light 0 to 1023 405

358 Secondary LCD type Unknown

Std 1

Ext 1

Std 2

Ext 2

Unknown

359 Secondary LCD minimum light 0 to 1023 455

360 Secondary LCD maximum light 0 to 1023 405

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

26 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B



361 Recipe 1 input 0 to max DI's 0







367 Recipe 1 output 0 to max DO's 0






_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 27


ADDITIVE 1 I/O PARAMETERS

380 Ratio output 0 to max DO's 0

381 Feedback input 0 to max DI's 0

382 Selection input 0 to max DI's 0





















DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

28 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


COMPONENT 1 BLOCK VALVE

400 Block valve output 0 to max DO's 0

401 Block valve input 0 to max DI's 0










COMPONENT COMBINATIONS <PAGE 5>

408 Combination 1 (1XXX) 0 to max DO's 0

409 Combination 2 (X2XX) 0 to max DO's 0

410 Combination 3 (12XX) 0 to max DO's 0

411 Combination 4 (XX3X) 0 to max DO's 0

412 Combination 5 (1X3X) 0 to max DO's 0


413 Combination 6 (X23X) 0 to max DO's 0

414 Combination 7 (123X) 0 to max DO's 0

415 Combination 8 (XXX4) 0 to max DO's 0

416 Combination 9 (1XX4) 0 to max DO's 0

417 Combination 10 (X2X4) 0 to max DO's 0


418 Combination 11 (12X4) 0 to max DO's 0

419 Combination 12 (XX34) 0 to max DO's 0

420 Combination 13 (1X34) 0 to max DO's 0

421 Combination 14 (X234) 0 to max DO's 0

422 Combination 15 (1234) 0 to max DO's 0

426 Buoyancy 0.0000 to

9.9999

0.0000

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 29


TEMPERATURE PARAMETERS

427 Temperature units W&M C

F

C

428 Density units W&M lb/ft3

kg/m3

g/cm3

lb/ft3

429 Pressure units W&M psi

Pa

in. H2O

in. Hg

bar

mbar

psi

430 Reference temperature W&M -99.9 to +999.9 15.0

431 Sample qty W&M 0 to 9999 100

COMP 1 TEMPERATURE PARMS

432 Temperature option W&M Off

Linear

API 6A

API 6B

API 6C

API 24A

API 24B

API 54A

API 54B

API 54C

N/A 1-5

China

Off

433 Alpha W&M 0.0002700 to 0.0016740 0.0005100

434 Backup temperature W&M -99.9 to +999.9 15.0



Linear

API 6A

API 6B

API 6C

API 24A

API 24B

API 54A

API 54B

API 54C

N/A 1-5

China

Off

436 Alpha W&M 0.0002700 to 0.0016740 0.0005100


DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

30 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B




Linear

API 6A

API 6B

API 6C

API 24A

API 24B

API 54A

API 54B

API 54C

N/A 1-5

China

Off

439 Alpha W&M 0.0002700 to 0.0016740 0.0005100




Linear

API 6A

API 6B

API 6C

API 24A

API 24B

API 54A

API 54B

API 54C

N/A 1-5

China

Off

442 Alpha W&M 0.0002700 to 0.0016740 0.0005100


_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 31


COMP 1 PRESSURE PARAMETERS

444 Pressure option W&M Off

Const

11.2.1

11.2.2

11.2.1M

11.2.2M

Off

445 F-factor W&M 0 to 999999999 0

446 Vapor pressure W&M 0.0 to 9999.9 0.0



Const

11.2.1

11.2.2

11.2.1M

11.2.2M

Off

448 F-factor W&M 0 to 999999999 0




Const

11.2.1

11.2.2

11.2.1M

11.2.2M

Off

451 F-factor W&M 0 to 999999999 0




Const

11.2.1

11.2.2

11.2.1M

11.2.2M

Off

454 F-factor W&M 0 to 999999999 0


DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

32 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


COMP 1 DENSITY/GRAVITY

456 Density/gravity option W&M Off

On

Off

457 Backup density/gravity W&M 0.00 to 100.00

(for API 6A, 6B, 6C)

0.6110 to 1.0760

(for API 24A, 24B)

610.5 to 1075.0

(for Off, Linear, 54A, 54B, 54C)

0.0000



On

Off



0.6110 to 1.0760

(for API 24A, 24B)

610.5 to 1075.0


0.0000



On

Off



0.6110 to 1.0760

(for API 24A, 24B)

610.5 to 1075.0


0.0000



On

Off



0.6110 to 1.0760

(for API 24A, 24B)

610.5 to 1075.0


0.0000

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 33


METER 1

464 Pressure @4 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0

465 Pressure @20 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0

466 Density @4 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0000

467 Density @20 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0000

METER 2

468 Pressure @4 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0

469 Pressure @20 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0

470 Density @4 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0000

471 Density @20 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0000

METER 3

472 Pressure @4 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0

473 Pressure @20 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0

474 Density @4 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0000

475 Density @20 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0000

METER 4

476 Pressure @4 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0

477 Pressure @20 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0

478 Density @4 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0000

479 Density @20 mA 0 to 9999.9 0.0000

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

34 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


RECIPES

480 Number of recipes 1 to 30 1

RECIPE 1

481 Name up to 16 a-n chars Recipe #1

482 Component 1 % 0 to 100 100.00

483 Component 2 % 0 to 100 0.00

484 Component 3 % 0 to 100 0.00

485 Component 4 % 0 to 100 0.00

486 Sequence to load 4-digits,

limit 1 to 4 each

1

RECIPE 2

487 Name up to 16 a-n chars

488 Component 1 % 0 to 100





limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 3







limit 1 to 4 each

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 35


RECIPE 4







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 5







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 6







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 7







limit 1 to 4 each

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

36 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


RECIPE 8







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 9







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 10







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 11







limit 1 to 4 each

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 37


RECIPE 12







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 13







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 14







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 15







limit 1 to 4 each

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

38 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


RECIPE 16







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 17







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 18







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 19







limit 1 to 4 each

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 39


RECIPE 20







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 21







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 22







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 23







limit 1 to 4 each

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

40 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


RECIPE 24







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 25







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 26







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 27







limit 1 to 4 each

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 41


RECIPE 28







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 29







limit 1 to 4 each

RECIPE 30







limit 1 to 4 each

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

42 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


Ch. A

663 Mode Not Used

Modbus RTU

ASCII

Data Logging

Not Used

664 Data rate 300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

9600

665 Word size 5

6

7

8

8

666 Stop bits 1

1 1/2

2

1

667 Parity None

Odd

Even

Even

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 43


Ch. B

668 Mode Not Used

Modbus RTU

ASCII

Data Logging

Not Used

669 Data rate 300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

9600

670 Word size 5

6

7

8

8

671 Stop bits 1

1 1/2

2

1

672 Parity None

Odd

Even

Even

679 Enabled (Enable the dynamic data display) No

Yes

Yes

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

44 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


DYNAMIC DATA DISPLAY <PAGE 1>

680 Element 1 data code <see table in

Section

6.20.1>

Grs batch qty

(002)


Section

6.20.1>

Std batch qty

(003)


Section

6.20.1>

Mtr 1 grs total

(004)


Section

6.20.1>

Mtr 1 std total

(005)



Section

6.20.1>

Mtr 1 grs batch

(006)


Section

6.20.1>

Mtr 1 std batch

(007)


Section

6.20.1>

Mtr 1 grs unauth

(017)


Section

6.20.1>

Mtr 1 flw rate

(008)



Section

6.20.1>

Mtr 1 factor

(011)


Section

6.20.1>

Mtr 1 grs load

(103)


Section

6.20.1>

Mtr 1 pls cnt

(012)


Section

6.20.1>

Mtr 1 max flw rate

(010)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000


Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 45



Section

6.20.1>

Mtr 1 curr temp

(074)


Section

6.20.1>

Cmp 1 ave temp

(080)


Section

6.20.1>

Cmp 1 ave vlv cls

(075)


Section

6.20.1>

Arm position

(081)

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

46 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


DATA LOGGING <PAGE 1>

696 Batch summary Off

On

Off

697 Transaction summary Off

On

Off

698 Alarm log Off

On

Off

699 Power fail log Off

On

Off

700 Program mode entry/exit Off

On

Off

701 W&M switch opened/closed Off

On

Off

DATA LOGGING <PAGE 2>

702 Program value change log Off

On

Off

703 Meter proving run log Off

On

Off

704 Crash memory summary Off

On

Off

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 47


BLENDING <PAGE 1>

712 Rate reduction 0 to 9999 100


714 Clean line qty 0 to 9999 0

715 Low prop fac 1 to 4 1

BLENDING <PAGE 2>

716 Correct after qty 0 to 9999 100

717 Alarm after qty 0 to 9999 200

718 Adjustment qty 0 to 9999 50

719 Comp % display Gross

Std

Gross

BLENDING <PAGE 3>

722 Blend error method Grspctbatch

Stdpctbatch

Grsqtydiff

Stdqtydiff

Grspctsmpl

Stdpctsmpl

Flrtsmpl

Grspctbatch

723 Max dev % 0 to 999 2

724 Blend tol % 0 to 999 5

725 Max dev qty 0 to 9999 20

726 Blend tol qty 0 to 9999 40

727 Blend sample qty 0 to 9999

On

10

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

48 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


METER 1

728 Flow adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00

729 Ratio adj fac 0.00 to 9.99 1.00

METER 2

734 Flow adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00

735 Ratio adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00

METER 3

740 Flow adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00

741 Ratio adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00

METER 4

746 Flow adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00

747 Ratio adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00

COMP 1

752 Stop rate 0 to 99999 120

COMP 2

758 Stop rate 0 to 99999 120

COMP 3

764 Stop rate 0 to 99999 120

COMP 4

770 Stop rate 0 to 99999 120

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 49


RECIPE 1

776 Low flow rate 0 to 99999 300

777 High flow rate 0 to 99999 600

RECIPE 2



RECIPE 3



RECIPE 4



RECIPE 5



RECIPE 6



RECIPE 7



RECIPE 8



RECIPE 9



RECIPE 10



DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

50 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B

RECIPE 11-20



RECIPE 21-30




ADDITIVE 1

800 Pump output 0 to max DO's 0


ADDITIVE 2



ADDITIVE 3



ADDITIVE 4



ADDITIVE 5



ADDITIVE 6



_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 51

B.2 Version Dependent Program Codes

This section will be used to tabulate program codes that are not fully implemented in some of the

firmware releases of the Script DanLoad 6000. For future releases of the firmware beyond 1.2

check the version of the Script DanLoad 6000 firmware and the program codes to be listed here

before setup or re-configuration of a Script DanLoad 6000.

Firmware release identification:

Firmware Version Number Release Date

1.2 March 1997

The n/a in the version column of the table indicates that the program code function is not

applicable in that version of the firmware. The options for program codes that are not applicable

should remain in the default state as shipped from the factory. Contact the Daniel Electronics

Division Field Service Department for additional information on these program codes.

DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

52 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B


Appendix C

Spare Parts

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS PROPOSAL ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS DATE

P.O. S.O.

9720 Katy Road P.O. Box 19097 Houston, Texas 77024

ITEM QUAN MODEL NO. PART NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT PRICE

TOTAL NET

6000-(--------) Select Spare Parts per unitdash number (found on Model # tag)

1

Spare PCB Assemblies 2

1 1 (---1----) 3-6000-002 Meter Pulse BD. CE-12604 3

(---2----) 4

2 1 (----1---) 3-6000-005 AC I/O BD. CE-12613 5

(----3---) 6

(----5---) 7

3 1 (-----1--) 3-6000-006 DC I/O BD CE-12616 8

(-----2--) 9

4 1 (-------2) 3-6000-020 Duart (2) RS-485 output CE-12625-2

10

5 1 (-------1) 3-6000-009 Duart BD (1) RS-232 (1) RS-485CE-12625-1

11

6 1 (----2---) 3-6000-010 Additive injection BD CE-12628 12

(----4---) 13

(----5---) 14

7 1 (------2-) 3-6000-007 A/D 8-channel BD CE-12619-2 15

TITLE

Recommended Spare Parts ListDRN.DATE Vonnie7-7-93

MODEL NO.

6000TOTAL

Model 6000 Preset CHD. DATE TOP ASSY.

A 9312 7-93 DLT APPVD DATE NEXT ASSY.

REV ECO NO DATE BY PART NO. SP-12533 SH 1 OF 3


P.O. S.O.


ITEM QUAN. MODEL NO. PART NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT PRICE

TOTAL NET

8 1 (------1-) 3-6000-026 A/D 2-Channel BD CE-12725 1

9 1 (--1-----) 3-6000-027 115 Vac P/S CE-12575-1 2

(--3-----) 3

10 1 (--2-----) 3-6000-031 230 Vac P/S CE-12575-2 4

(--4-----) 5

11 1 (-1------) 3-6000-052 Keypad Assy English CE-12680 6

12 1 (-3------) 3-6000-054 Keypad Assy French CE-12680 7

13 1 (-2------) 3-6000-055 Keypad Assy Spanish CE-12680 8

14 1 ALL 3-6000-028 Display CE-12578 9

15 1 ALL 3-6000-029 CPU BD CE-12581 10

16 1 ALL 3-6000-030 Keyboard CE-12584 11

17 1 ALL 3-6000-032 Motherboard CE-12590 12

OPTIONAL ASSEMBLIES 13

18 1 3-6000-017 I/O Card Extender BE-12647-1 14

19 1 3-6000-047 P/S Card Extender BE-12647-2 15

20 1 3-6000-050 Battery (CPU) module 3.OV BE-11887 16

21 1 3-6000-070 Rib/Cable Key-Display BE-12685 17

TITLE DRN. DATE MODEL NO. TOTAL

CHD. DATE TOP ASSY.

APPVD DATE NEXT ASSY.



P.O. S.O.


ITEM QUAN. MODEL NO. PART NO. DESCRIPTION UNITPRICE

TOTALNET

22 1 3-6000-071 Rib/Cable Display-CPU BE-12683 1

23 1 3-6000-073 Rib/Cable P/S-Display BE-12689 2

24 3-6000-013 P/S BD Meter Pulse BD AE-12637 3

(Note this board is included on 4

3-6000-002 above) 5

6

OPTIONAL MECHANICAL PARTS 7

8

25 5 4-9213-510 Enclosure Lid mounting bolts 9

socket head M10-1.5 X 50MM 10

26 4 4-9213-511 Enclosure mounting bolts 11

socket head M10-1.5 X 15MM 12

27 2 4-9213-512 Enclosure Lid security mounting bolts 13

socket head M10-1.5 X 60MM W/hole 14

28 1 4-9200-013 Keypad wire seal screw 15

16

17

TITLE DRN. DATE MODEL NO. TOTAL

CHD. DATE TOP ASSY.

APPVD DATE NEXT ASSY.


Appendix D

Drawings

Device Linkages BE-18204Program Code to Device Assignments DE-18201Overview and Board Layout CE-12691Field Wiring, Power Supply CE-12692Field Wiring, CPU & DUART Board CE-12693Surge Protect, V.1 DUART, RS-485 Multipt CE-19391Surge Protect, V.2 DUART, (2) RS-485 CE-19392Surge Protect, V.2 DUART, RS-485 Multipt CE-19393Surge Protect, V.2 DUART, RS-485 & RS-232 CE-19394Field Wiring, Meter Pulse Bd (2-Ch) CE-12694Field Wiring, AC I/O Board CE-12695Field Wiring, DC I/O Board CE-12696Field Wiring, Enhance I/O Bd CE-19027Field Wiring, Additive Injector Board CE-12697Field Wiring, 2-Chan. ADC Board BE-12707Field Wiring, 8-Chan. ADC Board CE-12698Field Wiring, Remote Display BE-12711Outline and Dimension XP enclosure DE-12535Suggested Permissive Wiring BE-12722Swing Arm Applications BE-12789Print Sharer Wiring (Dresselhaus) BE-12462Wiring for Model 1815 Valve AE-12496Control Valve Seal Placement AK-31030Turbine Meter Seal Placement AK-31031DanLoad 6000 Preset Seal Placement AK-31032Typical Swing Arm / Ground Wiring AK-31033

WARRANTY CLAIM REQUIREMENTS

To make a warranty claim, you, the Purchaser, must: 1. Provide Daniel with proof of the Date of Purchase and proof of the Date of Shipment of

the product in question.

2. Return the product to Daniel within twelve (12) months of the date of original shipmentof the product, or within eighteen (18) months of the date of original shipment of theproduct to destinations outside of the United States. The Purchaser must prepay anyshipping charges. In addition, the Purchaser is responsible for insuring any product shippedfor return, and assumes the risk of loss of the product during shipment.

3. To obtain Warranty service or to locate the nearest Daniel office, sales, or service center

call (281) 897-2900, Fax (281) 897-2901, or contact:

Daniel Measurement Services19203 Hempstead HighwayHouston, Texas 77065

When contacting Daniel for product service, the purchaser is asked to provide informationas indicated on the following "Customer Problem Report".

Daniel Measurement Services offers both on call and contract maintenance servicedesigned to afford single source responsibility for all its products.

Daniel Industries, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time to any product toimprove its design and to insure the best available product.

DANIEL INDUSTRIES, INC.CUSTOMER PROBLEM REPORT

FOR FASTEST SERVICE, COMPLETE THIS FORM, AND RETURN IT ALONG WITH THE AFFECTED

EQUIPMENT TO CUSTOMER SERVICE AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW.

COMPANY NAME:____________________________________________________________________________

TECHNICAL CONTACT:_________________________________ PHONE:______________________________

REPAIR P. O. #:_____________________________ IF WARRANTY, UNIT S/N: _________________________

INVOICE ADDRESS:____________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

SHIPPING ADDRESS: ___________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

RETURN SHIPPING METHOD: __________________________________________________________________

EQUIPMENT MODEL #:____________________ S/N:__________________FAILURE DATE: _____________

DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM: __________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

WHAT WAS HAPPENING AT TIME OF FAILURE? ________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

ADDITIONAL COMMENTS: ____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

REPORT PREPARED BY:________________________________ TITLE:________________________________

IF YOU REQUIRE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE, PLEASE FAX OR WRITE THE MAIN CUSTOMER SERVICE

DEPARTMENT AT:

DANIEL MEASUREMENT SERVICES PHONE: (281) 897-2900

ATTN: CUSTOMER SERVICE FAX: (281) 897-2901

19203 HEMPSTEAD HIGHWAY

HOUSTON, TEXAS 77065

The sales and service offices of Daniel Industries, Inc. are locatedthroughout the United States and in major countries overseas.

Please contact Daniel Measurement Services at19203 Hempstead Highway, Houston, Texas 77065, or phone (281) 897-2900

for the location of the sales or service office nearest you. Daniel Measurement Services offers both on-call and contract

maintenance service designed to provide single-source responsibility for all Daniel Measurement and Control products.

Daniel Measurement and Control reserves the right to make changes to any of its products or services

at any time without prior notification in order to improve that product or service and to supply

the best product or service possible.

danload 6000 script language reference …...danload 6000 script language reference manual _____...

Documents